Google
This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world's books discoverable online.
It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.
Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.
Usage guidelines
Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing tliis resource, we liave taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:
+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.
+ Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for in forming people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.
+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe.
About Google Book Search
Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web
at |http: //books .google .com/I
GRAMMAR
OP THE
MALAYAN LANGUAGE,
^c.
GRAMMAR
OF THE
MJLLAYAJV LAJVGUAGE,
WITH
AN INTRODUCTION AND PRAXIS,
By WILLIAM MARSDEN, F.R.S.
AUTHOR OF THE MALAYAN DICTIONARY, AND OF THE HISTORY OF SUMATRA.
LONDON:
Printed for the AUTHOR by Cox and Batlis, 75, Great Queen-Street, LincolnVInn-Fields ;
and sold by Lonoman, Hurst, Rbes, Orme, and Browv, Paternoster-Row ;
and Black, Parrt, and Co. Booksellers to the Honourable East-Iudia
Company, Leadenhali-Strect.
1813.
n..
.;. . .
• • • • •
• »
INTRODUCTION.
The Malayan, or, according to the proiiuociation of the
natives, the Malayu language (of whicli a Dictionary was
lately, and a Grammar is now oflered to the public) prevails
throughout a very extensive portion of nhat is vaguely termed
the East-Indies, including the southern part of the peninsula
beyond the Ganges, now bearing the name of the Malayan
peninsula, together with the islands of SUMATRA, java, Borneo,
CELEBES, and innumerable others, as far to the eastward as the
MOLUCCAS, emphatically termed the Spice-islands, to the south-
ward, as the island of timor, and to the northward, as the
PHILIPPINES ; forming collectively the Malayan archipelago.
This great insular region may also not inaptly receive the ap-
pellation of the Hither Polynesia, as distinguished from the
Further Polynesia or vast expanse of South-sea islands, be-
tween which, NEW guinea may be considered as the common
boundary. The name of Polynesia, as applied to this tract,
was first used by M. de brosses, and afterwards adopted by the
late Mr. A. DALRYMPLE.
It must at the same time he understood that the islands of this
archipelago, for the most part, especially those of the larger
class, and the peninsula itself, have also their own peculiar lan-
guages, (whether radically differing or not, will be hereafter exa-
xn'mcd) spoken by the inhabitants of the inland country, whilst the
a Malayan
:i;j6636
INTRODUCTION.
Malayan is generally employed In the districts bordering on the
sea-coasts and the mouths and banks of navigable rivers. It is
consequently the medium of conmiercial and foreign intercourse,
and everv person, of whatever nation, who frequents a port of
trade must negociate his business in this tongue, either speaking
it himself or employing an interpreter. From hence it is that,
by comparison with a similar prevalence of a dialect of Italian «r
Catalonian along the shores of the Mediterranean, it has com-
monly received the appellation of the Ungua franca of the East.
On the continent of India however it has not obtained any foot-
ing, or is known only to those merchants and seamen who are
engaged in what is denominated the Eastern trade-
That the Malayan language has obtained this extensive cur-
rency is attributable in the first place to the enterprising and
commercial character of the people, who either by force of arms
or in the spirit of mercantile speculation, have established them-
selves in every part of the archipelago convenient for their pur-
suits ; and perhaps in an equal degree, to the qualities of the
language itself, being remarkably soft and easy of pronunciation,
simple in the grammatical relation of its words, and in the
construction of its sentences, plain and natural. The attention
indeed to smoothness of utterance is so great that not only, in
the formation of derivatives, letters are systematically changed
in order to please the ear, but also in words borrowed from the
continental tongues, the Malays are accustomed to polish down
the rougher consonants to the standard of their own organs.
As a written language the Malayan has been cultivated with
no inconsiderable degree of care, and however the dialects as
spoken may vary from each other in the sound of certain vowels
(as will be noticed particidarly in the gramjuar), or by the
adoption
INTRODUCTION.
adoption of local and bai'barous terms from the inland people or
from Europeans, there is a striking consistency in the style of
writing, not only of books in prose and verse, but also of epis-
tolary correspondence, and my own experience has proved to me
that no greater difficulty attends the translation of letters from
the princes of the Molucca islands, than from those of Kedah or
Transgiinu in the peninsula, or of Blenan^kJhau in Sumatra.
Nor is this uniformity surprising when we consider that none of
the compositions in their present form can be presumed more
ancient than the introduction of the Mahometan religion in the
fourteenth or, at soonest, the thirteenth century, at which period
the Arabic mode of writing must likewise have been adopted ;
for although it cannot be doubted that the Malays, as well as the
other natives of these countries, made use of a written cliaracter
previously to that great innovation, yet the general style of com-
position must have received a strong tincture from its new dress,
and this Arabian garb being similar throughout the different
islands, we are naturally led to expect a more marked resem-
blance in the language so clothed than in the original nakedness
of the oral ditdects.
The antiquity of these dialects we arc entirely without the-
means of ascertaining, so modern is the acquaintance of Euro-
peans with that part of the East. The earliest specimen we
possess is that furnished by the circumnavigator pigafetta, the
companion of Magelihan, who visited the island of Ted ri in the
year 1521, and whose vocabulary, in spite of the unavoidable
errors of transcription and printing, accords as exactly with the
Malayan of the present day as those formed by any of our
modern travellers, and proves that no material alteration in the
tongue has taken place in the course of three centuries. In the
vocabulary
INTRODUCTION.
vocabulary collected by the Dutch navigators at Ternati^ in 1599
(" servant de promptuaire a ceux qui y desirent naviguer, car la
langue Malayte s'usc par toutes les Indes Orientales, principale-
ment ez Molucques ") we equally find an entire identity with the
modern dialect.
Having described the language as confined in general to the sea-
coasts of those countries where it is spoken, and consequently as
that of settlers or traders, we are naturally led to inquire in what
particular country it is indigenous, and from whence it has ex-
tended itself throughout the archipelago. Many difficulties will
be found to attend the solution of this question, partly occasioned
by the bias of received opinions, grounded on the plausible asser-
tions of those who have written on the subject, and partly from
the want of discriminating between the country from whence
the language may be presumed to have originally proceeded, and
that country from whence, at a subsequent period, numerous
colonies and commercial adventurers issuing, widely diffused it
amongst the islands whose rich produce in spices, gold, and
other articles attracted their cupidity. From the peninsula espe-
cially, where trade is known to have flourished for several cen-
turies with extraordinary vigour and to have occasioned a corres-
pondent population, these migrations took place, and it was
natural for those travellers who in early times ■visited Malacca,
Johor, and other populous towns in that quarter, to bestow on
it the appellation of the Malayan peninsula, or (with much less
propriety) the peninsula of Malacca, and to consider it as the
mother country of the Malays, which in face it is with respect
to the colonies it has so abundantly sent forth. But subsequent
investigation has taught us that in the peninsula itself the MA-
LAIS were only settlers, and that the interior districts, like those
of
INTRODUCTION.
of the islands in general, are inhabited by distinct races of men.
Among these are the drang benua or aborigines noticed by Mr.
BAFFi-ES in his valuable paper on the MalAt/u nation, printed in
the Asiat. Res. vol. xii. *' The Malays (says this gentleman,
whose recent appointment to a situation of as great trust and
importance as a nation can confide to an individual, justifies the
opinion that in a former work I had an opportunity of expressing^
with regard to his talents) seem here to have occupied a country
previously unappropriated ; for if we except an inconsiderable
race of Caffries, who are occasionally found near tlie mountains,
and a few tribes of the orang benua, there does not exist a ves-
tige of a nation anterior to the Malays, in the whole peninsula.
As the population of the Malay peninsula has excited much
interest, my attention has been particularly directed to the
various tribes stated to be scattered over the country. Those on
the hills are usually termed Samangy and are woolly beaded ;
those on the plain, orang benua, or people belonging to the
countiy ; the word benua being applied by the Malays to any
extensive coimtry, as benua China, bcjuia Keling : but it appears
to be only a sort of Malay plural to the Arabic word ben or heniy
signifying a tribe. The early adventurers from Arabia fre-
quently make mention in their writings of the different tribes
they met with to the eastward, and from them most probably the
Malays have adopted the term orang benua." From the paucity
of their numbers as here described we are led to remark that
they must have been reduced in an extraordinary degree, either
by wars or by proselytism (which tends to confound them with
the Malays) since the days of the Portuguese government. I must
further take the hberty of observing with respect to tlie word
^ benua^ (as being of importance in the present investigation)
i9Ti'\. b- . that
INTRODUCTION.
that it is entirely unconnected with the Arabic ^jj hem " sons or
tribe," from which it cannot he derived by any rule or analogy
whatever ; but is, on the contrary, a genuine Malayan term,
signifying " country, region, land," or one of those radical
words which the Malayan has in coniinon with the other East-
insular or Polynesian languages, being found not only in the
Bisaya and other dialects of the Philippines, but also in the
South-sea languages under the form (differing more in appear-
ance than reality) of " wAenn«« " and " fenua." To render it
applicable to " persons," the word orang must be prefixed, and
drang beiiua signifies literally and strictly " the people of the
land," as distinguished from foreign settlers or invaders ; and
this phrase alone affords no weak proof (if others were wanting)
that the Malays do not regard themselves as the original inha-
bitants, but as the occupiers only, of the country.
In the neighbouring island of Sumatra, on the contrary,
the kingdom which occupies the central part and claims a para-
mount jurisdiction over the whole ; which in ancient times was
of great celebrity, and even in its ruins is the object of super-
stitious veneration with all descriptions of inhabitants ; this
kingdom of Menan^kabau is entirely peopled with maiays, the
language there spoken is Malayan only, and no tradition exists
of the country having ever been Inhabited by any other race.
So strong indeed is the notion of their own originality, that they
commence their national history with an account of Noah's
flood, and of the disembarkation of certain persons from the
Ark, at a place between the mouths of Palemhang and Jambi
rivers, who were their lineal ancestors ; which belief, however
futile, serves to shew that they consider themselves as the dravg
benua or people of the soil, indigence non advence.
From
PRODUCTION.
From such a Malayan country rather than from any maritime
establishments, which always bear the stamp of colonization, we
might be justified in presuming the Malays of other parts to
have proceeded in the first instance; but it happens that we are
not obliged to rest our opinion upon this reasoning from proba-
bilities, for we have iu support of it the authority of the native
historians of the peninsula, the most distinguished of whom
assert in positive terms that the earliest Malayan settlers there,
by whom the city of Singa-pura was founded at fijong tanah or
" the extremity of the land," in tlie twelfth century, migrated
in the spirit of adventure from Sumatra, where they had pre-
viously inhabited a district on tlie banks of the river Malayu,
said, in the style of mythology, to have its source in the moun-
tain of Maha-mĕrn. For some details respecting this emigra-
tion, the transactions that succeeded, the expulsion of the
Malays from Singa-pfira, in the reign of their fifth king, SrJ
Iskander Shah, by the forces of the king of Majapiihit, at that
time the principal monarch of java, their founding the city of
Malacca in 1253, and also respecting the connexion still under-
stood to subsist between Manangkabau as the parent state, and
that of Semhau, a district situated inland of Malacca^ " the
raja of which, as well as his ofiicers receive their authority and
appointments from the Sumatran sovereign," I must take the
hberty of referring the reader to the History of Sumatra (ed
3. p. 325 to 345), in which be will find the authorities for what
is here advanced, collected and discussed. It is not however tc
be confidently expected that an opinion so much at variance witl
those hitherto prevailing on the suliject, will be adopted without
further and strict investigation. To the advocates for the supe-
riority of the Malays of the peninsula and of their language
▼iii INTRODUCTION.
over what they term provincial dialects^ I have only to say that
it is by no means my intention to contest that superiority^ how«
.ever ideal, which may have been acquired by a more extensive
intercourse with other nations^ but only to state the grounds for
a belief that the generic name of Malayu^ now so widely disse-
minated, did not in its origin belong to that country, but to
the interior of the opposite island, where, in the neighbourhood
of the mountain of Sungei-pagUj so celebrated for its gold mines,
and from whence rivers are said to flow towards either coast, it
is found a^ a common appellative at this day, and particularly
belongs to the great tribe of Sungei^pagu Malayu^ of whom an
account is given in the work of vatentyn, v deel, ^* Beschry-
vinge van Sumatra,'* p. 13, 14.
In discussing this subject it becomes necessary for me to ob-
serve upon some passages in a paper ^^ on the Languages and
Literature of the Indo-Chinese nations *' printed in vol x. of the
Asiat. Researches. The untimely and unfortunate loss of its
ingenious author, under circumstances the most favourable for
the prosecution of his inquiries, I deeply regret, and the more
pointedly as I feel myself called upon, in defence of my own, to
question the correctness of several of his opinions that appear
to have been too hastily adopted, and which I wished him to
have brought to the test of local knowledge. " The Menang*
kdbow race (he states) who seem at an early period to have ruled
the whole island of Sumatra, whose chief assumes the title of
Maha Raja of BajaSj and derives his origin from Lankapura,
speak a dialect of Malayu which di&rs considerably from that
of the peninsula; but which seems, as far as I can judge, to
. coincide in many respects with the Jawa or Javanese language.
The race have probably derived their origin from Langkapura
in
INTRODUCTION. ii
in Java." In support of Dr. leyuen's favourite system, the
object of which is to derive the language and literature of the
Malays from java, the dialect of Menangkabau is here asserted
to have much more affinity to the Javanese than to the Malayan
of the peninsula ; but all who are acquainted with these coun-
tries must know that the Javanese, although a radical affinity
exists and many words are common to both, is a distinct lan-
guage from the Malayan, not reciprocally understood by the
natives (the Javans usually acquiring the latter for the purposes
of intercourse), and written in a different chararter; whilst, on
the contrary, the dialect of Malayan spoken in Sumatra differs
from that of the peninsula in pronunciation merely or the more
or less broad terminating vowels, as remarked by Mr. raffles.
It must further be remarked that in the same page where Dr.
LEYDEN read that the Maharaja derived his origin from Langka-
pura (Hist, of Sum. p. 340) he must have likewise seen that it
is situated (according to the pompous edict, and whether imagi-
nary or not is of little importance) between Palembang and
Janibl, on the eastern coast of Sumatra, and by no means on
Java, where no such name is to be found.
It is not a little remarkable that in the correspondence of the
Malays, and I allude especially to the chiefs of the various dis-
tricts of the peninsula, whose letters I possess in great numbers,
the term " maldyu" as applied to themselves or other eastern
people, very rarely occurs, and that instead of it they familiarly
employ the phrase of oran^ de-bawah angin, signifying the " lee-
ward people," or literally, '* the people beneath the wind," in
contradistinction to the orang de-atas angin, " windward people,"
or those " above the wind." From whence this meteorological
rather than geographical distinction has arisen, or upon what
c principle
INTRODUCTION.
principle of trade wind or monsoon it is to be justifiedj I am una-
ble to determine; nor is the consideration of equal moment with
that of ascertaining the region to which the distinction is appHed.
The earliest notice of it is to he found in the asia of de bar-
Hos, sixth Book of the second Decade, where we are told that
" previously to the founding of the city of Malacca, that of
Singa'pfira was resorted to by the navigators of the western seas
of India, as well as by those of countries lying to the eastward
of it, such as Siam, China, Chiampa, Camhoja, and the many
thousand islands scattered over the eastern ocean. On these two
regions of the globe tlie natives (of the eastern part) bestow the
appellation of de-hawah angin and atas angin, signifying below
the wind and above the wind, or Western and Eastern. For as
the principal navigation in these seas is either from the Bay of
Bengalj on the one side, or from the great gulf which extends
itself towards the coasts of China and far to the northward, on
the other, they with reason considered that quarter in which the
«un rises, the upper, and that in which he sets the nether side
with respect to the situation of Singa-pura." Unfortunately
however for this plausible solution it happens that the Portu-
guese historian, who was not locally acquainted with the coun-
try, has misconceived the relative circumstances, which are
exactly the reverse of what he has stated, the leeward people
being situated, not towards the setting but the rising sun. By
TALENTYN, thc elaborate Dutch oriental historian, who com-
posed his great work on the spot, we are informed (y. deel,
Beschryvinge van Malakka, p. 310) that " the Malays are
commonly named orang de-bJwah angina leeward people or
easterlings, and the inhabitants of the western countries^, espe-
cially the Arabians, dra7tg atas angin, windward people or wes-
terhngs ;"
INTRODUCTION.
terlings;" but he does not attempt to explain the meaning of the
terms, or to assign any grounds for the distinction. These two
authorities being thus obviously at variance with regard to the
specific application, it becomes necessary to have recourse to
that of the natives themselves, by whom the terms are so fre-
quently employed. In a book containing a digest of their cere-
monial law, founded on the precepts of the kordu, the following
passage presents itself : " Pada segala negri tang de-bdwah angin
orang meng-korhan-kan karhnu tin ter-afzal deri-pada lembu in
all the countries benpath the wind the people sacrifice the hiiffalo
in preference to the ox." Now as it. is well known, and will be
admitted, that the karhau or buffalo is the animal usually killed
both for food and sacrifice in the farther East, and that, on the
other hand, it Is not a native of Arabia, it follows that the 7iegj-t
de-bawah angin must apply to the former, and cannot to the
latter or western country.
To my readers in general, who have not formed any previous
opinion, I should deem it unnecessary to adduce further proofs,
but as some of my friends abroad, to whom I proposed a ques-
tion on the subject of these relative terms, furnished me with
explanations not very consistent with each other, one of them
(whose practical knowledge of the language as well as the man-
ners of the natives has seldom been equalled) assuring me that
they referred to the superior and inferior ranks of people in so-
ciety, I shall transcribe a passage or two from the correspon-
dence of the Malayan princes of the peninsula, which may
perhaps be thought decisive. " Govranddr pillaii plnang tang
memegang parentak kompant dan tang menolong raja-rdja de-
hdwak angin ini dan mashur-lah warta-nia de-hdwak angin dan
de-dtas angin the governor of Piilo Plnang who exercises the
authority
INTRODUCTION.
authority of the Company ; who gives assistance to the chiefa
of these leeward countries, and whose fame is celebrated both
beneath the wind and above the wind." And again : " Ada
skĕkh tiga tang andak pulaitg ka arabi maka andak-lak anak
ktta tblong tumpang-kan ka-pada kapal tang andak pergi ka-
tablah atas angin sana there are three sheiks who wish to return
to Arabia. Will my son have the goodness to assist them with
a passage by a ship proceeding towards those windward (western)
parts ?" Here at least there can be no ambiguity with respect
to the geographical appropriation of the term.
On the western coast of Sumatra the name of Brang atas
at^in is commonly applied to the inhabitants of a maritime dis-
trict in the neigbbom-hood of the country from whence the prin-
cipal quantity of gold is procured, and has been generally un-
derstood to have a reference to the direction of the westerly
monsoon, supposed to yary several points above and below In-
dra-para. Suspecting however that this might have been an
opinion gratuitously adopted, or an accommodation of the fact
to the etymology, I retjuested Mr. charles hollowav, an in-
telligent gentleman, then chief of Padang, to let me know the
acceptation of the phrase amongst the inhabitants of that place,
^tuated as it is within the district of which we are speaking.
To this he replied, that " the atas ajrgin people were not consi-
dered as uratig darat or " natives of the land," like those of
Menangkahauy but generally as adventurers, being a mixture of
all nations, residing at the mouths of the rivers and along the
sea-shore, from Ayer Aji as far to the northward as Harus,
where the Achinese territory commences; and that a M€nan}ku~
bau man would feel very indignant at being confounded with
people of this description :" from whence it is evident that they
hava
INTRODUCTION.
Bave no claim to be excepted from the foregoing definitiou of
western foreigners, or settlers from Arabia, Persia, and the
coasts of the peninsula of India, attracted by the richness of the
trade, and intermixed with the natives of the country by mar-
riages, or rather, peihaps, in these days, the progeny of such
mixture.
Upon the subject of these terms M^ raffles has judiciously
observed to nie that in their collective sense they are equivalent
to the Arabic expression ^ly^ arahu ajein^ denoting all man-
kind, as Greeks and Barbarians, Jews and Gentiles ; which is
perfectly true as to the universality, but the Malays do not, iu
imitation of those arrogant phrases, assume to themselves a su-
periority over the rest of the world ; for however, as Maho-
metans, believing in one God, they might be inclined to rank
themselves above all polytheists, this sentiment cannot apply to
other Mahometans of the continent of India, much less to their
religious instructors the Arabians. Their expression must be
considered as a mere local designation, serving to draw a line
between the countries and people situated to the eastward of
j4cAm-head or entrance of the straits of Ma/acca, who are the
drang de-bawali mij-m, and those situated to the westward of
that meridian, who are the drang de-atas angin. Precision, at
the same time, is not to be looked for in matters of this nature,
and I am unable to determine whether pegu, siam, camboja,
COCHIN-CHINA, and CHINA itself are in fact understood to be
comprehended in the former division, or whether it is re-
stricted (as seems from their writings the more probable) to the
Malayan and east-insular countries only.
The appellation of 7l/a/ay« is given in common both to the
people and the language, but there are other terms applicable
d onlv
INTRODUCnON.
only to the latter, of which that of Jdun or hhasa jawl is the
most deserving of notice, being employed in writings to denote
the vernacular language of the Malays, especially that of books,
as distinguished from all foreign languages. In this sense it is
that the author of the ^^ i^ or *' Mirrour of the Faithful"
(as quoted by werndly) informs us that he composed his hook
(in the year 1009 — 1601) in the hhasa jawl, with the design of
facilitating the knowledge of the Almighty to all searchers of
divine truths who might not understand the Arabic or the Per-
sian ;" and in this sense, likewise, one of the princes of the
peninsula requests the chief of PiiJo P'tnang to translate into the
vernacular dialect a letter from the Governor General of Ben-
gal, there not being any one in his dominions who could read
Persian. Of the acceptation, therefore, of the -worii jiiivl there
should appear no room for doubt, although much diversity of
opinion has existed with respect to its specilie meaning and ety-
mology.
Some have contended for its being a derivative from the name
of JAVA; but nothing is more evident, from the whole tenour of
the Malayan writings, than that the term of ^^ ^Uj hhasa
jawiy notwithstanding the affinity of sound, is entirely distinct
from that of jU- ,j^_ hkasaj.nva or language of java. I have
even met with them contrasted in the same sentence, where a
thing was said to he called by one name in the jiiwi or Malayan,
and by such another in theyjw« or Javanese. It may likewise
he observed, that although in Sanskrit and Persian it is commoa
to form adjectives by annexing t to the substantive, and to say
Bengali, Hindustan'!, Konkanl, as applied, (no matter how
vulgarly) to the languages of bengal, Hindustan, or the
KONKAK, no such formation takes place in the Malayan, nor
could
INTRODUCTION.
could jaw7 by any rale of grammar be a derivative from jawa.
Indeed it is sufficient for shewing how httle stress should be laid
upon the affinity of sound in this instance, to mention that the word
jikvJ is Hkewise the common term for *' cattle," and juwi-j'uwJ for
the "Jicus racemosa," neitlier of vvhicli are presumed to have been
introduced from Java, werndly confesses himself much at a
loss with respect to its derivation, and after discussing several
conjectunil etymologies, gives it as his opinion, that if it has a
connexion with the name of yntyn or JAVA, it must have arisen
from t)ic circumstance of that name having in ancient times
been appHed to Sumatra, as we learn from marco polo, and
which he thinks is corroborated by the Arabic term for gum
benzoin or benjouin, being ^jjU-|^U luhan jdwi; wljereas it is
well known that the article is not produced in java, but abun-
dantly in the northern parts of SUMATRA. According to Mf.
BAFFLES " the word j'akivt is the Malay term for any thing
mixed or crossed ; as when the language of one country is writ-
ten in the character of another, it is termed h'hdsajahwi or
mixed language ; or when a child is born of a Kiling father
and Malay mother, it is called anakjahwl, .1 child of mixed
race. Thus the Mulayu language being written in the Arabic
character is termed b'hdsajahwl."
The appellations hitherto mentioned, whatever their shades of
difference may be, are employed to distinguish this language
from those which are foreign to it, but there are also terms
which serve to distinguish the various styles (rather than dia-
lects) of the language itself, iis spoken by different ranks or
classes of people in the same country. These are, the bhasa
daiam, hkiisa han^sawan, bhasa dUgang, and hh'isa kachiik-ati.
The bkJsa d^iknn or courtly style takes its name from the
word
INTRODUCTION.
word Jb dalmn, signifying " a royal palace or court," and noit,
as has been supposed by the author of the dissertation " on the
language and literature of the Indo-Chinese nations," from the
preposition dalam " in." From this misconception of the word
he was led to consider it as the " language of the interior," and
to frame, as its correlative, the term bkdsa luar, to denote an
** exterior " or vulgar language of the coasts, which, although
the words are intelligible, I can venture to say, does not exist
as a phrase. (See Asiat. Res. vol. x. p. 189.) The style of
courts is by no means uncommon in books, because the princi-
pal characters, both male and female, introduced in romances
and heroic poems, are always of royal, if not of divine lineage,
and the language they speak, as well as that in which they are
addressed by their compeers and their attendants, must be suita-
ble to the condition of such personages.
The bhasa hangsjwan or style of the politer classes of society,
does not in its general tenour ditFer materially from that of the
court, but is at the same time distinguished from it by some
expressions in the former applicable only to royalty, such as
li^ tltdh or i_. sabda for cu;lS kata to say, i_Ji:-) santap for ^U
mii/can to eat, j^Sj ber-adii for joj; ttdor to sleep, tcXl* mangkat
or i_LA itang for cjL. mati deceased, defunct.
The bfiasa dagang, as the term implies, is that of merchants
who trade from port to port, whose language is simple in its
construction, and perspicuous, as their dealings retiuirc, but less
elegant and less grammatical than the preceding. It necessa-
rily admits the use of many foreign names for articles of mer-
chandise, such as IjjJj beldtiiva for velado velvet, ci-'iJL< sakelat
scarlet cloth, Jj^ r:al a Spanish dollar. The language spoken
by European gentlemen may be considered as belonging to this
division ;
rNTRODUCTION. xvii
division ; but, respected as they are in tlieir political capacity,
when their manners accord with the dignity of their situations,
they ought to adopt the style of the bhasa bangsawan, which
would be much facilitated by the habitual perusal of good
writings.
The basest and most corrupt style is termed bhusa kackuk-an,
from jj-K kachuk to jumble together, as being the mixed jargon
of the bazars of great sea-port towns, where an assemblage of
people of all nations render themselves intelligible to each other
by a sort of language of convention, of which Malayan is the
basis. Into this low dialect a number of European words and
phrases found admittance during the time of the Portuguese
domination in India, a list of which is subjoined to the Dutch
and Malayan vocabulary of Justus heurnius, originally pub-
lished in 1650; and even the superior styles are not entirely
exempt from them, as the words '^ tempo" "senhor," " masgiie,"
and a few others occur in the correspondence of persons of rank.
Several Dutch terms have been in like manner adopted ; but,
from the more confined limits of our establishments, the English
innovations have hitherto been very inconsiderable. Books are
in general free from the influence of these barbarisms.
Having thus described the exterior circumstances of the lan-
guage, as they respect the country where it was spoken at the
period of the earliest Malayan emigration on record, and those
extensive regions where it prevails at the present day ; as well
as the appellations by which it is distinguished from other orien-
tal tongues, both by foreigners and by the natives themselves ;
it now remains to examine its component parts, and to point out
those more original languages from whence we may presume it
fUJ e to
INTRODUCTION,
to be derived, or which have contributed to its improvement
and to that degree of copiousness of which it may fairly boast.
A paper which the Asiatic Society of bengal did me the
honour of printing in the fourth volume of their researches,
contained the ideas I had formed on this subject, and which I
have not since found reason to vary from in any material point ;
hut as some of them have been controverted and partly misun-
derstood, I shall here endeavour to restate more explicitly the
grounds of my opinion, and to obviate such objections as have
been urged to my analysis of the language.
That the words of which it consists may be divided into three
classes, and that two of these are hindu and arabic, has been
generally admitted. The doubts that have arisen respect only
the third, or that original and essential part which, to the ma-
lAYAN, stands in the same relation as the saxon to the English,
and which I have asserted to be one of the numerous dialects of
the widely extended language found to prevail, with strong fea-
tures of similarity, throughout the archipelago on the hither
side of New Guinea, and, with a less marked resemblance,
amongst the islands of the Paci6c Ocean or South Sea. This
language, which, in its utmost range, embraces Madagascar
also to the westward, may be conveniently termed the Polyne-
sian, and distinguished, as already suggested, into the Hither
(frequently termed also the £last insular language) and the Fur-
ther Polynesian. To shew the general identity or radical con-
nexion of its dialects, and at the same time their individual dif-
ferences, I beg leave to refer the reader to the tables annexed
to a paper on the subject which I presented so long ago as the
year 1/80 to the Society of Antiquaries, and is printed in vol. vi.
of
INTRODUCTION.
of the Archreologia ; also to a table of comparative numerals ia
the appendix to vol. iii. of Capt, Cook's last voyage ; and like»
wise to the chart of ten numerals in two hundred languages, by
the Rev. R. Patrick, recently published in valpy's Classical,
Biblical, and Oriental Journal. These, however, should be
considered rather as illustrations than proofs of what has been
stated, the subject requiring a more detailed examination of
their respective vocabularies. ,
It may be asked, with what propriety the Malayan, wbicli
has been described as a language of the coasts, and '^contrasted
with the Polynesian prevailing in the interior of the islands, can
at the same time be ranked as one of its dialects; especially
when upon comparison it will be found to vary much more from
them than they do from each other. This cannot be better ex-
plained than by pursuing further the analogies of our own
tongue. The English was in its origin a dialect of Teutonic
spoken in Lower Saxony, which, at subsequent periods, has
been enriched by a great accession of Norman, Greek, and
other terms, and in consequence of the political prosperity of
the nation, and its intercourse with foreigners, has been so
changed from its primitive rude state, as to be no longer under-
stood by the inhabitants of that country which gave it birth.
Let us now suppose large establishments of English merchants
settling at Embden, Bremen, Hamburgh, and Lubeck, and
there becoming of so much commercial importance as to render
their own the general language of communication with traders
from all other parts. Under such circumstances the English
would be to the natives of Lower Germany (assuming that these
have remained stationary) what the Malays are to the ancient
population of the islands ; children of the same stock, but
estranged
XX INTRODUCTION.
estranged from their brethren by the acquisition of foreign ha-
bits, and again frequenting them under the advantages of their
new condition.
In one respect, however, the analogy fails; for whilst we
possess some historical account of the expeditions which contri*
buted to people Great Britain with its present race, we are en-
tirely without record or tradition of the course of population
amongst these islands, prior to the comparatively modern pas-
sage of the Malays from sumatha to the opposite shores of the
. peninsula, at a period when their language had already received
those accessions which distinguish it from the generality of the
insular dialects. Whether, in times niuch earlier, tribes of JBcU^
ttzSy RejangSj or Lampangs migrated to Java^ JBoriieOy and the
MolticcaSy or whether the current ran in a contrary direction
and conveyed inhabitants to Sumatra from the more eastern
islands, must remain to be decided upon grounds of general
probability alone, although some of the superstitious tales of the
natives of the Philippines point to the former as the birth-place
of the parents of the human race. (Hist, of Sumatra, ed. 3.
p. 302.) But whatever pretensions any particular spot may
have to precedence in this respect, the so wide dissemination of
a language common to all, bespeaks a high degree of antiquity,
and gives a claim to originality as far as we can venture to apply
that term, which signifies no more than the state beyond which
we have not the means, either historically or by fair inference,
of tracing the origin. In this restricted sense it is that we ^re
justified in considering the main portion of the Malayan as ori-
ginal or indigenous ; its affinity to any continental tongue not
having yet been shewn ; and least of all can we suppose it con*-
nected
INTRODUCTION.
nected with the monosyllabic or iDdo-Chinese, with which it
has been classed.
What has been said will I trust be thought sufficient for de-
fining the language to which this radical portion belongs. I
have been the more anxious to make myself clearly understood,
because on a former occasion I appear not to have satisfied the
mind of the ingenious author of the paper on the languages and
literature of the Indo-Chinese nations, who introduces the fol-
lowing remark : " In another paper published in the Archaeo-
logia, vol. vi. this author has successfully exhibited a variety of
instances of coincidence, both in sound and signification, be-
tween the Malay and several of the eastern dialects. By at-
tempting to prove too much, however, I apprehend that he has
failed essentially. He has pointed out a few coincidences, but
has left the mass of the language totally unaccounted for ; and
as the few coinciding words may all have been derived from a
common source, it is perhaps a more natural inference to con-
clude that they have all been modified by some general language,
than, with sir wm. jones, to determine that the parent of them
all has been the Sanscrit." I confess that this passage does not
convey to my apprehension any very precise idea of the writer's
meaning, nor do I see, as I much wish, in what the force of
the objection consists. Can he have deemed it necessary for the
support of my conclusions that every coinciding word in these
dialects of the Polynesian should be enumerated? That indeed
would have been attempting too much. The dictionaries of
Tagala, Hisaya, Pampanga, and other Philippine languages
are voluminous, and a considerable proportion of the number of
words they contain is similar to those spoken in Sumatra. To
Iiave introduced them in a paper read to a learned society would
f have
INTRODUCTION.
have led me beyond al! reasonable bounds ; and yet in omitting
to do it, " I have left the mass of the language totally unac-
counted for." That they " may all have been derived from a
common source" can scarcely admit of a question; but what
ground is thence afforded for controverting my position that the
Malayan, in its original unmixed state, was one of its streams !
That common source he has not pointed out, and an investiga-
tion of the component parts of the language as we now find it,
does not demand it from me; for who in ascertaining the ety-
mology of our own tongue is required to discover the origin of
the Teutonic dialects?
It is necessary to observe, with regard to the Polynesian or
general East-insular language^ that it does not include those
spoken by the description of people termed Papua and Samang
by the Malays and N^egritos by the Spaniards of Manilla, whose
crisp or frizzled (rather than woolly) hair and dark skins, point
them out as a race totally distinct from the yellow complexioned,
long haired natives of whom we are speaking. These, as well
as the Haraforas and other savage tribes found in several parts
of the Archipelago, present a subject of research as curious as
it is obscure, but not being immediately connected with the
Malays or their language, they do not come within the scope of
this discussion.
We shall now direct our attention to those accessory tongues
from whence the Malayan acquired such a degree of improve-
ment, as removed it from the general level of the other cognate
dialects, and gave it a decided predoraiuance in that part of the
East. Of these the earliest as well as the most important ap-
pears to have been, either directly or mediately, that great parent
of Indian languages, the venerable Sanskrit, whose influence
INTRODUCTION. xiiii
is found to bave pervaded nearly the wliole of the Eastern (and
perhaps also of the Western) world, modifying and regenerating
even where it did not create. That the intercourse, whatever its
circamstances may have been, which produced this advantageous
effect on the Malayan, must have taken place at an early period,
is to be inferred not only from the deep obscurity in which it is
involved, but also from the nature of the terms borrowed, being
such as the progress of civilisation must soon have rendered
necessary, expressing the feelings of the mind, the most obvious
moral ideas, the simplest objects of the understanding, and those
ordinary modes of thought which result from the social habits of
mankind; whilst at the same time it is not to be understood, as
some have presumed to be the case, that the affinity between
these languages is radical, or that the latter is indebted to any
HiNUu dialect for its names for the common objects of sense.
It is proper also to remark, that in some instances the words so
btHTowed do not preserve the exact signification they bear in the
original, but acquire one more specific ; as ^ljL, sak'ti which in
Sans/crii denotes " power," is restricted In Malayan to " super-
natural power," and yj putra signifying " a son/' is applied
only to the ** son of a royal personage."
When in a paper written in the year 1^^ I pointed out " the
traces of the hindu language and literature extant amongst the
MALAYS," I presumed the discovery to be original, but soon
learned that I had been anticipated in my observation by the
revered president and founder of the Asiatic Society, who in bis
eighth Anuiversary Discourse had already made the remark
that '* without any recourse to etymological conjecture, we dis->
cover that multitudes of pure Sanskrit words occur in the
principal
INTRODUCTION.
principal dialects of the Sumatrans." Justice however to our
predecessors in the study of oriental languages requires me to
state, that in the preface to the Vocabulary of heurnius, it is
distinctly mentioned that beside several words adopted from the
neighbouring dialect of Java, the Malayan is largely indebted
to those of HINDUSTAN, and especially to the Sanskrit or sa-
cred language of the Brahmans.
An investigation of the period when, and the means by which
so copious and useful a class of words was incorporated with
some of the rude East-insular dialects, is a subject worthy of
the talents of those able scholars whose inquiries, directed to
the attainment of genuine historical and philological truth,
adorn the pages of the Asiatic hesearches. From the Ma-
lays themselves, or their writings, it is to be apprehended that
little information respecting facts of so ancient a date can now
be procured, and if the books of the hindds are equally silent,
we must be content to extract our knowledge from the sober
examination of intrinsic evidence. With this in view I miist
here take the liberty of observing tlmt much fallacious inference
appears to have been drawn from the resemblance of the San-
skrit term Malaya to the name of the people of whom we are
speaking, which has induced some persons, whose authority
carries with it great weight, to consider the Malaya divipa as
denoting the Malayan peninsula. But with all due deference,
on a point where my opinion must rest upon a comparison of
those passages in the researches or other published works, in
which the term occurs, I think it will be found to belong ex-
clusively to the mountainous region in the southern part of the
peninsula of India, known in the pravmcial dialect of the
country
INTRODUCTION.
country by the name of Malai/alam, as is the language by that
of MaleAuna ; all being derivatives from the word male^ signi-
fying "a mountain."
The most obvious mode in which we might presume the lan-
guage of a more civilised to have been communicated to a ruder
people, whose soil abounds with valuable productions, is that
of commercial intercourse, and we find accordingly, that when
Europeans first visited the Malayan ports, they describe them as
being crowded with vessels from the coasts of guzerat, Ma-
labar, and coROMANDEL, and with merchants from thence,
as well as from all other parts of the east, established on shore,
and occupying their respective kampongs or quarters in the ba-
zars. From such habitual residence and the familiarity it must
occasion, there is no doubt but that many words convenient for
the purposes of trade may have been introduced, as in later
days from the connexion with Europeans themselves; and it
would not be fair to deny that many others of a more general
nature might in the same manner have found their way; but
when we pay attention to the terms which actually constitute
this portion of the Malayan, and which in the Dictionary are
distinguished by their proper character, we shall perceive that,
for the most part, they not only belong to a class of ideas supe-
rior to what the transactions of a bazar would require, but also,
in respect to their form and pronunciation, are stamped with
the mark of the purest days of the Sa/iskrit, undebased by the
corruptions of its provincial dialects ; as may be instanced in
the conversion of the letter y intoy in the language of Bengal,
t/ilg being there pronounced jT/g, and yuj'ana (a geographical
term adopted by the Malays) pronounced jujan. For its pos-
sessing this latter quality I have (and trust I may long have)
g the
m
JUCTION.
the liviug authority of Mr. wilkins, as well as that of the
writings of sir william jones. Even Dr. i,eyden, though
rather an unwilling witness, admits that " the Sanscrit voca-
bles adopted in Malayu and Guzerdti, are generally preserved
purer in the former than in the latter ;" and again, that " in
many instances the Maliiyu form approaches nearer the pure
Sansci-it than even the Bali itself."
This Bali, or Paii, the sacred language of ava and hiam,
has hy some heen supposed, from its geographical proximity,
the most likely channel through which the hindu terms (being
Itself a dialect of Sanskrif) might have flowed into the Malayan
countries ; but independantly of the preceding objection, we
may ask whether it is probable that, from the circumstance of
vicinage, the occult and mysterious language of one country
should become popular in another, whilst the ordinary language
spoken by the bulk of the people should not have made any
similar progress. But in fact we have strong grounds for be-
lieving that the Malayan tongue had already received its acces-
sion of Sa?)skrU terms, before the spreading of its population
towards the North brought it into contact with the southern
dominions of Siam ; and since that period the two nations have
almost ever been at variance. From these considerations I
should strongly incline to coincide in opinion with Dr. leyden,
who had studied the language, that " the greater part of the
words of Sanscrit origin found in Malayu, do not appear to
have been introduced through the medium of tlie Bali.'" Yet
as the discovery of truth and not the support of any system is
my object, I shall produce a document lately come to my hands
which will be thought of nmch importance in the future dis-
cussion of this question, and add materially to the argument of
those
INTRODUCTION. xxvii
those who shall contend that the Bali or Pali has had a prin-
cipal share in contributing to the dissemination of the Hindu
language and mythology throughout the eastern islands. This
document is a letter from M. a. couperus,* a servant of the
late
• " My DEAR SiE, Calcutta, 25lh Oct. 1810.
I have the pleasure to send you a copy of two of my Java
drawings, taken from two stones found, with more than an hundred of the same
kind, in the interior part of the island. Tho numerous inscriptions seen on the
back of many of these stones, as also on the back of several metal idols found at
the same place, but of a much smaller size, ore in a language of which the cha-
racters are no longer known; the language appearing to be entirely lost. A spe-
cimen of these characters, taken with the utmost possible exactness from tw»
stones, I forward also with this. They differ in all respects from the Jaoanese
and other characters in use amongst the natives of the neighbouring countries.
There is no hope that we shall get any information from these natives upon sub-
jects of antiquity, as they have no proper records, nor have they preserved any"
branch of li-aming, which they, or those inhabitants who in old times worshipped
the idols, undoubtedly possessed. I have proofs that they had even a knowledge
of astronomy; but the present inhabitants are in respect of arts and scieaced,
most ignorant and superficial beings. 1 had hopes that some learned gentleman
or Bramin here in Bengal would have been found able to ascertain the language
of the inscriptions, but it appears that the characters are also unknown in Ben-
gal; which I consider as a great loss to letters, as the inscriptions are so veiy
numerous and almost all perfectly visible: and I have no doubt that some inte-
resting historical events would be discovered. Amongst the idols found in Java
(here are many of Brahma, Visnu, and other inferior deities of the Hind&s; so
that all the benefit history has gained by this discovery is, that it proves beyond
doubt that the inhabitants of Jaca, in very remote times, were idolaters of the
Brahma sect. A native of the Lampung country (in Sumatra) seeing some of
Ibose tiguies at my house in Batavia, informed me that many similar stones and
figures are to be seen in the interior part of Lampung, The same informalton I
got from an inhabitant of the Must country (Inland of Pakmbang) who had tra-
velled through the Lampung district, and bad seen similar moaumenta there.
Very
xxviii INTRODUCTION.
late Dutch East-India Company, and a distinguished member
of the Batavian philosophical society, addressed to my 6riend
Mr. CHARLES HOLLovvAY of Sencoolen (frotti whom I received
it), accompanied with two well executed drawings made from
stone images of Siva or Mahadeva, and Shavani, under the
appellations of JShairava and Butu-Bkarave, and also with
copies of long inscriptions carved upon the back of these or si-
milar images. The characters and language of the inscriptions
are stated to be equally unknown to the natives of the interior
oi Java (where they were found) and to the Brahmans of ben-
GAi. to whom he had shewn them. But upon examination the
characters prove to be no other than the square Pali, consi-
dered as sacred in the Birma or Ava country, and in Siam.
Of this my late worthy and ingenious friend coL. M. symes, in
his account of an embassy to Ava, gives a specimen, taken
from a beautiful manuscript containing an account of the cere-
mony used in the consecration of rhahaans or priests; which
Pali manuscript he afterwards presented to earl spencer, and
is now in the magnificent library of that nobleman. Being my-
self so fortunate as to possess an original alphabet and other
materials for ascertaining the language of the inscriptions, I
hope (with the aid of Mr. wjlkins) to succeed in translating
them.
Very probable it is that the inhabitants of both islands, Jaoa and Swrnoira, be-
fore ihey had embraced the Mahometan faith, were of the religion of Brahma.
Will you let me have for a moment again the letter from Mr. Marsden, in c»^er
to peruse the requeste of that learned gentleman, and should I be able to fbrnisb
him with any information, I «hall be happy to embrace the opportunity.
1 remain, &c.
To Charles HoUowsh/, Esq. A. CoPFlRfi.'*
Cakutta.
INTRODUCTION.
them, and although not so sanguine as m. coupervs in the ex-
pectation of discovering important historical documents, to be
enahled at least to detennine whether the Pali was, in ancient
times, employed as the sacred or learned language of Java also.
Images of the same kind, brought from JSalambuoTig, at the
southern extremity of the island, and opposite to that of Bali,
I remember to have seen in Sumatra ; but these were without
inscriptions, and did not at the time excite any particular atten-
tion. I have lately been informed that the officers commanding
our troops in t/twa have frequently recognised in their marches,
figures (especially of Gamsa') to which they had been familiarly
accustomed on the continent of India ; and that no opportunities
have been lost of making drawings of these as well a&fac similes
of ancient characters, wherever they have been discovered.
" It is needless (says D^. leyden) to adduce further instances"
(of the connexion of Malayan with SeTtgAli, from which, in
truth, it is more remote than from any other Sanskrit derivative)
" as the Malay Iiistory and the language itself, exhibit traces
sufficiently clear, to direct us to the region with which the Ma-
lays had the most frequent intercourse, at an early period, and
from which their language seems to have received the most
considerable modifications, and that is the ancient kingdom of
Kalinga. Here I am again under the necessity of dissenting
&om marsden's opinion : he says, ^* It is evident that from
the Telinga or the Tamul, the Malatfan has not received any
portion of its improvement." I apprehend that the express re-
verse of this opinion is evident; for the Malays, at this very
period, know the Coromandel coast by no other name than
Tanna Kelitig, the land of Keling or Kalinga : a multitude of
compositions current among them profess to be translations from
k the
INTRODUCTION.
the Basa-Keling or Kalingn language ; and the Malayu lan-
guage contains a great number of words that are Tamul, Ma-
laydlam and Telinga ; though neither Sajiscrit, Uhiduvi, nor
Guzeraii ; and a variety that are only to be found in TeliTiga,
the vernacular language of the Kalhiga Desa." Had D^ levden
favoured us with a list, however short, of these words borrowed
from the Telinga or the Tajiitil, which have no relation to the
Sanskrit, it would have given considerable weight to his asser-
tion. As it is, I can only say that such have very rarely occurred
in my limited examination of those languages. The word kappal
" a ship," which I find in a Tamul vocabulary, is obviously the
J*S of the Malays. Lavangum, the Telbiga word for " cloves,"
can be no other than "^p luwang or bunga lawang; but surely in
this instance it must be with the cultivator and not the consumer
that the word originated. I should almost venture to say the
same of padaua or padavu " a boat," which has a manifest af-
finity to yy jjrau or parau; for how can we suppose that these
islanders should borrow the most common term for their small
sailing vessels from the people of a distant continent ? The words
A\j rJgam modes in music, ^^ logam imaginary divisions of the
universe, Jji kiilam a pond, XU ma7tikam a precious stone, have
evident marks of their importation from the Kalijiga Desa or
negri kling, but they are at the same time a barbarous form of
Sanskrit, and their number, I think, could not be doubled in
the pages of the Malayan Dictionary.
The extensive commercial intercourse by Kling (Telinga or
Coromandet) vessels, between the ports of the continent of India
and those of jichin, Malacca, and others in the Straits, is matter
of notoriety, and it is likewise admitted that many translations
of Hindu stories have been made through the medium of the
languages
INTRODUCTION.
languages of the peninsula ; but it does not necessarily follow
that the Malayan *' received its most considerable modifications"
from that quarter. It must be observed that the Tamulj Te-
lingay and Kanar'i (all essentially one tongue) are radically dif-
ferent I'l'oiu the Sanskrit, although from the abundant infusion
of religious and poetical terms, they have not uncommonly been
mistaken for its derivatives ; and if it were to the traders of the
Coromandel or Malabar coasts that it was indebted for its im-
provement, the words so communicated would obviously have
belonged in greater numbers to the radical or vulgar portion of
the language, than to the learned ; and even the Sanskrit terms
that might have found their way along with these, would have
been affected by the peculiarities of orthography and pronun-
ciation which distinguish the Telinga from other corruptions,
and which, in fact, are observable in a few instances. But
BT. XrEVUEN himself bears testimony to the superior purity of
those adopted by the Malays ; and with respect to their number,
he says (somewhat gratuitously) that a list of about fifteen ex-
amples given by me as a specimen, " might, witli very little
labour, have been extended to fifteen hundred, or perhaps five
thousand." Upon assertions of this nature the columns of the
Dictionary form the best comment.
The strongest argument however against the probability of
commerce having exerted so powerful an influence and produced
an effect so extensive, is to he drawn from the nature of the
words themselves, which are not confined to the names of things,
but more usually express moral feelings, intellectual qualities, or
ideas connected with mythology. Can it be supposed that mer-
cantile visitors should have taught these people to denote "joy"
and " sorrow" by the terms suka-chita andduka-chita, " under-
standing"
xxxii INTRODUCTION.
derstanding" by budi, " prudence" by hijaksana, " loyalty" by
satiwatif *' kiudred" by kulawarga, " time" by kala, " cause"
by karna, or " penance" by tapa? Much less can we persuade
ourselves that the Saiiskrit names of cities, districts, and moun-
tains in the interior of the country (particularly oiJavd) should
have been imposed by strangers of this description. Innovations
of such magnitude, we shall venture to say, could not have been
produced otherwise than by the entire domination and possession
of these islands by some ancient Hindu power, and by the con-
tinuance of its sway during several ages. Of the period when
this state of things existed we at present know nothing, and
judging of their principles of action by what we witness in these
days, we are at a loss to conceive under what circumstances they
could have exerted an influence in distant countries of the nature
here described. The spirit of foreign conquest does not appear
to have distinguished their character, and zeal for the conver-
sion of others to their own religious faith, seems to be incom-
patible with their tenets. We may, however, be deceived by
forming our opinion from the contemplation of modern India,
and should recollect that previously to the Mahometan irruptions
into the upper provinces, which first took place about the year
1000, and until the progressive subjugation of the country by
Persians and Moghuls, there existed several powerful and opulent
Hindu states, of whose maritime relations we are entirely igno*
rant at present, and can only cherish the hope of future disco-
veries, from the laudable spirit of research that pervades and
does so much honour to our Indian establishments.
That the remains of superstitions and other traces of Hindu
occupancy should now be less frequently discernible in Sumatra
than in Java and Bali (where the practice of the wife's burning
INTRODUCTION. xsxiii
on the pile of her husband, and other peculiar customs still sub-
sist), may be the consequence of the earlier and more general
prevalence of the Mahometan religion in the former island; or,
it may be fair to conclude, as well from the number of idols
found in the latter, as from the Sanskrit terms abounding in the
court-language of Java, that it, rather than Sumatra, may have
been the principal seat of these Hindu colonial possessions. To
this supposition a strong colour is given by the ancient, though
fabulous history, of which we find a translation in the Transac-
tions of the Batavian Society. The genealogy of the sovereigns
oiJava is there deduced from Batara IVisnu (Avatara Vishnu)
who was their first king of the race of dewas, as distinguished
from the kings of men. That by the former of these we should
understand the Hindu rulers of the island, who may have been
brakmanSj and by the latter, the native princes of the country,
will not be thought an improbable conjecture; and may serve
to explain a distinction not otherwise reconcileable to common
sense. We may fiu-ther observe, that this mixture of mythology
with history being highly favourable to the composition of ro-
mances, not only the Javatis but the Malays also, notwithstand-
ing their Mahometan prejudices, have been fonder of laying the
scenes of their adventures amongst the deivas and rakskasas, than
amongst the maleikat ajid Jin (angels and demons) of their more
recent superstition.
Having now considered the Malayan as having been, in its
primitive state, a dialect of the Polynesian, and subsequently,
but at a very remote and an unknown period, enriched by an ac-
cession of Sanskrit words, we shall find it destined, in times
comparatively modern, to experience a further change in con-
sec^ue^ce of a great rehgious innovation which affected more or
^r*. . i less
INTRODUCTION.
less a vast portion of the known world. This was the Spreading
of the doctrine of the koran; not indeed rapidly, as in the west:,
by the aid of the sword, but with a gradual progress, the effect
of persuasion rather than of force. Traders from the Arabiaa
coasts had probably in all ages frequented the eastern seas, al-
though no record of their voyages of an earlier date than the
ninth century has been preserved; yet there is not reason to
conclude that this casual intercourse had any influence upon the
languages of the islands. In the twelfth century however, the
new religion maybe presumed to have gained considerable ground
amongst the inhabitants, as it appears tliat in the begmning of
the thirteenth, it was embraced and openly professed by some
of the princes, and even that those who preached it found the
means, in several instances, of raising themselves to the rank of
sovereigns. In the Annals of urchin we are distinctly told that
in the year 601 of the hejrah, answering to 1204,- sultan Juhan
Shah arri\'ed from tlte western country, established islamism in
that capital, and marrying a native princess, transmitted the
crown to his son. From the Annals of Malacca we learn that
4lhe conversion took place there during the reign of Mukainmed
Shah, who ascended the throne in 1276; and the Javanese re-
cords inform ns that the religion was tirst preached in their island,
so lately as 1406, by Sheikh Ihn Mulann, who had previously
visited j4chin and Pasĕ in Sumatra, and Johor in the peninsula.
The effects produced by the introduction of this religion
amongst the Malays, were similar to those which took place in
Persia and many other countries where it lias prevailed. The
use of the Arabic character superseded that of the ancient mode
of writing, and the language became exposed to an inundation
of new terms, for the most part theological, metaphysical, legal,
and
INTRODUCTION. xxxv
and cer^jlliioAid, the knowledge of which is indispensable to those
who study .the koraii and its commentaries. These terms their
writer^, in sqme species of composition, affect to introduce, as a
proof of their rehgious as well as their literary attaiflinents ; but
few of them, comparatively, have been incorporated with or con-
stitute a part of the language. On a former occasion -I had
added that they are rarely employed in conversation; an asser-
tion that;m9y have been too general, as pedants are to be found
in all countries. In the preambles of letters there i$ no limita-
tion to the use of Arabic epithets ; hut in the body or business
part they are much more sparingly employed; and in books of
narration, such as the version of the J^amayorta, as well as poetic
wOrks in general (with the exception of those upon religious
subjects), they are by no means frequent. About the number of
twenty or thirty words may be pointed out as having a claim,
-from their familiar recurrence, to be considered as Malayan by
adoption, (such as /J fikir or J^ ptkir to think, »i.>U adat cus-
tom,. Jie o^a/ ingenuity, lyj (/««yrt and JU rf/wm the world, Jx
almn a flag and Mniu science, (_jjU arif wise, C^ sak doubt, j«?
fajer the dawn, »jj kuwat vigour, jji kadar value, rate, jy3 kubiir
-a ^ave, jj*-" se/fid prostration, i w_- sebab cause, i,j_i sural writ-
-ing); whilst those others, of which it has been justly said by
D"*. I.EYDEN, that " it is difficult to assign any bounds to their
introduction hut the pleasure of the writer," must be regarded as
; foreign words ostentatiously displayed; like the French and
Latin with which the works of old German and Dutch authors
are chequered so profusely. The learner therefore is not to be
surprised at faihng to trace in the Dictionary many Arabic words
which he will find in manuscripts. Those occurring most fre-
quently have been invrted, but to have carried this to ' the full
\aiu extent
xxxVl
INTRODUCTION.
extent would have been to incorpcBTite the balk of the language^
and to encroach on the province of an Arabic lexicon. The
number of Malayan words, on the contrary, that have been trans-
ferred into other tongues, is \'ery limited ; yet the following have
obtained an extensive currency, not only in India, but in many
parts of Europe :
dammar, a species of resin ; j^jU
padl, paddi, rice in the husk ; lI/Lj sagu, sago ; ^-4; bamhu, the
cane ; ^J kampong an enclosure, vulgarly compound ; cjjS" go~
dong, a warehouse, factory, vulgarly godown ; ^j^^ ki'is or creese,
a weapon ; jij:t c^jl orang iitnn a species of ape ; j^l nmuk and
j^\i* meng-amnk, to run a- muck, to murder indiscriminately, to^
engage furiously in battle.
That the Malays before the introduction of Arabic writings
possessed an alphabetic character of their own, can scarcely be
doubted, although we are now ignorant what that character
was ; for whilst so many tribes similarly circumstanced, in Su-
matra, Java, Celebes, and other islands, have retained even to
this day their proper alphabets (ail exhibiting traces of a Nagn
origin), it is not probable that this race alone should have been
entirely unlettered ; and we should rather conclude that, from
the period of their conversion, being taught to regard with con-
tempt, not only their habits of idolatry, but their ancient lite-
rature also, the Malays suffered the memorials of it to sink
into oblivion. If what was thus neglected is to be searched
for amongst the existing alphabets, the Batta seems to have
the fairest pretensions (from vicinity) to be considered as that
which gave place to the less convenient character imported &om
Arabia.
Respecting the general style of the language, which will be
best understood from the examples to be given ia the pbaxis, we
may
INTRODUCTION. xixvii
may here briefly remark, that it is much more chaste and natural
than the phraseology of Asiatic languages in general, being free
(excepting only in the quaint and obscure pantuns or proverbial
sonnets) from forced conceits, and particularly such as depend
upon the ambiguous meaning of words, so prevalent and offensive
to good taste in Persian compositions. It may be said indeed,
that the Malayan style is never metaphorical, the imagery em-
ployed in poetic comparison being kept distinct from the subject,
in the manner of simile, and not: figuratively interwoven with the
texture of the sentence. At the same time Jt must he allowed to
partake of many of the disadvantages incident to rude languages ;
to be defective in precision, as well as in neatness of arrange-
ment, and to indulge in superfluous repetitions ; faults not incon-
sistent with that simplicity of construction which, with smooth-
ness and sweetness of tone, form its distinguished characteristics.
But further obser\'ations of this nature woulil be an anticipation
of what belongs to the department of Syntax and Prosody, and
in the sequel I shall confine myself to what concerns the progress
made by Europeans in fixing and communicating their know-
ledge of the tongue.
That the Malayan has not hitherto been cultivated in England
with the attention it deser^'cs, must be attributed in a great degree
to the insufficiency of the means provided for the instruction of
those who might wish to make it an object of study. The
Dutch, whose establishments in these parts preceded ours in
point of time, and, until the present extraordinary period, ac-
quired much greater importance, employed considerable pains in
perfecting their acquaintance with it, a-s well with a religious as
a political view, and published some works which shew the high
proficiency to which they attained. Of these the principal is a
k translation
xsjcviii INTRODUCTION.
translation of the whole Bible, executed with singuhir skill and
accuracy by the progressive labours of several learned men, and
tinally, under the superintendance of g. h. webndly, printed in
the Roman character at Amsterdam in l/Sl-S, 4'o- 2 vol., and
afterwards with the proper Malayan types, at Batavia in 1758,
8vo. V vol. The same wernuly was likewise the author of an
excellent Grammar, of which further mention will be made in
the sequel. With such advantages it is matter of no little sur-
prise that they should not also have furnished a work so essential
and indispensable to the study of this or any other language, as
a good Dictionary, formed from the genuine writings of the na-
tives, and expressed either in the proper character, or in such
consistent European orthography as might prove an adequate
substitute. What has hitherto been effected by tliem and by
ourselves in Malayan philology, will best appear from the follow-
ing enumeration of printed works, in the order of their publica-
tion ; nearly the whole of which are in my possession.
Subsequently to the appearance of some Tocabularies found in
the works of the early voyagers, the first regular work in form
of a Dictionary, bears the title of " Spraeck ende woord-boeck^
in de Maleysche ende Madagaskarscke Talen," by Frederick
HouTMAN van Gouda, published at Amsterdam in 1604, 4*^
oblongo ; republished in 16^3, 8^o. under the title of " Dictiona-
rium, ofie TPoord ende Spraeck-boeck, in de Duyiscke ende
Maleysche Tale;" and again at Batavia in 1707, 4'<i- The ori-
ginal edition contains, at the end of an address to the reader,
the autograph of houtsian himself, who acquired his knowledge
of the language whilst a prisoner at Achin ; and also that of
GOTARDUS ARTHUS, to whom the book belonged, and who re-
published the Dialogues it contains at Cologne, 1608, 8vo. which
likewise
INTRODUCTION.
likewise appeared in English in 1614, 4<o- under the title of
** Dialogues in the English and Malaiane languages : or certain
common formes of speech, first written in Latin, Malaian, and
Madagascar tongues, by the diligence and painfull endeavour of
Master gotardus arthusius, a Dantisker, and now faithfully
translated into the EngUsh tongue by augustine spaldino
Merchant."
The next original publication is that entitled " Vocabularium,
ofte fVoort-hoeck, naer ordre van den Alphabet hit 't Duytsch'
Maleysck ende Maleysch-Duytsch. Ah mede eenighe Gramma-
ticale observalicn -y" first composed by caspar wiltens, and
afterwards improved and published by Sebastian danckaerts.
's Gravenhaghe 1623, 4to- Batavia 1706, 4'<»- This vocabulary,
which, though not extensive, has considerable merit, was after-
wards translated into Latin, and published at Rome by the title
of " Dictionarium Malaico-Latinum et Latino-Mai aicum, cum
aliis quamplurimis. Opera et studio davidis haex," 1631, 4to-
The credit of an original composition being here improperly as-
sumed (although explained in the dedication), it becomes neces*
sary to coiTCCt a mistake into which D^. leyden has been led,
who says (p. 184), " The first attempt to form a grammar or
dictionary of it, as far as I know, was made by david haex,
who published in Maloyu and Dutch, a vocabulary with some
grammatical obsen'ations. At the request of Cardinal Barberini
the Dutch was rendered into Latin." To this latter operation
only were the study and labour of haex directed, and the trans-
lation is evidently the performance of a person unacquainted with
the Malayan language.
" Vocabularium ; ofte IVoorden-ho^ck, hit Duytsch en Ma-
Eertydts gecomponverd et uyt-gegeven door casparuai
WILTENS
xl
INTRODUCTION.
WII.TENS ende sebastianum danckaerts. Ende nu (met meer
dan drie duysent so woorden als manieren van spreken) vei'ineer-
dert uyt de schriften van jan van hasel ende albert rutl,
&c. door jusTUM HEURNiuM." Amst. 1650, 4to- Batavia I7O8,
4to. This, though modestly professing to be only an improved
edition of the preceding, has in fact a claim to be considered as
an original and much superior work. It was reprinted at Batavia
in 16/7) 4'o- with improvements by frederik guevnier, and
again, at the same place, in 1708, with still further improve-
ments, by PETRUS van der worm ; in which state it is the best
Dutch and Malayan dictionary that has appeared.
" Grondt o/te kort Bericht van de Maleische Taal, door
JOHANNES ROMAN." Amst. 1655, F»-
*' Grammatica Malaica, tradens praecepta brevia idiomatis
linguae in India Orientali celeberrimae, ab indigenis dictse Malajo,
suocincte delineata labore johannis christoph. i.orberi." Vi-
narise (Weimar) 1688, 8vo- This, we are told by werndly, is
a bad translation of the work of j. roman (which I have not
seen), with some extracts from that of f. de houtman, by one
who was quite a stranger to the language of the Malays.
" A Dictionary English and Malayo, Malayo and English.
To which is added some short Grammar Rules and Directions
for the better observation of the propriety and elegancy of this
language. By thomas bowrev." London I7OI, ^^°- This,
although the work of an illiterate person, possesses considerable
merit, and derived, as is evident, no advantage whatever from the
preceding publications, of the existence of which the author was
probably ignorant. His extensive knowledge of the language of
the people whose ports he frequented as a trader, he laudably
rendered permanent and useful to bis countrymen by committing
to
INTRODUCTION.
to paper all the words with which his memory furnished him ;-
but he appears to have been entirely ignorant of the written
language, as even the short specimen of words in the original
character.
■ Thus lie speaks of himself. " By nineteen years continuance in East-India,
wholly spent in navig;ation, and trading in most places of those countries, and
much of that time in the Malayo countries, Smnulra, Borneo, Bantam, Batavia,
and other parts of Java, hy my conversation and trading with tlie inhabitants of
which places, I did furnish myself with so much of the Malayo language as did
enable me to negociate my affairs, and converse with those people without the
assistance of a prevaricating interpreter, as they commonly are. In the year
1688 I embarked at Fort St. George fur England, which proving a long voyage,
and I being out of imptoyment, did at my leisure time set down all that came
into my memory of the Malabo language ; which together with some helps that I
have attained since, has furnished me with so much of thnt language as I think may
beof great use to triide and coiivei-sation in tlie Malayo country . . . .and I finding
so very few Englishmen that have attained any tollerable knowledge in the Maia^o
tongue, 80 absolutely necessary to trade in those seas, and that there is no book
of this kind published in English, to help the attaining that language ; these con-
siderations, I say, has imboldened me to publish the insuing Dictionary, which I
am sensible has many imperfections, I having had very little help to assist me, and
not having had (he opportunity of conversation with any Malaj/o since I begun
this work, nor in several years before."
A copy of this Dictionary full of manuscript corrections, made at an early
period, as appears by the writing and the oitliography, accidentally came into
my possession. At the end of the first or English and Mahyo part, the following
extraordinary memorandum occurs. " Soe far Corrected by HEtsnY smith. My
Dictionary which y' foregoing should have bin onely the Coppy off, is so strangely
per\'erted thro" Ignorance of the genuine Elegancy and Meaning of the Wordes
in this language, tliat it would have puzled a learned Malayer to have pickt out
the meaning of the short sentences, for thoy are very concise in there discourse
nseing noe circumlocutions or tautalogie." The hand-wriling of the memoran-
dum is the same with that of the corrections, which are for the most part judicious,
and the name is written in the style of a signature. Nothing further respecting
this UENRV SMITH has ever come to my knowledge.
1
i\a
INTRODUCTION.
character, printed at the end of his hook, he acknowledges to
Late been prepared for him at Oxford by that learned and inde-
fatigable orientalist, thomas htde. Owing to his want of suf-
ficiency in this and some other respects, he has unavoidably fallen
into numerous errors, and the sentences he has employed to ex-.
emplify the words, being of his own composition, and not quota-
tions, are for the most part incorrect or vulgar, and uncouth in
their phraseology.
" Maleische fl^oord-hoek Sameling. Collectanea MalaicA
Vocabularia. Hoc est Congeries omnium Dictionariorum Ma-
laicorum hactenus editorum. Non tantum vulgariorura Belgico-
Malaicorum, verum cfiam rarissimorum hucusqueincognitorum."
ANDREAS 1.AMBERTUS LODERus, Typogr. Batavise 170J^-8, 4to-
II partes. This usefiil collection contains the repi:blication of
nearly all the Vocabularies that had then appeared, and of which
many had become extremely scarce.
'* Maleiscke Spraakkunsi, uit de eige Schriften der Maleiers
opgemaakt ; mit eene Voorreden, behelzende eene inleiding tot
dit werk, en een Aanhangsel van twee Boekzalen van boeken in
deze tale zo van Europeers, als van Maleiers geschreven. Door
GEORGE BENRiK wERNDLv." AiHst. Vj^Q, 8*o- Of this Gram-
mar I cannot speak in terms too favourable. It is the perform-
ance of a person who, united to a perfect acquaintance with the
Malayan, a knowledge of the piinciples of general grammar,
and who ventured, in framing one for that language, to disen-
gage himself from the trammels of European regimen, and to
draw his rules from the language itself. The fault of the work,
a very pardonable one, is redundance. To the instruction it
aflbrds I confess myself materially indebted. The plan of my
own Grammar had been sketched, and the parts filled up, before
I became
INTRODUCTION.
xliii-
I became acquainted with werndly's, or could read the lan-
guage in which it is composed ; but I afterwards compared the
whole of what I had written, with his observations, strengthen-
ing my opinions by his sanction, and where we differed, availing
myselt of his judgment when it appeared sounder than my own.
In making this arowal I am not by any means afraid of being
considered as his copyist by persons who shall take the trouble
o( examining the two grammars with this view.
" Nieuwe fVoordenschat in Nederduitsch, Maleidsch en Por-
tugcesch." Batavia I78O, S*"- This work, mentioned by Thuu-
berg, I have not seen.
" Rem uti Europa, Afnca, jisia, ftirratted ifrdn dv 1770 til
1779. Af CARL PETER THUNBEEG." UpSflla 1789-93, 8vo. IV
vol. Vol. II. p. 260-90. A Vocabulary and Dialogues, Swedish
and Malayan. Tbe Mat nf words cuUccted by this ingenious na-
turalist is rather more accurate than what we find in the genera»
lity of books of travels.
" A short Vocabulary, English and Mahtfo, with Grammar
Rules for the attainment of the Malays language." Calcutta
1796. Of dw merits of this work I have not had an opportunity
of judging.
*' A Gcfunmnr of the Malay tongtie, as spoken in the Pe-
ninsula of Malmva, the islands of Sumatra, Java, liorneo, Ptih
Pinang, &c. compiled from bowrev's Dictionary, and other au-
thentic documents, manuscript and printed." London 1800, 4'«-
*' A Dictionary of the Malay tongue, as spoken, &c. In two
parts, English and Malay, and Malay and English. To which
is prefixed, a Grammar of that language. By john howison,
M. D." London, printed by S. Rousseau, 1801, 4'"- It is not
easy to speak in terms sufficiently measured of this publication,
. .****(« but
xHv
INTRODUCTION.
but the interests of literature and of oriental education require
that its real character should be explained. The long period
that had elapsed since the appearance of boweey's work, its
consequent scarcity, and the want of any better to supply its
place, rendered the reprinting it, notwithstanding its imperfec-
tions, an expedient measure, and it was accordingly undertaken
or encouraged by a late worthy, but not learned bookseller. It
was suggested to him that the original might be improved by
annexing the Malayan characters to the words as they stood in
the Roman orthography ; and this, if properly executed, would
have been highly judicious. But, unfortunately, those persons
who were employed for the purpose being ignorant of the lan-
guage, instead of giving the words in the mode of spelling used
by the natives and to be found in their writings, composed them
of such Persian characters as best suited their idea of the sounds ;
and consequently when right, it is only by chance. For the
most part, instead of words known to the language, they are
merely capricious combinations of letters, some of which (such
as the Persian i_» ^>, employed throughout for i_J) have no con-
nexion with the Malayan alphabet, whilst all those peculiarly
belonging to it, and not to be met with in Arabic founts, are
entirely omitted. Although it is difficult to convey to those who-
are not conversant with the language an adequate notion of the
grossness of this proceeding, the Arabian or Persian scholar will
be sensible of it when he perceives that such words as Jic wis-
dom, andj^ life, are here written J^ and^^j; whilst the com-
mon Malayan words i_j1 what, ol the verb substantive, and tsj/
a fort or castle, are written j^ji, *j^, and jjy. The injury done
by a work of this description, to the literary reputation of the
country amongst foreign oriental scholars need not be insisted
upon;
introduction:
x\w
irpou ; but that wliich may be sustained by the servaots of the
East-India Company and others, into whose hands it may have
been put for instruction, is a consideration of much more im-
portance. M"". HowjsoN having borne a respectable character,
and being designated in the Advertisement prefixed, as a learned
and ingenious gentleman whose " friejidbj assistance " enabled
the real Editor to lay his specimen before the public, there is
reason to believe that he was not a principal in the transaction,
although he was induced to let it go into the world with the
sanction of his name.
" A rough Sketch of part of an intended Essay towards as-
certaining, deducing, elucidating, and correctly establishing the
Rudiments of the Juh,wee or Juhtvee language, vulgarly called
the MALAY langu^e." By J. s. (shaw). Prince of Wales
Island, I8O7, 8vo. If the reader doe& not anticipate the merits
of this singular work from the foregoing title, his judgment may
be assisted by the following short extracts. " It has been ge-
nerally asserted, says this author, that the Malays hare receired
their alphabetical characters from the Arabians : I think that I
have many strong reasons to shew the contrary ; and am, there-
fore, induced to believe, that the Arabians and Persians hare
borrowed their present characters from the Malays." '* It haa
occurred to me, he adds, from the evident antiquity of the
JtthfWee language, in which are to be found the roots of old
Persian and Sanscrit deriTatires, &c. that the Malays might,
probably, be from the primeval stock of Jai/an, one of the sons
of Japkethy who was the third son of Noah." His opinion of
the work last noticed will appear not to differ materially from
my own (for we can all we the moie in our brother's eye) when
m be
xlvi
INTRODUCTION.
he speaks of a word " marked as a pronoun by Mr. bowiiey,
and by his copyer, the plagiarist, under the name of howison."
It is not, however, in the copying, but the perverting his origi-
nal, that the demerit consists, m"". shaw's claim to origiiiaHty
is certainly undisputed.
" A comparative Vocabulary of the Burma, MaMi/u and TMi
languages." (By j. c. leyden, m. d.) Serampore, 1810, 8vo.
The object of this work, as the learned author informs us, was
to facihtate the compilation of a series of Comparative Vocabu-
laries of the languages of the ludo-Chinese nations, and of the
tribes which inhabit the eastern islands ; for which purpose' it
was deemed advisable to print and circulate those of the Bir-
man and Malay languages in their proper character, together
with the Siamese or T'hdi, of which no types have hitherto been
cut, in the Roman. The plan reflects credit on those who formed
it, and the execution of that part which fell to the lot of ur.
LEYDEN, is a proof of his talents as a philologist, and of his in-
defatigable industry. It may at the same time be fairly doubted
whether vocabularies of this elaborate nature, where the original
text only is given, do not serve rather to display the acquire-
ments of the editor, than to attain, in the best manner, the end
proposed, of collecting information by means of persons whose
pursuits may lead them into those countries. They seem to pre-
sume, on the part of the traveller, a perfect acquaintance with
the written character, which is not to be expected, or even if
he should possess it, a more simple vocabxdary, in any famiUar
tongue, would equally answer his purpose ; whilst on the other
hand, if unskilled in the literature of the country he visits, as must
generally be the case, the book will present to him no other than
a dead
INTRODUCTION.
xlvi
a dead and useless letter. Practically speaking also, there is an
obvious advantage in furnishing him with such a vocabulary as
will facilitate his operations by enabling him to write down the
words he acquires on the same page with the original terms : an
attention of which I experienced the benefit, in printed vocabu-
laries, with blank spaces, circulated, many years since, in all
accessible parts of the world, for the same useful purpose. These
I accompanied also with a short list containing about fifty of the
most obvious words, to be filled up by those who, from want of
time or energy, might be deterred from the kibour of a more
extensive task. With regard to the Malayan part, the terms are
in general judiciously chosen, and were, I have reason to be-
lieve, communicated to him by Mr. raffles, with whom he
resided at Pulo Pinang, during the few months of his visit to
the eastward, for the recovery of his health; a period unremit-
tingly employed by him in cultivating the languages spoken there,
which, to a less acute scholar, would have sufficed only for ac-
quiring the colloquial phrases of the current dialect. The or-
thography in the Malayan character (with which that gentleman
had no concern) is, on the other hand, much to be censured ;
although an attempt is made to justify this departure from the
best standard of writing, in the following passage : " In the
SoTJia and Mal&yu series, the most usual native orthography
has been generally adopted. In several instances, however, in
which it appeared to be very likely to lead to mistakes, a less
common orthography has been used, which in general is more
auricular than the other, but which, with few exceptions, may
be found in some manuscripts." But who, it may be asked,
even in the most familiar epistle, much less in what is to he
committed
xlviii
INTRODUCTION.
cominitted to the press and to serve for the instruction of others,
would think of defending incorrect spelling, by reference to the'
authority of some illiterate or careless scribes ? The professed
reason is to render the pronunciation more plain, by the inser-
tion of letters not used in the genuine orthography. To what
description of persons is this to prove convenient ? To the Eu-
ropean proficient and to the learned native it must appear trifling
at the least. Those who are altogether unacquainted with the
character are of course out of the question ; and there remain
only such as are beginning to study the written language, to
whom it can be in any way applicable, and who are thus to be
taught a mode of spelling, which it will afterwards require still
greater pains to unlearn. It is clearly admitted that the Ma-
layan orthography is by no means so fixed as not to warrant
some latitude in this respect, but the least experienced juro-tulia
would not venture to write tU for tuU the eye, Uli for .1; name,
Ub for i_j\j father, L-ji- for ^^iiU mankind, s)^ ^1 (a vulgar
equivoque) for jb jA a virgin, sjjt for ^j^^jt froth, i^y^^ for ^^
dew, j_jLL. for ^U a palace. On the first and most important
word in the vocabulary, likewise, I think it incumbent on me
to reraaik, that the name of God is improperly rendered by the
word ^y tithan. It is well known that these people, who for-
merly worshipped the lijlyj dcwata deities or demi-gods, were
indebted to the Arabs for their belief in One supreme Being,
and that M allah or (more usaally with the Malays) JU? S\
allah taala God the most High, and yi kiia (from the Hebrew)
are the genuine Mahometan terms for God or Jehovah. The
word ^y tuhan, it is true, is often figuratively (by metonymy)
employed foi" €rod, but is precis^ equivafent in its use to our
expression
INTRODUCTION.
zli«
expression of *^ The Lord, Dominus/* as ia the phrase of
JU^jJi- ^^y tiihan sakalhan alam *' The Lord of all worlds," or
in the compound ^yV« fnahd-tiihan *' The mighty Lord," and
should not have been substituted, in a vocabulary, for the essen-
tial name of the Deity.
Of my own qualifications for this attempt to furnish a Malayan
Grammar and Dictionary, less imperfect than what have been,
in most instances, produced by those who have gone before me
in the same career, I shall speak as briefly as possible. During
the period of my residence in Sumatra, at a very early time of
life, I devoted somewhat more than the common attention ne-
cessary for all strangers, to the attainment of the language of
the country, under the guidance of an elder brother (long since
lost to me and to the world*), who had himself made an ex-
traordinary proficiency, although not in the habit of committing
his acquirements to writing. With this advantage I acquired a
competent facility in communicating with the natives, and was
master of their epistolary correspondence; but it was not until
my return to England in the latter end of 1779> that I applied
myself to the study of their literature, or laid any regular grounds
for the composition of the present works. These, amidst a va-
riety of pursuits and serious occupations, by which their pro-
gress has been too long retarded, have gradually profited by
my advancement of knowledge in the superior parts of the
language, and from simple beginnings, have increased in bulk
and improved in matter and form, to the state (very far indeed
n from
• Mr. JOHN MARgDEN died \a London on the 13th April i7SG, having then
iu>nrly conijileted bis fortieth ;ear.
1 INTRODUCTION.
irom a perfect one) in which they are now offered to the notice
of the public^ and more especially of those persons whose duty
calls them to the Eastern limits of the British empire^ who are
best qualified to appreciate the utility of my labours, and to
supply their deficiencies. To such, individually, I shall say, in
the. apposite address of Horace,
I Si quid novisti rectijks istis,
Candldus imperii ; si non, his utere mecum.
CONTENTS.
CONTENTS,
«
The Malajfon Alphabet ...:....^-.... 3
C^f Consonants and Fowels *.....*..--• 14
Orthographical Marks ---•--.------• 20
Division of Words 26
Parts of Speech --.-----•----..-. 37
Nouns ---^-••. --•-----.-. 29
Adjectives -•-.---*--------.- 37
Comparison of Adjectives ..---••-.--.- 38
i\^omra& ------•*---.-----. 39
Pronouns ------------------ 42
■ of the First Person -.--.-.--.-- 43
— ^— — 0/* f Ae Second Person ---.--....- 46
— — 0/ the Third Person 48
Demonstrative or Definitive -.--.-.----. 50
Ferhs 62
Verbs Substantive 68
Distinctions and Relations of the Verb - •- 60
Inflexions of the Transitive Verb ---.-•--.- 70
■■ I I Intransitive Verb --- 78
Adverbs
CONTENTS.
Page
Adverbs or Modals 8jr
— — . of Time -----•----.-•.-- 88
■ of Place -.- - ti,
i Miscellaneous -- fj.
Prepositions or Directives .-.-.--•-*•• «-jl
Cdrffuneti^s -----------*r-*.-- g)
Interjections or Exclamations --..-•«•.-«•gy
Particles - --••. H
■ ■ prefixed ..-.-----.-----•91
»' ■ ' annexed --------------- ^
Of Syntax - -101
Of Dialects .-•^.---.•••Hj
Of Prosody • XlB
■ I Quantity .---•-.-----•- ||«
— — — — — Versificfxtion --•-.•-*•-*•. 106
■ Rhyme --•------•---•- ld4
Praxis .-.-. 1^
\
A GRAMMAR
GRAMMAR
OF TUB
MALAYAN LANGUAGE.
"13REVI0USLY to treating of words, which are the proper subject of
Grammar, it is necessary to describe the characters or letters, in
respect to their form and sound, by which the words are expressed in
writing. The Malays have for this purpose adopted the alphabet of th^
Arabians, whose literature has in all countries accompanied the intro-
duction of the Mahometan religion ; but many of its peculiar sounds,
and especially the gutturals, being little suited to the soft pronunciation
of the East-insular languages, they are never to be found in the ortho-
graphy of indigenous Malayan words, and even to those Arabic terras
■
which the Malays have borrowed from their instructors they give a
moothness of utterance that nearly prevents their being recognised by an
Arabian ear. On the other hand there existed in these languages several
nasal and other sounds, for which the alphabet, in its original state, had
ho corresponding lettei's, and to remedy this defect they were under the
necessity of making additions to it ; not indeed by the invention of new
B forms,
2 A GRAMMAR OF THE
forms, but by a slight and obvious modification of those characters whose-
sounds approached the nearest to their own, and belonged to the same
organs of speech ; a liberty in which they were justified by the example
of the Persians, who had not, however, occasion to carry their alterations^
to the same extent
The course of the Malayan writing, conformably to the known prac^
tice of the Hebrews, Syrians, and Arabians, is from the right hand to-
wards the left, in opposition to that of most of the people of India, and^
particularly of the unconverted natives of the interior of Sumatra and^
Java, whose alphabets, grounded on the principles of the Sanskrit or
Deva-nagri^ proceed, like the European, from left to right.
The letters of the Arabian alphabet, twenty-eight in number, are the
following,
and to these the Malays have added six, viz. ^^ CS' cJ c^ J ^^ which tho
learner will perceive to bs judiciously formed from the cognate letters
^ C/uJ ^i ^» by the simple expedient of increasing the number of
diacritical points. The several names and powers of all these letters^
according to the Malayan manner of pronouncing them, will be exhibited '
in the following scheme, in the arrangement of which it has been judged
more practically useful to place each of the modified characters imme-
diately after its respective original, than to reserve them, as the Malay
scribes are accustomed to do, for the conclusion of the series ; and this
order of the letters, (warranted as it is by the example of the Persians, "■
who place their <y next to c->, their - next to , and so of the rest) is
almost indispensable to the construction and^ use of a Dictionary, where
the middle as well as the initial letters must follow alphabetically ; for
it
\
MALAYAN LANGUAGE.
8
it is obvious that much embarrassment would be experienced by those
who consult it, if letters so nearly connected in their use as ^ ^nd -.,
uJ and 4^, (j/and cij and wlitch the Malays, by a negligent marking
of the points, are perpetually confounding, were, instead of adjoining,
to belong to opposite extremities of the alphabet»
THE MALAYAN ALPHABET.
Figure.
Power.
Name,'-
Forms according to
place and junction.
•
1
1
\ a, a
alif
1, l^ Ifc u- \j\
^ b
•
•
ha
• • ^ • • • .
cy
t
I"
la
^ - * r " !- -
^
s
^
c
sa
vijj tiJ JJ U fci^v
C
• ■
^^^^^^m
^^•«
jlm
zit'iyf ^v"
^
ch
i
c
•
cha
^•^4^^. ^
^ hy hh
1
^
u.
ha
t;l^^€^
•
c
\kh
kha
ee>"V^
t>
d
Jb
dal
4>^ JJb J^ jj Jjj
J z, dz
• J'^i
zal
Jl j^ JJb «JL*J
J^
1J
da
J ^"
*»
b
ra
j^ (>j ja> J- y J J.J
1
'is^^
zi, za
^nJ-?-JLJ
1 ^ *^ ^
sirij Sim
fjiiti «-J ^^ ^^ i^r— »
*
sh
rtc;^
iAin, iAtffi
A GRAMMAR OF THE
Fignre.
Power.
Name.
Forms according to
place and junction.
u*
J, «
cdU jU 5a(f, sat
^^ ^JB^ ^jOi jtC ^jAA^
J>
</r
cjU jti rf/5rf, <f/a^ lat
^^ ^jQS> jOSb yO ^W
1,
/ ,
i ta
L^ k». L JL LU.
\c
//
\^ tla, la
i^tksy ji^ji^nd^
t
\ \ \ \ \
a, «, 2, 0, »
e^ t^ t^ ^ t^^
•
gK ghr
t^ gkatn,ghnm
*
H
•
* 4 * A lA A AA
•
/
li /i
imjy\ (^ u.iu j9 y uJUi»
*
P
« ^5
* Al « >* A AAA
J
k,kk
cJlS kaf
J^ jS jJ SX^ JM
cS
k
^l^ *«/
C^^^\£^^C^
a
^hard
t^' 55
^^^.^cJTil^
J
/
f!i lam
jUJ^^^plJU
r
m
(••* (** r*^ i/» ^ (***
ti>
n
WJ ^^ c;» ^V cr'
J
M, 0, w
J'
*,yy,y jlj
A A «
A soft
U Aa
0,i Z tMnft^l A» «lb <tfA
•/
h '•, y
C ia, 3^5
'/J v^ i/ ^ Ji 'i i^.
>
nia
I nta
o' V Ji ^, dWi
To
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 5
* To the foregoing, the Malays, in imitation of the Arabians, are ac-
customed superfluously to add the compound character si lam^alif-
hamzah.
Beside the varieties of form and combination above exhibited, there
are many others in practice, which those who are acquainted with the
regular alphabet will easily learn by the inspection of Malayan writings.
Some of them are produced merely from the haste, and others from the
capricious licence of fhe pen ; such as the use of an unindented slanting
stroke for the ^, of a curved stroke or small semi-circle over and under
the letters instead of two points, or the slight inversion of the extremity
of the J, in plac'e of the final ^ or ir, which latter is likewise, in several
shapes, made to connect witk the j «3, the j j, and the^, but irregularly,
the general rule being, that all the letters of the alphabet are in them-
selves susceptible of connexion with those which precede them in the
same word, but that seven of them, viz. j j j j i J t» are incapable of
forming a junction with any following letter. It remains now to ex-
plain and exemplify more fully the powers of the several letters of the
alphabet.
t a when it occurs at the end of a syllable, or in the body of a word,
is always long, and has then, as in uJb bapa father, cLilc mali dead, lJ\^
kata to speak, the open sound of a in the Italian and roost other lan-
guages of the continent of Europe, but not generally quite so broad,
and corresponding perhaps more nearly with its sound in our words
*^ brand, pant, harm, malice.'* Before ng however, it assumes one
somewhat broader, and in ^b bangun arise, ^ tangan the hand, ^U
mangu dismay, is equivalent to that in our ^^ want, warm, ball." At
the commencement of words it is short, unless when marked with the
' G orthographical
A GRAMMAR OF THE
orthographical character I meddah^ denoting extension, ' by which the
length of the voweUsound is doubled. In its short state (or that of
hamzahi as it is termed) it assumes generally, but with miich qualifica-
tion, the sound of a (which occasionally becomes/) in our words "at,
<^ act, and, after.;" in which case it is marked, or understood to be
marked with the vowel fal^hah (") ; and in like manner, when marked
with kesrah (^), or dammah ('), it assumes the sound of t in " imp,
" inch, ill," or of « and o in " up, utter, only, obey,'* but not in " off,
" on, order," which an Arabian would represent by fat-hah. But all
these apparent intricacies of pronunciation owe their difficulty to the
rules by which grammarians attempt to define them, and vanish with
practice in the language* The whole system, indeed, of orthographic
notation, the refinement of which is the subject of boast with the Ara-
bians, seems to be defective in simplicity, consistency, and even ingenious
contrivance. It may be proper to observe here, that although in describe
ing short vowels with our characters, as distinguished from long ones, the
prosodial mark is added to the a e t o and », it has not been thought
necessary throughout the Grammar and Dictionary to apply a disqr^*
minating mark to any other than the long vowels, its absence being
sufficient to denote such as are intended to be short.
c-^ by in the words ^ Inbir lip, c-;U babi hog, ^^il laba gain, has the
ordinary sound of that letter in the words '* bib, rub, babble/'
c:^ ^, in ^y iolong assist, <^j titah command, u:^' takul afraid, it
sounded as in " tent, tart, tatter/' i
CjJ. The proper sound of this letter in the Arabic alphabet is nearly
that of the English th in the words " this, then," or the Greek thela^
but by the Malays as ivell as the Persians it is pronounced as i, in the
Arabic
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 7
Arabic words ^^ seneian Monday, ci^^ salasa Tuesday, and a few
others which they have adopted : nor will this change be thought extra-
ordinary by those who have noticed the pronunciation by foreigners of
ou?word " Bath."
— J , in the words jU. jadi become, ^\j raja king, ls?^ j^^fi promise,
and wherever it occurs^ is to be sounded precisely and uniformly as in
" j^ry» judgCj joy, major ;" the English being perhaps the only Euro-
pean language that can represent it by a single equivalent character. It
must be remarked, however, that we employ the g before certain vowels,
and also dg^ to express the same sound, as in the words ^^ gentry, giantj
^^ badge." Care must be taken to avoid a common error of confound-
ing the English j with that of the Germans and Dutch, which answers
to our y, whilst for the . the former have recourse to a most uncouth
combination of the letters dsch^^zixd thus in a modem publication upon
Arabian coins, we may observe the laborious orthography oiHadsckadich
for J^ Hajaj^ a proper name.
ch^ as in *^ chance, church, torch/* being the tsch of the Germans,
and the ^ before t and e of the Italians, does not belong to the Arabic
alphabet, but is a modification of their ^, by the Persians as well as the
Malays. The sound is one perfectly familiar to the organs of these
people, as in ^^ churl to steal, Jji kacha glass, CJjrf^ chichak a lizard^
v£^,>.U. chachat to puncture.
' h hard or AA, expresses an aspirate proceeding immediately from
the lungs, and consequently stronger than can be denoted by any roman
letter. It occurs only in such words as the Malays have borrowed from
the Arabic, as ^<>>U> hliji a pilgrim to Mecca, JU^ hal state, m\j^ haram
forbidden, j». hak right ; but they do not afiect to give it the forcible
utterance
8 A GRAMMAR OF THE
utterance of the Arabians or Persians,* and it is consequently here ex-
pressed simply by the letter A, as in our words " hope, heart, heavy."
^khisB, hard guttural, like the ch of the Germans, and of which
likewise no direct example can be given in the pronunciation of English
words, although common in our Celtic dialects. The chaiacter is found
only in words borrowed from the Arabic, as^ khabar news, \^ ..jh»
khaiUf preacher, ^^r-^ khams Thursday.
J d has the common sound of that letter in our words ^^ did, dead,
^^ added,'' and in all other European languages ; as ob dada breast, 4/^^ J
duri thorn, jj^ muda young.
o Z hard, or dz^ as in ^^ adze," is found only in Arabic words, as c^U
zat essence, j^j zakar memory.
id IS always found in the alphabets written by the Malays for element-
ary instruction, but rately, if ever^ occurs in their books ; and appearing
auperfluous to the Dutch grammarians who have published Malayan
alphabets, it has been by them omitted.
J r has the same sound as in ^^ run, bar, parent," in all Malayan
words, as i^^j rupa appearance, ^^Ji Ian to run, aj^j darah blood.
J Z soft, as in ^^ zeal, blaze, crazy," is found only in Arabic and Persian
words, as ^U^ zeman time, j^j zabur psalms, j^^ ztmrud an emerald.
Instead of modifying the j, as the Malays (though uselessly) have done^
the Persians have added points to the j, and formed their J, which has
the soft soimd of the French j.
^ i, in the words ^IL Ja/a A wrong, j;^U masak ripe, ^\ atas above, is
sounded as in ^^ son, sister, past," not as in '^ was, has, lose," where the s
partakes of z* The Arabic names of this and the following letter ^^ sin
and ^ shtn^ are by the Malays of the southern part of Sumatra pro-
nounced sim and shm. J^ sh
MALAYAN LANGUAGE.
^ ik, la in " shine, bush, fashion," is the ch of the French, sch of
'the Gennans, and x of the Portuguese, and is so pronounced in Al. shah
king, fj-^ shems Bun, and some others borrowed from the Arabic, Per-
■ian, and Sanskrit ; but more frequently it is softened to a simple j, as
in ^Ji^ s'itan satan, jjt^ sahadal testimony, yjjj, sahsi a witness, ,jSA
siksa punishment.
^ s air ss, <x:cun only in Arabic words, as j^ sahar patient, ^ sak
proved, i.j^ tarfu grammar, and has then a, sound somewhat harder than
«ur II in " pass, tassel, kissing."
yi dl also occurs only In words borrowed from the Arabic, and the
grammars of that language are not «nifonn with reppeet to its true
pronunciation, some expressing ttby-(f, others by (ft, whilst- the Persians
give it the sound of a pure z. By ijiff Malays, in most places, it i|
pronounced as dt in the words Uj ridla will, inclination, t_a^ dlalf
weak, j*U. kadlir (by the Persians kazir) present, ready. In some part»,
however, the Malays ^ve It a sound apj^oaching nearer to the d than to
the dl in our wordn *> fsddle, meddle."
^ U /, both in the Malayan and the Arabic pronunciation, differs little,
if at all, from that c^ the uj, or our common (, as in the words ^Ji^ luJaA
a storm, t_--L tab'ib a pliysician, jSl? talak divorce. It is not used in
any words properly Malayan, although not confined to such as are purely
Arabic ; for it may be observed, that when the Arabians adopt Greek
or other foreign terms, they represent the sound of / by this letter m
preference to the cy, as in ^^ karlas paper, j^Ai ovj^J» tambur x
drum, y-jJjljli titalnttus Tripoli, ^^ lulk talc.
b it occurs only in Arabic words, as jtiU? manifest, which the Malays
pronounce tiakir, as in our words *' battle, settle," the Arabians ddkir
D _ (according
A GRAMMAR OF THE
(according to the grammarians) and the Persians ^ahir. In some parts
the Malayan sound approaches nearly to the /.
c ain. This vague letter, which has been the subject of much dis-
cussion amongst Hebrew scholars, is pronounced by the Arabians with
a peculiar hollow utterance from the interiour of the throat or fauces ;
but in this they are not Imitated by the Malays, who pronounce the
words Jift dkal cunning, ijlc adat custom, s,Uc ibarat explanation, ^ji*
\shk love, Uj doa prayer, m iimur life, without any effort, and as if
they were written with hamzah and the ordinary vowels. Indeed, it
may be said that the guttural part only of the sound is represented by
the c, the vocal part being determined by the marks respectively applied
to it; as 'will be more clearly understood when the nature of these sup-
plementary vowels has been explained. It is here only necessary
further to observe, that not having any appropriate European character
lor designating this mutable letter, it has been judged convenient to mart
the several vowels which stand for it with a grave accent.
c gh, ghr, is a rough guttural prouDunced as in the Irish word
•' lough" a late, or with the Northumbriau articulation, and is peculiar
to Arabic and Persian wurds, as u--^U ghmb hidden, i_JU gkalib vie
torious, L.-^ i. gherib foreign.
t ng, sounded when medial or final as in " kingly, longing, bringing,"
is a stronger nasal than the final » of the French language, and prevails
much in original Malayan words, as cjiTl agiing principal, ^ bmgong
half-witted, jjy tolong to assist, ^\ ang'm wind, =1« ngdnga to gape,
jjjc Jigaran displeasure. At the beginning of a word the pronunciation
can only be acquired by use, although in fact the same as tlK medial.
Where ii occuri in a situation that might give rise to doubt as to the
division
MALAYAN LANGUAGE.
division of the syllable, the two letters ng are marked with a connecting
circumSex, which is omitted (to avoid distinguishing §lgns not absolutely
necessary) where no such uncertainty can happen. It will not escape
the notice of the pliilologist, that this is one of the sounds attributed to
the y ain of the Hebrews, of which the % or i, through the medium of
the Arabic, is a modification.
,_» /, as in " fife, fifty, skiff," belongs only to words adopted from the
Arabic, aSjjLi/iX'jV- to think, j^/j'/iaA side, tjjii fitnali slander; but
the Malays, who are not accustomed to pronounce they (any more than
the Arabians the p^ commonly change it to p, and pronounce these
words plkir, plhak, pitnah. The grounds of the convertibility of these
two letters, not articulated by the same organs, is by no means obvious ;
but it may be remarked, that the inhabitants of a small island {Pulo
2'ftas) near the coast of Sumatra, pronounce all Malayan words in which
the sound of p occurs as/, saying fa/an ioz papan a board, fukul for
pukul to strike, fiiluh for piiluk ten.
i_> u is pronounced as in " pen, papaJ, step," in the Malayan words
"^y p^P^f to blow, ^JJ pipi the cheek, t.jG«j tangkap to catch. In
epistolary and other common writing, it is by no means unusual to mark
this letter with only one instead of three points, thereby confounding it
with the preceding.
J k, as an Arabic letter, has a harder sound than that of cc or ck in the
words " accost, kick, dock, mocker," and may be better exemplified by the
kk in Habakkuk. When found at the beginning or in the middle, it shews
the word to be (with few exceptions) of Arabic origH', as JjJ kabul
acceptable, jM kadar value, jjj fakir a religious mendicant; but the
Mahtys employ it likewise for expressing a hard sound at the end of
their
A GRAMMAR OF THE
their own words, as ^^U masak ripe, jj\, bdlik to turn, ^^ kalak pre*
sently; which however is generally omitted in discourse, eeems to form
no integral part of the word, and may be considered as an excrescence.
CJ k is pronounced as in " king, make, token," in the words ^ kyi
base, JlaS kapala head, Jli kdla tune, ^J!^ pakei to wear, cJyc muka face.
LLJ'g hard, as in " gag, get, gig, agog, gut," a letter unknown to the
Arabic, but common in the Persian as well as the Malayan language,
and a modification of the preceding cf, is uniformly so pronounced, as
in J;iS pagar paling, jj^ gila fool, «jj^ gunong mountain, J"! agama
religion. The soft g in our words " gentle, region, age," is represented
by the letter-.
J / has the sound we give to the letter in " lily, lolling, camel," in
the words ^j ISluh mud, JJ Ulin wax, JJ Idbi to pass, jsw bantal
pillow.
* 7» is pronounced as in " mama, man, am, maim," in the wordf
^U malu ashamed, i^y, miilut mouth, ^i_* minum to drink.
y n, as in " nun, nonage, nation," in the words ui.cj nanii to wait,
*Jj> bUnok to kill, yU mdna where, Jy tiilan companion.
J u, 0, tv, has in the Malayan words ^^ siisH milk, uJj^ ^7/jV skin,
j^jf gosok to rub, ijjj tdlong to help, the sound of. the Italian u and d
in " duo, punto," of the German in " gut, bruder, todt," of the Dutch
oe in '< hoek, toen, stoel," and of the English (W in " loom, tool," or
of in " dont, moping, notice." When instead of the ^ tlie ebort
vowel dammah is applied to the consonant, as in ^Si budt onderrtanding,
i_«^ idup alive, it is intended to express a vowel sound no moie than
half the length of the former. As a consonant the^ is represented by
tv, and sounded as in " want, wool, dower," in the words ^^^ wama
colour,
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 13
colour, ^jjTj wanji fragi-ant, ^j\^ kdwan companion, jjU niawur the rose.
This letter does not often occyr at the beginning of Malayan words as a
vowel sound, thei^, in that situation, being expressed by j\ or yb^ as in
(^Mjl ubat physic, ^ybunus unsheathed.
9 h being a softer aspirate than in our words ^^ humble, host, heavy,'*
as in (^U tiarap to trust, ^U hdnia except, JjbU mahal dear, , j^^ bulik
can, and for the most part as imperceptible as in " honour, hour,
. ** honest," such words as ^^U abis expanded, jjyb ulU the interiour
country, y^ tlang lost, are accoidingly written without the h. As
an evidence of the propriety of this, so far as the ear is concerned, it
may be observed that all travellers have agreed in spelling the word
utan (in the familiar name of drang'iltan) without an aspirate, although
written jtyt hutan. When the final i is marked with two points, it is
by the Arabs pronounced as f, and with them generally denotes a gram-
matical distinction ; but the Malays frequently fall into the impropriety
of substituting this at the end of their radical words, for the proper Ci^ t.
^ J, y, has in the words yu; btUmg tell, ^ tiang a mast, ^Ju^ mimpi
to dream, the sound of the Italian i, in ^^ si, dolci," the German in ^< mir,
*^ wir," and the English ee in ^^ bee, seem, agree." "^ For the short t, as
in ^ binchi to hate, v^m^ minta to ask for, the vowel kesrah is either
supplied or understood. As a consonant the 4^ is best represented by
y, sounded as in ^^ young, yes, bowyer," in the words j^»!^ itoyfZ wood,
^\i bayang a shade, c>^ yakiit a precious stone. Few MUayan
words, however, begin with this letter, the long vowel sound, in that
situation, being expressed by 4^^ or ^ as in JA tpar son-in-law, ^ju^
idang the nose. At the end of wcords, when preceded hyfat^uih^ it
takes the diphthobgd iottid in oar woids ^ eye, boy, my, high,** which
E it
14 A GRAMMAR OF THE
it has been judged most analogous and consistent to express by eif as in
^\) balei a town-hall, ^\i bdgei sort. Where the ^^ is preceded by \,
and the sound is consequently more protracted, it is expressed by ai, as
in ^51 lain other, ^U main to play*
^ nia^ a soft nasal, as in our words ^^ maniac, lenient, union,"" which
the Malayan has in common with the Sanskrit alphabet, but is unknown
to the Arabic, occurs in the words Jb niala blaze, jjj niadar soundly,
sleeping, v^U anj/ut adrift^ jA) bdnyir a squall, ^U hdnia except, and
most frequently in the common forms of the possessive, as ^l:^ matd^niu
his eye, ^IS^ rupd^nia its appearance. It is to be observed, that although
in the names of this and other consonants, the vowel a is annexed to give
them utterance, they are all equally susceptible of other vocal sounds^
and where the ^ nia takes i or ^, it is more convenient to employ y in
the nasal part, and to write banyir rather than baniir.
j^ la, or the letters J and 1, with the orthographical mark s hamzah^ '
have already been sufficiently noticed, no reason appearing for assigning
to them conjointly a place in the alphabet.
From the foregoing examination of the letters it appears, that of the
thirty-four which compose the alphabet, thirteen are peculiarly and al-
most exclusively Arabic, six may be considered as peculiarly Malayan^
and fifteen are common to both languages ; and, consequently, that the
proper Malayan words are all expressed by twenty, or, if we reject the *5
(which never occurs), by nineteen characters.
Of Consonants andVoiFELs.
The common division of this and other alphabets into lingual, dental,
labialy and guttural letters, seems to be more ingenious than useful, ancl
that
MALAYAN LANGUAGE.
15
that into radicals and serviles, though essential to Arabic and Hebrew
etymology, has no relation to the structure or derivation of words in this
language. It will, however, be necessary to explain with some minute»
nese what relates to the distinction of consonants and voivels, and the
nature of those orthographical marlcs which affect their pronunciation.
The Arabians name the letters of the alphabet u-jy=- huruf, and
consider them all as consonantB, defining them to be susceptible of motion
or utterance (mobiles) by means of the vowels, but not of themselves
possessing that power, nor capable of forming syllables. These letters
or consonants (for there is no separate term] they distinguish into strong
and weak, comprehending in the former class all excepting I a, j u, and
^t I, which three form the latter class or weak letters, and are no other
than those which we consider exclusively as vowels ; the two latter
assuming occasionally, with them as with us, the functions of consonants.
From this arrangement proceeds (as will hereafter appear) much of the
perplexity of Arabian orthography.
By vowels they undenttand certain supplementary characters placed
above and beneath the letters, serving to note the particular vocal sound
with which they are to be uttered. These are often by us termed vowcl-
poinls, but injudiciously, as it is of importance to distinguish them from
those actual points which permanently accompany and constitute an
integral part of many of the characters, being equally necessary to their
complete formation with the point over our letter i, or the stroke across
our /. It must at the same time be observed, that neither the supple-
mentary vQweU, nor the diacritical points, nor certain other orthogra-
phical marks (to be described in the sequel) were known to the ancient
Arabic or Cufic style of writing, but have been subsequently introduced
i6 A GRAMMAR OF THE
to supply the manifest defects of the original rude system : yet it may be
fairly doubted, whether the invention is not a very imperfect expedient,
inferior to the Sanskrit and Ethiopic systems, where the effect of the
vowel is expressed by a modification of the consonant, and certainly to
the Greek and Roman, where the vowels assume their independant place
in the series of lettefg.
These vowels, by the Arabians named tul^ harakai in the plural,
from \^^ harakat signifying motion, as giving motion or utterance to
the consonants, are by the Malays named ^^U haris^ which implies lines
or strokes parallel to each other, ot military array, and also cAsi^ sinjdta
or weapons, from their resemblance, as may be presumed, to lances borne
ilD rank and file. They are by no means in common use with them,
but chiefly employed in quotations from the koj^dfi and the writings of
its commentators, and also in expressing names of places, persons, or
things not familiar, as well as to mark the distinction between ordinary
words composed of the same letters but differently pronounced, which
might otherwise be confounded with each other. They are three in
number, and have the Arabic names of ^^ fat^hah^ itjj^ kesrahy and
ijU dammahf which the Malays pronounce dlammah.
u^fat^hah (') named also ^Kj ^Ji bdris de-^tas or the stroke above,
has the sound of a generally and sometimes of e short, in our words ^^bad,
" banish, bet, bevy," and being placed over any of the strong letters, or con-
sonants as we should term them, enables them to take that vocal sound,
which in themselves they are not understood to possess, as in the words
Jfi babal iffionatj i^JUS tampat^hctj ^ best iron, ^juj dendam desire.
The effect of its application to any of three weak letters (our vowels) will
be noticed when we come to speak of them more particularly*
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. fy
^ kesrah (^) named ako i[)Uj ^^Ij bdris de^bawah or the stroke
beneath, has a sound not differing much from that of our short i in ^< bit,
<^ bidden, trip,*' (especially as pronounced in North Britain) but more
nearly resemblii^ the short i of the Italians, as in the Malayan woixls Js:j
bintil a blister, ^ j dinding a wall, ^ISs tinggi high.
44^ damniah or dlammah (^ ) named also ^tjjb j /^l 6^m de-adajhan
the stroke before or in front, has nearly the sound of u as pronounced
in ^' pudding, cushion, puss," (the 2£ in ^^ bud, turn, upper," being a
different articulation],' of oo in <^ wood, stood, foot," (which is shorter
than in ^^ brood, cool, fool,") and of o in <^ bolster, police, foment,"
differing from that in <^ blot, hot, forgot,'* which would be more aptly
represented by alif and fat*hah. The figure of dammah is that of a
nnall J, and its position above the consonant, but somewhat to the left,
or forward, as its Malayan name imports. Examples of its applicaticm
appear in u-^jj tuntut to demand, ^ bunting pregnant, lzJLc tompat
to choke up, jjj bontar or buntar (the distinction of sound between o
and u beii^ often imperceptible) round, jcj bonda or bunda mother ;
and in the word ^^^j^ chechintong a lock of hair, the three rowels have
their respective consonants.
Being applied to the several letters of the alphabet, they form syllables
that are considered as either pure or mixed. A pure syllable consists
of a consonant accompanied or followed (but never preceded in the same
tyllaUe) by a vowel, or by what is termed a quiescent letter, or by both,
as ^ cha^ c:.) /i, ^ ntt^ U ma^ ^ bau. A mixed syllable consists of two
consonants, of which the latter is mute, with an intermediate vowel, or
c ^ c ^
with a vowel and a quiescent letter a] so intermediate, as ^ ban, ^peng,
U U ^ it ^ u ^
^ bin^ isjj watj JU ban^ ^^^j» baun» Some mixed Ayllables are found to
F close
i8 A GRAMMAR OF THE
close with a liquid and a mute, si[s 1?^ sart or short a condition, but tiiis
occurs only in Arabic words.
From the foregoing it will appear that the manner of applying the
vowels to what are termed the strong letters (our consonants) is suflBciently
simple, but it is otherwise with regard to the three weak letters \ a^ jU^
and t^ ?, owmg to their ambiguous properties, being sometimes moveable
and sometimes quiescent. By moveable is understood that, like othef
consonants, they are capable of being put in motion by the application
of vowels, and thereby forming syllables, ^jwa, t^y^^ By quiescent
is meant the state in which they cease to be consonants in fact, are in*
capable of the application of the supplementary vowels (though they
may be affected by those belon^ng to the preceding consonant), and
perform the function of long vowels, in our acceptation of the terms, at
U nid, g.; bt^ Jbr tan,jj-rau. In this quiescent state it must be obvious^
in spite of definitions, that they diffisr.inJiothing essential but length of
pronunciation, from the three vowels denominated (for the sake of dis*
tinction only) supplementary ; fat-hah being the representative of \ ^,
kesrah of 4^ i^ and dammah of ^ u, which, with some change of shapef
and size, are placed above and below the other characters, instead of
assorting with them, as in the orthc^raphical system of most other
classes of language*.
■
When the supplementary or short vowels applied to the weak letters
in their moveable state, or to the strong letters immediately preceding
them in their quiescent state, are respectively, fat-hah to T, kesrah to ^<y
and dammah to ^ they are said to be homogeneous ; and, on the con-
trary, when they are dissimilarly or interchangeably employed, they are
said to be heterogeneous. Fat^hah being^ applied to \ moveable (m
that
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. i^
that case denominated' hamzah)^ produces no sensible change in the
sound of that letter, which, however it may be classed by grammarians^
can never perform the office of a consonant in our acceptation of the
• • • •*"'^ «•-'jt
term, and it contmues to be pronounced like a, as m jj\ abad an age, J».)
ajal fate. When, on the other hand, kesrah or dammah is applied to
V9 the proper sound of the letter is extinguished, and it takes that of the
* . ** . "*
supplementary vowel so applied, as i^j^\ istri wife, ^V ibn son, ^
utama excellent, Ji\ upama like. When any of the three are applied
^ J ^^ s^9 which must in that case be moveable (or consonants), regular
syllables are formed in the manner of other letters, as in us^j waktu
dme, JUj xcisal meeting, attainment, ^Xi yogia it behoveth. In some
instances of the application of fat'hah, particularly to the ^^ final, the
proper sound of the letter gives place to that of the superscribed vowel,.
as in ^lu taald most high.
When one of the three weak letters in its quiescent state is preceded,
in the same syllable, by a homogeneous supplementary vowel (belonging
to the adjoining consonant) they coalesce, and the effect produced is that
of lengthening the sound common to both, as y iu, \^ si, U ma : but
when the quiescent letter is preceded by a heterogeneous vowel, the
mixture of their sounds produces a diphthong, as ^ hau, ^ pei. In
Malayan words however the long vowel sounds occurring much more
frequently than they do in Arabic, the diphthongs are more usually
formed by the association of two of tlie quiescent letters, than by one of
them with a supplementary vowel, as in jb bau smell, ^U naik ascend,
^U main to play, ^|^ serai a palace. It must at the same time be
observed that at the beginning of words, the long vowels ^\ and ^\ in*>
stead of formii^ diphthongs, produce the simple long sounds of. 0^. i?,
and
20 A GRAMMAR OF THE
and tj as in the words ^^1 orang man, <u^\ ilsah mindful^ \J^ r j hap to
suck; and also that ^^ preceded by fat-hah, instead of the diphthong ei,
sometimes takes the sound of the long e of the Italian and other Ian-
guages of the continent, as in Hj^ nicrah red, ^^ ber suffer, -j <?r the
castle at chess, c^ balcraiig sulphur*
Where the vowel character appears doubled over or under the last
letter of a word, the Arabian grammarians mean to denote that it is to be
pronounced as if the syllable were terminated by the letter ^ nuriy from
whence this form has obtained the name of ^ 4:j or nunnation, as o tan^
^ sin, ^ jon ; but no instances of this occur in any pure Malayan
word.
Of Orthographical Marks.
The orthographical marks which now remain to be explained are those
OCX CO^ If—» > ^ "^ O'dx
called Aj^jesm^ 4>j«x^ teshaid^ ^ harhzah, L»j wesla, ifXc meddafh ^^^
uXcl angka.
My^jesm or ^^jaxam (as pronounced by the Malays) signifies ampu«
tation, and is also termed cl>U ^^b haris mdti or the dead mark. Its
form is i^ or ^), and being placed over any letter of a word, it denotes
that such letter is mute, dead, or deprived of the vowel sound that
might otherwise be supposed to give it motion or utterance, and only
serves to close the syllable produced by the antecedent letter and its
supplementary vowel, forming what has been already described as a
Cx G GC^ C/Ox
mixed syllable, as jj bad, ^ tin, ^JU*^ sampei arrive, jjcJ tandok horn,
^^ binting a rampart. It may be applied to all letters capable other-
wise of receiving a vowel (of which this is the ne^tion) but is never by
the Malays applied to the three weak letters, nor is the occasion for it in
their
MALAYAN LANGUAGE.
their language so frequent as in Arabic, the genius of the former being
unfriendly to the recurrence of consonants without the intervention of a
vowel sound.
jjjJJ' leshdid {named also Ai sliaddu] signifies corroboration, and being
placed over a letter in the form of ('), has the effect of doubling it; in
which case the former of the two sounds coalesces with the preceding
syllable, and the latter, with its proper vowel, forms the subsequent one,
as in the words e:^ tammat finished, t,- ,i -^ jeniiut paradise, ijtj*- chcrrei
to separate. It may be applied to any of the strong letters excepting
ch, c ng, and ^ nia, which letters, not being themselves of a simple
nature, could not be doubled without a harshness of sound ; and also to
the two weak letters j and ^, although not to \. When placed over
the J or ^-, the former half of the letter thereby doubled remains quiescent,
and the latter half becomes moveable, as in tjj bimang or buang to throw
out, j^" liyang or iJang a pillar, cijj^ muwat or miiat to load, ^y tuwei
to reap : but double letters being in general so litde necessary for ex-
pressing the liquid or fluid sound of the words, it would be uselessly
employing the learner's attention to enter further into the rules by which
the leshdid might be applied ; for we should bear in mind that these
refined oithographical distinctions were invented for a class of languages
with which the Malayan has no radical connexion, nor scarcely any pro-
perty in common : yet are they elaborately taught by the nadves to every
youth who commences the study of his own with some tincture of the
Arabic language ; and a copious syllabarium, where all the s'mjdta are
exhibited, is prepared for his exercise. Examples of this may be seen in
the Alphabetum Arabicuin, printed at Rome in 1592 (with beautiful types],
and in Gladwin's Persian Moonshee, printed at Calcutta in 1795.
G Hamzah
22
A GRAMMAR OF THE
Hamzah {*), the most used by the Malays of all the orthographical
marks, is either an appendage of the moveable \y usually accompanying
its supplementary vowel, and consequently placed either above or below
that letter, or else it is the representadve of or substitute for it, and in
its absenc eis placed in front of the preceding letter. So intimate indeed
is the connexion, in the opinion of grammarians, between the moveable
\ and this mark, that the former, being present, is made to assume the
name of hamzah, loses its proper efficiency, and, like a mere aspirate,
adapts its sound to that of the vowel with which the mark is accompanied,
* as L^\ abf c->\ ibj lJ^ ub or ob. Thb adaption, it is true, might take
place although the hamzah were omitted, and its use, when so applied,
seems to be no other' than that of denoting the quality of this letter. In
tliis language, however, where the vowels are sparingly employed, the
chief use of the hamzah is to express (like our conuna or apostrophe) the
elision of the \ moveable at the commencement of a syllable following
one of the three weak letters, \, ^, or ^^ quiescent ; and also, but not
uniformly, following a consonant rendered mute by jesm] which two
circumstances occur most commonly in derivative words formed by an-
nexing particles (to be hereafter explained), as J\\y^S ka-semporna^n
perfection, ^\Ji pe^karja^n performance, ^f:^ ka-^tantu-Ofi certamty,
^fiii^ ka-nanti-an expectation, JSxm peng-adap^n presence, -mJo/^w^^-
tbur comforter, CS^yJu meng^usik to tease. It also supplies the elision
of \ before j or ^5 at the commencement of a word to which the particle .
ya sa (a contraction of cu^U salu one) is prefixed, as %jj^ s'orang a man,
for jj^L sa^di'afig ; as well as in the instances of /^yS^ mak'ujar for
j>^ CS^ maka tijar and he said, and {^^^Jjj^ martk'itu for cs^l *^7*
marika tlu those people ; and, generally, wherever such elisions occur»
Sometimes
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. S3
the hamzah instead of being a substitute for 1, represents
the I or jb, which soft aspirate has nearly a similar sound, as^^^^iJU meng*
ambur to scatter, from j^ ambur or hambur ; ^j-iyJf^ meng-ilnus to
unsheath, from ^jjb unus or hunus ; and thus also when the primitive
begins with l» Ka^ the \ being then quiescent or vowel, preserves its place
m the derivative, and the > only is represented by hamxahj as in ^UU
meng^is to consume, from ^\ibabis or Aaiif ; ^UU meng-alau to drive
out, from ^U a/^u or halau. It will not escape remark that hamzah^
according to the foregoing account of it, partakes .much of the nature of
the Greek (') or spiritus lenis, and that in respect to fona it is the
Arabic ^ din dimimshed in size.
J^ tcesl ("^], by the Malays written and pronounced 4^ weslah^ sig-
nifies '< union,** and is applied only to the initial \ which then becomes
entirely route, and a junction takes place between the sound of the last
vowel of the preceding word and the next following consonant, whereby
the two words j^re made to coalesce. Its use is confined to AraUc
phrases, and chiefly,' if not entirely (excepting in quotations], to the \ of the
defimtive particle Jf aU which under certain circumstances is modified in
b ^b«0 ^ 4<^ b
pronunciation, as ^^1 lJ^ kitabi ^Inabi the book of the prophet, <d)l m^
bismi *llahi in the name of God. For the rules by which the applica*
tion of this mark is governed, and particularly for those afiecting the
letter J also, of the particle, according to which it is extinguished and
its place supplied by doublii^ what is termed the solar letter which
^ <^ ^b 4«^
follows it, as in the sequel of the phrase last quoted, *^^f {^f^^J^
Hrahmani 'Irahtmi the merciful and compassionate, the Arabic grammar
«must be consulted. To the Malayan they may be considered as extra-
neous.
«4 A GRAMMAR OF THE
c « ^
j^ medd or ^ jw« meddah ('^) signifies extension, and is in like manner
applicable to \ whose sound is thereby lengthened. Its use may be
thus considered ; that the pronunciation of the syllable requiring two
alifs^ one of them moveable or consonant, and the other quiescent, but
the rules of orthography not admitting of such a repetition of the letter,
this mark is placed over the one !, to denote at the same time the elision
and the extension of sound, as in A dyer water, uJ\ dpi fire, A\ dkhir
last. But in Malayan words the long sound of \ forming a syllable at
the beginning, is commonly expressed by U hd^ with the soft cnr imper-
ceptible aspirate to support the supplementary vowel, as in ^\sb*hdbis or
dbis to finish, ^J^ hart or drl day, J^ hdyam or J\ ay am a fowl.
In some writings, however, we may find a second and smaller \ placed
beside the greater, which the grammarians affect to consider as .sMK>ther
form of medd^ and name it uJi 4^ medd *alif. This smaller \ is also
employed by itself, and placed above the other characters, whose junc-
tion frequently excludes it frcmi occupying that place which the greater
\ would hold in the line, as in ^^ao^j for ^^U&j; rahmdn merciful ; but
this seems to be nothing more than a fancy of the penman, and to have
no influence on the pronunciation. When placed over ^^ final, it implies
that the letter, in Arabic words, is to be sounded like 1, as in AjU;
tddla most high ; but the Malays, on the contrary, sometimes introduce
this lesser \ instead of applying fauhah to the preceding consonant, in
order to produce the diphthongal sound of ai or ei, as in ^ pdkei to
wear, ^^ gulei a curry. Finally, the meddah is employed in abbre-
viations of a sacred or mysterious nature, where one, two, or more words
are represented by their initial, medial, and final letters, as a « for f!Li\ <ulU
aldhi *ssddm peace be upon him.
MALAYAN LANGUAGE.
25
tliCel ttngkn (f) or the Arabuin cipher z, wl»en used as an orthogra-
phical mark, deaotes that the word to wliich it is apphed, allliough
written hut once, must be doubled or repeated in the prommdation.
This expedient proceeds from the frequency of theae reduplications in
forming certain indefinite plurals, superlatives, and adverbs, and in e*-
pressing die continuance or repetition of action in verbs, as ^i^^ rUmdk'
rumah houses, fti-'lS kata-kata words, t tj^ piitih-puuk very white,
f^Xij ihiggi-tinggi very high, rj^ mula-mula in the first place, t^jA
mdna-mana wherever, V J^ jatan-jalan to walk about, r^U mSin-maht
to play or be at play. It must be observed at the same time with regard
to the verb, that where reciprocity of action is to be denoted by repetition,
a difference of form or inflexion takes place (as will be hereafter more
particularly explained), and instead of applying the cipher, the wotds
are written at length, as ijj:^ yj tolong-menohng to asast mutually.
When the cipiier is applied to a derivative word, the primitive part
only, and not the particle prefixed, is repeated, as r^U^ ber-mukan'
makan to cat much or frequently, r*lLi se-lama-lama so long as, Ibr
ever, Tti^J^ pcr-turut-turut 'AivsCm oi followers, retinue. Where the
particle is annexed, the cipher may be equally applied and the repeti-
tion take place, as J^CS^ ka^siika-suka-an hilarity, JTH^^ pcr~
bunoh'bmoh-an repcAled murders; but not with strict accuracy, because
a prosodial variation takes place, and the words stiould he, and mord
frequently are written ^^'U—SLS ka-suka-iuka-an and ^^^jS ka-lmnok'
bunoh-an, without the aid of the cipher. When ihe particles « meng
and ^ peng are prefixed to words marked with the cipher, in which
the particles nre followed by a vowel-Bound, it is conunon to retain the
nasal ng in the repetition, and for fi^U* an Jnquishive person, to write
H and
26 A GRAMMAR OF THE
and pronounce cJlc «-5UJ pengapa-ngapa^ for fjJU to cogitate, j^jJi*
mengtra-ngtra, and for fj\lu to continue flowing, to write JlcJU^ meng*
alir^ngdlir. _
Thus much it has been thought necessary to say on the subject of the
elements of which words are composed, and of the characters and signs
by which they are expressed in writing. The words themselves, their
distmctions, qualities, and uses in serving to convey, either by themselves
or by their combination, ' intelligible and correct meanings (the proper
object of Grammar) must now be considered.
Division of Words.
The most obvious and general division of the language is into primitive
and derivative ' words. By primitive or simple words are to be under-
stood all words, of whatever part of speech, in their original and unmo*
dified state, whether indigenous or adopted from other languages, as c^jl
orang man, ^U tdnah earth, ^^jj budt understanding, ^ besdr great,
ic^ takut afraid, cJ\ aku I, Jl^jalan to walk, jji luar out, ^ akan
unto, ^j weh alas ! By much the greater proportion of primitive Malayan
words are ^ dissyllables, pronounced with a slight stress or accent on the
former of the two, as iU nidkan to eat, Ji^ pukul to strike, ^\S pa-
dang a plain, ^^ ptriang betel-nut ; whilst monosyllables, as c^ brat
heavy,' a^jauhidcc^ 2f\^ ^a/e renown ; and trisyllables and polysyllables'
(not composed), as ^b bendtang a beast, ^^ betina female, ,^|^ serdya
at once, J^ kalanggdra inquisitive, are very rare.
Derivative words are foimed from the primitives, by prefixing or
annexing certain inseparable and otherwise non-significant particles,'
which will be enumerated and explained in their proper place, it being
sufficient
* * *
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 27
sufficient to notice here, that prosodial and other changes in the ortho-
graphy of the primitives frequently attend their application, as ^tju^
luhadu^n existence, from jt ada to be, ^jS^ ka-lapar^n famine, from
J!i lapar hungry, ^^j turun-kan to lower, from ^jy turun to descend,
mengampmg to collect, from ^-m^ kampong an Inclosure, J^^
memukul to beat, from J^ pukul strike.
What are properly named compound words, formed by the junction
of two or more significant terms, are not frequent in this language, and
the few that occur consist either of such as convey nearly a repetition of
the same idea (often borrowed from different languages], as i^L..^ suka--
chita joy, ^^ jj JjU dkal-hudi understanding, d <d) lelah-leteh languid ;
or else of words which have become connected in their signification by
familiar use, and made to coalesce in sound by the elision of a vowel, as
4^jl|i J din 'art break of day, cs^Jljj^ marik *itu those persons, they ; to
which may be added c^^'b iya-itu that is to say, uJL»e^ barang^siapa
whosoever, ^U ^ sapu^tangan a handkerchief. There are also a few
words of three as well as of two syllables, which occasionally drop the*
first, especially in conversation, as j^j rtmau for ^jjb ariviau a tiger,
^i^ iimun for ^^v^^ antimun a species of cucumis, ^U marah for ^Ut
amarah angry, Joj ringan for Jojk artngan light in weight, ^^ punia
for ^fJi ampunia own, ^j^ mas for ^ amas gold, ^ nam for w!
anam six.
Tarts of Speech.
The usual division of speech, in the oriental languages, is into three
parts only, viz. the noun, the verb, and the particle ; the first including
the adjective, and the last ail other words ; hot thb seems much too
general
2» A QHAMMAR OF THE
geperal for the pjupposes of usieful distinction, and sdtbou^ djie diviaiop
intg eight p^uls, i^liich was found applicable to the Gxeel^. afid LajLii^y
and from them has^ heeiix adapted ipto th^ mpdiera lai^vu^ea of Europey.
is not perfecdy suited either to these or to. the JV^alayan, I am induced
from a consid^ration. of the advantage that attends tW ^mplpyjaept q£
known and current terms, to conform ii». greats measiVie to. the p^iaciplie^
of thi^ division, instead of attempting a. classificatipn- entUroly new.
Some difficulty arlsjes from, a numerous description of words presenting
ijiems^lves, which in their primidve or crude state arc not coi^fioed to.
one paiticular part of speech, but are gommpn to two or more, as JU..
jalan, to walk apd, jafffn^^ ro^, ^U sal(ih wxov% v^6rjdlqljr a iHnlt, ^«xj
tjdor. to. sleep and ttdor asleep. This, however, is no more than» occurs
jp, Englislj, where thq ^^rwda ** love, dark, dry, wish,'* and: innumerable
others, are ajt the same time noup,and>ver^, substantive aiid s^jectiyflt,,
s^ljectiye apd verb, and may be employed in tjie ope or: the other ca-
pacity as. the cgnstrtiction requires.; and^as in their derivative fmm the
parts. Qf sp^ch to. which Malayan word^ of this description belong, are
d^rniin^ in^ general, by the particlo» (prevalent in proportim as the
s\y}^ is. c;oi;^^t and gr^matic;al), it will not be necessary tq. cpmider
them as a distiqct classi but as belonging to the several parti of : speech
to whiqh.they may be eventually referable, either from their place ia the
sentence or the changes they undergo.
The following are the parts of speech mto which, without departing
too much from accustomed.distiactions,. the language may be divided.
NiO^y^s or.tlie names oC. things, the objects of sense and thought.
ApjfCTiyiCS.or the qualitives of noui^.
Pronouns
ĕ
\
If - ll .
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. «9
Pronouns personal «nd demonsivalive, including the Article.
Verbs or affirmatives of being, acting, or BuQering.
Adverbs or ciodals.
Prepositions or directives.
CoNjUNCTloKs or connectivcB.
Interjections or exclamations.
Inseparable Particles or formaiives.
O/ Nouxs.
Nouns in this language cannot properly be said to pos^sess the distinc-
tions cither of gender, number, or case. The absurdity of attributing
difference of sex to things, or to the names of things not organised by na>
ture to reproduce their kind, did not suggest itself to the framers or
methodisers of the Malayan tongue. The real difference exisdng in
animate beings, as Tvell as that presumed to exist in vegetables, is denoted
by appropriate words expressive of the sex, as CiTU3 laki-laki man, male,
jjji«j! perampuan woman, female, ^j^ jantan the male, and ^y betljia
the female of animals in general, as c/)li3 %j^ orang laki-laki a man
(distingoished from a woman), ^jji*/ \j^ orang perampuan a woman
(distinguished from a man), ^^^u». j/ kuda jantan a stallion, ^^ j^
kida bettna a mare, ^u* J> ayam Jantan a cock, ^^ ^\ ayam bciina
« ben, ciTW ^ ganja laki-laki the male hemp-plant. Should it be
nuuntained that kiida bettna a mare is effectively the feminine of the
noun kuda jantan a horse, that daughter is the feminine of son, and
queen of king, we may answer, without denying the propositions, that
such a dtstincti<m of terms does not belong to grammar, hut like other
B of things, they are best sought for in a dictionary.
1 Number
A GRAMMAR OF THE
Number is not denoted by any variety of termination or change in the
form of the noun, but by separate words expressive of plurality or sin-
gularity, such as fjj\i bdniak many, "lX, bdrang some, or by specific
numerals. An indefinite plural, however, of a pecuUar kind is some-
times employed, which consists in a duplication of the noun, and has
already been noticed in speaking of the cipher used to signify it, as
Tiiflj biiili-bdiu stones, XJij riija-raja princes, TcJi kdta-kdla words.
The opinion may indeed be hazarded, that in this lar^uage the noun in
its simple state, without any accompanying term to hmit or extend its
signification, is more properly to be considered as plural than singular ;
or, that in order to the determining its number, the application of a term
expressing singularity is more commonly necessaiy than one of indefinite
plurality. Thus, for example, in the phrase J j c jjl ^\ ada orang de-
iuar there are persons without, the word orang requires no plural sign;
but, on the contrary, in the phrase jjj j |jj— j1 ada s'oraiig de-luar there
is a person without, the article or numeral of unity is indispensable ; and
so also in the phrases jjy' jjlj j de-bdilk gunong beyond the mountains,
A jX-fc* mem'bilt dyayn to purchase fowls, the words gunong and dyani
are at once understood to be in the plural number. And from hence,
perhaps, has arisen the practice of denoting the individuaUty of all sensi-
ble objects by specific terms accompanying the numeral; which are in
many instances descriptive of some obvious quality of the thing, although
in others quite arbitrary ; but the nature of these idioms will be best
understood from a single example in our own language, where, in speak-
ing of catde, we say two, three or more " head;" whilst the Malays
(and somewhat more appropriately] enumerate cattle, buds, and animals
in gener.^1, by the " tail," as /A *J j/ kuda Uma Uiir five horses (or
Malayan language. 31
aiot biones), ^^ Jl^a^ ji/ karbau sambtian ikur nine baffaloes, J^
Jj\ oA<) ^^U ayani sabong ampat ikur four game-cocks. In coandng
tke human species the generic term c^jl oratig is repeated, as cj^^ l^^t
arang ^orang erne person, |jjl ^ ^i/KJ laki-laki dm orang two men,
V;j( 4l4^ u^^^ perampuan tt^a orang three women. To inanimate
substances various terms are in like manner applied, as 2r^ ^ T_ :} ptsang
/Imtf 6f^A five pkintains, jr^ ^j^ inimali sa^buah one house, xj^^ ^cSj
negri sa^bOah ant or a city, ^^ cuU mo/tf sa-btji one eye, .^^w» jjj telur
sOrbiji.oDe egg, ^^jJ c^V ^^^^ diia btji two stones, \JlL> ^jb daun sa^ei
one leaf, ^iLi (ju^i^ rambut $a4ei one hair, ^b jj ^ji j^i^An 1/^ batang
two. trees,.. ^Lrf jil^ Aroyw sa-batarig ?l piece of timber, yU. ^l^ gigi sih
bati one :tooth, aLj vljlj ^ /Mf/Hin ttga bilah three plank, «Lj y cjj
pedang dm btlah or ^ jj dm keping two swords, ^JL* ^^ A:^/ar
sa^epmg or ^lli ^a-/a a sheet or leaf of paper, yjj ^IjL» Si lada sa-puluh
butir ten grains of pepper, j^^^ ^«3$S^ gSding sa^pUchuk one elephant's
tooth, . ^jif^ ^ ^Lrf snapang diia pUchuk two musquets, j;^-^ ^jy^
iOrat sa^pOchuk a note, ^^\j^ uu^ /^i^X-^t sa^rawdn out fishing- net, (^l^
jffUL il^ato sa-patah one word ; with several more of these idiomatic ap-
peqdngessto the numerals, whose proper application can only be learned
by much practice in the. languagie.
In npyns borrowed from the Arabic tlie plural is generally formed as
iniMsUlaiyan words, without attention to the mode followed in the Ian-
giis^e to which they belong ; but on the otl^er hand, the Arabic word
malMkat, angels, is indifiereody used, in singular or plural, or more
ily in the formei:.
C^Mes beii^ understood to sign^y tliose changes in the termination of
nouns by. which they'decUoe.frcp the nominatiye. or casus .rectus, an^
become
»-.iMi»»»ri)i
8*
A GRAMMAR OF THE
become oblique, do not apply to the Malayan, in whlcU no such declen-
sion takes place. In this language, as in English, the modifications of
the sense are efiected by means of prepositions or (as they do not neces-
sarily precede) directives, the noun itself continuing unchanged, as mS
i^jj ka^pada nanak to a house, t^jj jj^j deri-pada rumah from a house,
j~tjj J dc rtimah at a house, i^^jj^ J de-liiar rumak out of a house, ^\3_o
i^jj de-atas rtimah on top of a house, t^jj ijU j de-bawak rumak beneath
a house ; so also ^ akaii, ci) f>tigU or M ^ ka-pada allah unto God,
t_— *A Jl:>» -WiJ deri-pada lymdal amba from my capital, jjj JjS ^1 uUh
karuniya baginda by his majesty's favour, ^ ^y ^^ dangan tolong
nab'i with the aid of the prophet, i^^U j^ jo pada slang art at day-
break or by day-light ; none of which phrases can, without an abuse of
speech, be denomioated the cases of those nouns.
In the situation of a subjective or accusative case, or where the noun
is the subject of the action, no directive is required, as i_il i^lS pasang
apt light the fire, jjK ^j! potong kdyu cut the wood, ^ ^.)-* ^ne-lar>
kan klida to gallop a horse. Yet ^ akan is sometimes superfluously
introduced, as ul^\ ^^t ^ Jfy pukul akan anjing itu beat that dog.
The possessive sense, or what is termed the genitive case of a noun, is
expressed by its position, the word denoting the subject of possession
always preceding that which denotes the possessor, as \j ^ benda raja
the king's treasure, ^}^^ ^\f»- chdya maia-dri brightness of the sun,
or the sun's brightness, ijjS^ jjJ^ ka-tmggi-an gunong the height of the
mountains, Ijl ^i/ kuriis-an awd leanness of the body ; or otherwise
by the use of a pronoun in the possessive form, as clj ^ ^.^^^Ait, amba
punia tvdng my money, iit ^jiol c/1 aku ampunia tdnah my land, ^jl
4iJffc ^jS jjjj». orang chtna punia aria goods of or belonging to a Chinese.
It
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 33
It may be remarked, that this latter mode is chi^y (though not exclu*
eively) employed where real possession or property in the subject is
understood, whereas the mode by position is moi^ commonly used to
imply attribution only, as in the former examples»
The only changes to which the form of nouns is subject are tho^e
which they undergo as derivaUves, and upon the correct employment of
these modifications depend the propriety and delicacy of language, or
those qualities which, as much as the choice of terms^ distinguish a polite
from a vulgar style. Derivative nouns are constructed by means of
particles prefixed or annexed, from primitive nouns (although rarely),
from adjectives, and from verbs chiefly, and, in a few instances, from
other parts of speech ; as in Latin <' altitudo" is formed from ^< altus,"
and ^^ permutatio ^ from *' muto.*'
From adjectives they are formed by prefixing the particle cJka-- and
annexing the particle ^ -^m, or by the latter alone. Thus from «jj^
rendah low, comes ^loJ^ ka-rmdah-an or ^IjJ; rendah^^tn lowness,
humility; from^ besdr great, ^^J^ ka-besar-an greatness; from clA«
matt dead, ^j^^ ka^matuan death ; from ^ mlah wrong, ^!L^ ka*^
tulahran criminality; and from ^U manis sweet, ^^^^ mams^an
sweetmeats, and ^>„jv 4< ka^mams^an sweetness. So also from verbs, as
from vjuii nanti to wait, .V**^ ka^-nnntuan expectation ; from i^jl lari
to run, ^^ ka4ar%^n flight ; from Jo\ ingin to desire^ ^tf ka^dgin-^
an lusts ; from c^\^ bhagi to divide, ^^^X^^ bhaguan divisicm ; and from
JS^ makan to eat, ^\C« makan^m victuals. But exclusively of these
derivations taking c/iuh and ^ •arii which are in general what gram»
raarians term abstract nouns, « numerous class is in like manner fonned
K firomr
34 A GRAMMAR OF THE
from verbs by prefixing the particles^ pa'^ with its varieties Jj pel and
i_i pe, and ^ pen, with its varieties J^ pern and ^ peng ; being by these
changes of termination adapted to the sound of the letter with which tlie
succeeding syllable commences. Thus from jxJ ttdor and jj\ adu to
sleep, repose, are (ovmed ^j^sjj per-tidor^an and ^*jyj per^adu^an a
sleeping place, recess for a bed ; from «^Jc^ mandt to bathe, \^ocmo^
per-mandi-an a bath ; 'from cj^ bilat to do, Ji\j>J per^btiat-an work,
performance; from^l ajar to learn, ^^jU-Jj pel-ajdr-an a school; from
jr^j^ suruh to order, send, 2[;^ pe^suruh an envoy, messenger ; and from
^ bili to buy, ^^^-Jj^J per^biR-an or ^^^JuS pe-bili-an a market-place, and
^^LL4j pem^bili-an the article purchased.
So alsa from 4/j^ cAiZn to steal, is formed 4/jjfS pen-churi a thief;
from «Ujj 6iZ;2(7A to kill, «o^ pem-bunoh a murderer ; from J^i buyer to
pay, ^L«5 pem^dyer payment ; from (Jj^^ chUchuk to pierce, ^}^yfi
pen<huchuk a fork, skewer ; from (juaIj d^pat to obtain, ij^JtooS pen^
ddpat apprehension, and ^Ujcj perirdapat'^an acquisition ; from uJ^t
Hut to follow, ^^.S^Jo peng-iiut a follower ; from^jt ukir to carve, j^^
peng^ukir a carver or engraver ; from «ut ^oA to nurse, «uUi peng-dsoh
a nurse ; from ^l^ ^o/F to dig, ^llgp peng^gdlJ a spade ; from c:^^ /iaf
to see, Ji\^ peng^lidt-an sight; and from y»l7 ^[Jm to know, ^yf^p^ng'^
a^tauHin knowledge.
: It may be remarked, that the derivative nouns formed with J per^ Jj
pel, uJ pe, express for the most part the place of the action implied by
the primitive verb, or the action itself; and that those formed with ^
pen, J pern, ^ peng, express the agent by wh^m the action is per«
formed, the instrument, or the faculty ; the former partaking of a neuter
or
MALAYAN LANGUAGE.
35
or oF a passive, and the Utter of an active signification. Their corres-
pondence with the intransitive and transitive signs of the verb,_^ ber and
^J^ men, will appear in treating of that part of speech.
In the examples that have been given of tlie formation of derivatives,
it has been effected by simply prefixing or annexing the pacticles, without
any other variation than that of the relative length of the vowels (on
principles to be hereafter explained] ; but there are circumstances under
which an entire change takes place in the first sylUhte, in order, as it
would seem, to render the coalescence with the particle mure agreeable
to the ear, as from -a-b tajam sharp, is formed (kf-lJ penajam (instead
of pen-tajam) an instrument for sharpening ; from jj^ tawar to cure,
jjU penawar (not pen-lawar) an antidote or charm ; from ^U samuti to
rob, -*Lj peniamun a robber ; from u:^Jl> sungat to sting, u:.jLJ peniangat
a sting; from yU sapu to sweep, ^\^ pcniapu a sweeper; from m^^
padam to exlhiguish, *Jim pcmadam an extinguisher; from tjiJ pan-
dang to behold, ^j^ pcmandang a view ; from J^ kanal to call to
mind, JJo penganaL recognitbn ; from J^li kaxval to guard, JjUJ penga-
wai a watchman or guard ; and from «Jj pegang to hold, ^iXm pe-
megdng-an a holding, tenure. This adaptation of the particle being
equally attended to in the inflexions of the verbs, the particular rules by
which they are governed will be mure conveniently explained when these
are treated of; and it remains only to observe, that verbal nouns are also
sometimes (though very rarely} formed by prefixing the particle i_i se
^more usually employed in the construction of adverbs), as jU.. se-tau
knowledge, privity, in the phrase c.,„«a jU.^ ^^ oU liuda davgaii se-tmi
amha it is not with my knowledge.
Derivative nouns may in like manner be deduced from primitive
nouns,
36 A GRAMMAR OF THE
nouDS, or from words in any other parts of speech, as from Vm»mJI omba
a servant, ^*Lc*J per^ambd-an servitude ; from uJlJ tapa seclusicm, pe-
nance, lJ\jJ per-tdpa a hermit, recluse; from^b^ antdra between, ^j^
pcl'itntardn a hall, passage. It may^ however, be more correct to con-
sider these as deriving immediately from the verbs L^^4Jtj ber^mba to
serve, 4^1?^ peMdpa to perform penance, and Jqj\j ber^antdra to lie
between. Fractional numbers are also derivative nouns, as iA^\j9 per'»
ampat a fourth p»^, ill^jL. sa-per^ttga one third, ^J cJUi ttga per^Bma
three fifths \ but beside these we meet with some derivatives from numerals,
expressing titles of command and office, as ^\J^ peng'^rdtus a centurion,
from ^\j rdtus an hundred, and ^^So peng-lima or par^Gma a go«
vemor, prefect, from ^ lima five : but the origin of the appellation is
uncertam.
Lasdy, derivatives may be formed progressively from other derivatives»
in a mode that will appear intricate to those who begin to study the
language, or who are accustomed only to the ordinary colloquial dialect»
but which is hot devoid of method and consistency, as may be seen in
the word ^U soma alike, same, which becomes by duplication the adverb
rA^ sdma*sdma together, from whence is formed the verb r^^U^ bern
samonsdma to act in concert, and by annexing a particle, the derivative
noun ^'Ui«^«L|j ber^sdma^ama-nn confederacy, concert. Thus also in
■
the sentence, ^\fij ^% jU J^Su^ji Ji cU tidda kdmi ber-ka-limpdh-on
tidda kdmi ber^ka-kordng'^an we are not in a state of abounding, aor are
wjB in a state of poverty, where the two derivatives prx^essively formed
from the verbs ^ limpah and cjj^ kqrang, become vtrbal nouns in one
stage, and finally verbs again. So likewise ^lii pifiggong the wai^t
may beooipe ^Ggu^ se-fer^pinggdng^n-nia what w wxim about .her
waist ;
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 37
innl; andjj dfia two, which by the application of c/ l-a becomes jji
ka-dua both, and then by prefixing ^ se becomes yJL. se-ka-dila both
together, may, by annexing the transitive particle ^ kan, become the
vert) ^jjkSL sc-ka-dua-kaii to do a thing by mutual agreement. It may
here likewise be noticed that derivatives, although in their full state of
formation they generally remain fixed to their proper class, yet some-
times we find them, by a licence not very justifiable, transferred from one
part of speech to another, as in the instance of J\ „•- ij^^ *-jL. l::-v«1 Li
long amat sayang dan mengasian-t who is vcrj' merciful and compas-
sionate, where the last word is properly a verb formed from the noun
|t./ kasih-an pity, but here employed as an adjective. Thus also the
transitive verb i_sdir« menalantang to lay upon the back, is used in the
sense of resupinus, •' lying on the back ;" and _y^ mcniiju, properly
" to point to," becomes the adverb " towards."
ylz>JSCTIP'£S.
Adjectives or words denoting the qualities of nouns, and which may
therefore be termed quatitives, are not (any more than the nouns) sub-
ject to variation of case, gender, or number/ That which they undei^
id the formation of derivative or abstract nouns expressive of quality,
has been already explained. They are connected willi the noun by
position only, and in simple construction always follow it^ as iJy jji
kuda pulih a white horse, ^^ ^Jit, art raya a festival day, ^JU; JK
kopal tinggi a lofty ship; but when a quality is predicated of a noun,
or in other words, when in the corresponding English phrase the verb
substantive intervenes, the qualitive is in the Malayan made to precede
the noon, ajtbongh the verb is not necessarily expressed, as 1,^1 i,j1 jjU
L baik
38 A GRAT^MAR OF THE
bdi&, orang ttu that man is good, ^j j^ ^y putih kuda raja the kill's
horse is white, c^^v^Jb <Uj^ Ja^ kechil rumah amba my house is smalL
They may be formed from nouns by prefixing the particle j bcr^ as
^yj ber'biilu feathered, from jy bulu feathers, v/Ju»^ ber^budi wise, from
(^jj budt wisdom.
Comparison of Ajmjectivbs.
The comparison of adjectives or expression of the relative degrees of
quality, is effected by words and particles prefixed, and not by any
change of termination.
The comparative degree ik formed by means of the words ^ Ubik
more, andjj deri or j^ deri-pada than, or by either of them separately,
m
as JjW jt> ^U ^ lebihpanas deri daulu hotter than formerly ; ^U ^ti
Jj^' dkJ^j lebUi manis deri-pada gula sweeter than sugar ; j^y ^jU ^JJu
%j^ tiriggi aluwan deriJcorong the stem is higher than the stem ; ^\
^ dkJ^ J — J-» inulah suchi deri'pada lain thts is cleaner than the other.
The superlative degi*ee, by jnrefixing the intensitive particle j ter^ as
j^j tcr^besdr very great, ^lyf/ ter^kwasa very or most powerful, ^Jj
ter^laju very swift ; or by an adverb to which that particle is applied, as.
Jtj ter^lalu or uy ^Jj terAebih tiah extremely old, ja^ Jij ter^ldlu
guppok excessively fat ; and these expressions are sometimes enforced
by adding the words ^ man indeed, J\C sakdli entirely, or t^:^ amat
exceedingly, as ^ j^U Ji/ ter4dlu bmk num extremely good indeed,
JLij^ aJj ter-lebib besdr sakali^ or ^ v^^t Jtp ter-lalu amat besdr
most exceedingly great ; or the latt^ may be used Without the former
adverb, as JIL> ijy putih sakali perfectly white ; and when the definite
article is prefixed, aa absolute expresiioD of the Miperiathrt i« fonnec^
aa
I
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 39
( • ,
98 JIC jj\) ^ tang baik sakali the best, JIC jj^ ^ tang hunik sakali
the worst. The inseparable term l^ malm is also applied with the
same effect, as LU \^ maha-mulid most magnificent; ^IJu V«^ tang
mahd-tinggt the most high ; and a kind of indefinite superlative is pro-
duced by doubling the adjective, as V sj^ jauh-jauh very far, X ^\j rdmi-
rami very populous, rtjlj niaring^nidring very shrilly T*^ merah"
merah very red.
In strictness, however, the most part of the foregoing examples ought
rather to be considered as phrases or members of sentences, than as a
comparison of adjectives in the sense of the Greek and Latin grammarians,
whose object was to distinguish and to account for certain changes in
the form of the words themselves, denoting the degree of their quality,
and not to shew how a comparison of ideas might be expressed by a
circumlocution.
«
NUMSMALS.
Numerals have usually been classed under the adjective, with which
they have many circumstances in common, but their nature is sufficiently
peculiar to entitle them to be considered as a separate part of speech.
They are distinguished into cardinals, ordinals, and fractional.
The cardinal numbers are as follows : kz^y^ sudtu^ u-^L sdtu^ ^\ asa,
U sa one ; y dm two ; cJ^ tiga three ; c::Jut ampat four ; ^ Bma
five ; Jt\ anam six ; i^y tujuh seven ; ^Jih deldpan^ jHy^ duldpan^ and
J^ saldpan eight ; Jl^i^m sambtlan nine ; iyu» sa^uluh ten ; ^^^Ju^ 5^-
bias eleven; ^^jJ dua-blas twelve; ^^ <1SJ /igd(-*/ir^ thirteen; ^lyjj
dua^uliih twenty; izA^^ A^ yi diia-puluh suatti twenty-one; ^J ^^jL;
figa-fUbih t^x * 'b* W Ivma-fiii^ fifty ;> ^j-^j^stMrc^ ood hnadmt;
40
A GRAMMAR OF THE
j_j1, yi dua~ralus two liundred ; t_-o -» sa-Tibu one thousand ; ^jJLi sa-
laksa ten thousand; ^ ^^ sa-pnluh laksa one hundred thousand;
liJjj*-' sa-jula or j_^ j_^\y.j sa-ralm laksa a miUion. In borrowing the
word ^jj^ laksa from the Sanskrit the Malays have, very arbitiarily,
changed its signification Trom an hundred thousand to ten thousand ;
'which often gives me to misunderstandings in their transactions with
roerchants from the continent of India. In some Malayan countries, but
not nniversaliy, the term ^ Bkur is appUed to the numeration between
twenty and tliirty, in tlie same manner as ^jAj bias to that between ten
and twenty, and thus instead of i^y, jly jj dm pululi sitatti twenty-one,
they say jC-U sa-lihir, for twenty-two JJ ,j dua-likur, for twenty-three
jjy cJ^ liga-likur ; and agreeably to this we find the date of an epistle
given ih fac simile by Valentyn {Vol. I. p. lai.) thus expressed, jj,j
cuL j)jJ jj LT^'lr- iJ"^ '-rr^r' <i^^ J^J^ ij^. ^J^J^ deri-pada sa-likur an
bulan sawdl tdun sa-r'i/m dan xn-rdtus dua'puluh sdtu on the twenty-
first day of the month sawdl in the year (of the hejrah) n 2 1 [A. D.
1709.]
The numbers raid-way between each ten are expressed, eipecially in
conversation, in a peculiar manner, as, for twenty-five, they familiarly say
ily CS-^ **^ tangah tJga puluk, or, literally, half of thirty ; for forty-five,
4^ ^ ijii langak lima puluh half of fifty ; and upon the same principle,
for one hundred and fifty, ^j-:i\j yi «; tangah dHa rdtus, hterally, half of
two bundled, that is, of the second hundred. Thus also for two and an
half, they say cS^ «Uj tangah tiga half of three, and for three and an
half, u.^1 iXi (arfgah ampat half of four. Nine is often expressed by a .
phrase implying the deduction of one from the next following ten, as for
sixty-nine they say ijjj Aa-y ^j.\ cj^ korang asa tijtih puiuh wanting one
of
J
MALAYAN LANGl^AGE.
of sevenly; for ninety.nlne, ^^]^ u^ sj/ korang asa sa-raius wanting
one of an hundred, or, an hundred less one.
It maybe observed, that a contraction of the numeral of unity becomes
the indefinite article, as tuliL. sa-kata a word, or, one word, V»j— j s'orang
a man, or, one man. The same takes place in most other languages.
The ordinal numbers are as follows : *\;y pertama (for the Sanskrit
pralama)^ or *ly ^j iatig pertama the first, imprimis ; jjS' ka-dua tlie
«econd ; C^ ka-tlga X\\t 1\\\tA; i^J^ ka-ampat the fourth; ^ ka-
lima the fifth ; aI^I-S ha-sa-puluh the tenth ; ^ j^ ka-dua-blas the
twelfth ; jj ^y tl^ ka-tiga piiluh dua the thirty-second ; yj^ g».jS ka-
tujuh rdlus the seven hundredth.
Fractions of numbers, which have alread^1>een noticetlin speaking of
derivative nouns, are thus expressed : iSc^ sa-langah »n half; t^JJjL'
sa-per-iiga a third ; (.r-i*'^ sa-per-ampat a fourth ; *J^ sa-per-lima a
fifth ; klS^J y dua pertlga two-thirds : lx.^'J tiJU trga per-ampat
ihree-fouiihs ; *J^ l=-X.1 ampat ptt-Uma four-fifths ; y 4ju iffrfgah dm
one and an half, as before explained. Of multiples and divisionals
examples are as follows : ^3 CJJi tlga lapis three fold, triple, triplex ;
j^iJiJ tlgaganda three-fold, Irtble, triplus ; j_^;i-J Ihna lapis hvc-Md,
quiDCuplex ; jj^ _J lima ganda five-fold, quiutuplex ; jU i.::.^! Jl» ^^Jj
^^jj tlga kali ampat jadi dua-blas three times four makes twelve;
vl^J i-li'W ffl^gi tlga divide into three jiarts; iJjU. TCJj t^ cA*V ■'^
i.i«aU jj jXt; uJ^ ^^\J i^\ Jii' se-telah her-himpun buang iiga-ttga jeka
tinggal asa balk jeka tinggal dua jdhat having added together (these
numbers) cast away the threes (divide by three) ; if one rem.iins it is
lucky, if the remainder be two it is unlucky.
•'' The foregoing system of numeration, evidently founded upon that of
»)«■ M the
4«
A GRAMMAR OF THE
the HinduSi from whom the Arabians, and through them the Europeans
derived their knowledge of arithmetic, must have been familiar to the
Malays, and incorporated with their language long before the introduc-
tion of the Arabic character, and accordingly they have not adopted the
practice of inverting the order of numeration and proceeding from the
units to the decimals and hundreds, as the Arabians usually do when
they express a date or other number in words at length. The ciphers
or figures employed in their more formal writings are those of the latter .
people, vi%. I i, r 2, r 3, P 4, o and 05, 16, v 7, a 8, 1 9, ^o,
!♦ 10, !l 11, ir. 12, r* 20, !♦♦ icx), t^\ alif 1000: but in their
epistles and ordinary transactions they more commonly employ the. nu-
merical figures ^ which, alth(Righ of Hindu origin and not materially
changed k form, we now consider as European.
No instances having occurred of the Malays employing as numerals .
the letters of the alphabet arranged in a particular series, well known to
Arabic scholars, and as such to the Malays themselves, under the name
of s^ abjd or abjid, it seems unnecessary to enter further into the de-
tails of . it in this place than merely to state that t, c-^, ^ j, *,.,:, , t,
represent the units, 4^, cJl J, ^, ^^, ^, ^ u-i, ,j«, the decimals, j, ^, ^,
P9 c^y ^1 4)) ^i l&i the hundreds, and c a thousand.
Qf Pronouns.
^
Pronouns may be divided into personal, demonstrative, and relative.
Personals are those substitutes for names by which the person who.
speaks of himself, the person spoken to, and the person or thing spoken,
of ve designated without a repetition of the name. When applied to
inanimate
I
MALAYAN LANGUAGE.
43
inanimate things, though considered as o£ the third person, they fail
more aptly, in this language, into the class of demonstratives.
To the personals belong the possessive pronouns, which are not dis-
. tinct words, but produced, as the possessive form of nouns, either by
annexing the term ^y punia own, to the pronoun, or, more usually, by
the respective position of the words, as expbined in treating of the
noun.
Amongst the personal pronouns some are found to prevail more in
one, and some in another of the various countries where the Malayan
language is spoken. Those belonging more particularly to the politer
style, which is also that of books, are fixed and uniform, whilst, on the.
contrary, those employed in the bazars^ are often local, and consequently
little known beyond their own district. The following enumeration con-
tains the whole that occur in the best writings, or are recognised in the
• dialects of the different islands.
Pronouns of the First Person.
il/t aku dr (when connected with another word) cJ ku^ I, me, we, us,
appears to be the simplest term by which the first personal is expres8cd« *
and is generally employed by superiors addressing their inferiors, but%
sometimes between equals, and in certain cases by inferiors, as Hjy^ cTI
aku suruh I order, tKf-^ ^j^ menurut itlah^ku to follow my diitc-
tions, -^;t < ^ clXj^y luhan-ku tang ku^ambah my Lord wlu»n I serve* ;
When thus contracted to c/ it is made to coalesce with and form a part
of the verb or noun with which it agrees in construction, and especially
in the possessive form, as in the preceding example. It is sometimei^
but rarely, used as a plural, • and only where another w^i^ conveying
the
a'grA'mIUXr 6T'^ffft^
the idea of plurality is joined with it, as ^ ui5l aku ka-dua we two, Ijotli
of us, Ji_ cJ\ aku iakali-an all of us. When this personal follows a
vowel or nasal sound, it is often changed to l1/1j, in order to avoid the
hiatus, as c/lj J\ akan daku to me, cJb ^p^ meiiungg2i'i ddku to
attend upon me.
»_™«j6 ainba I, me. This word properly signifies a servant, and when
employed as a pronoun should in strictness be considered as of the third
person, but use has determined it to the first, as oi£ i„j^^*i, amba kata I
say, uJ.y (— *♦* amba turut I follow. In ils original sense it might be
natural to say, in a style of humility, 2I; .^Ait amha-mu iau thy servant
Icuoweth, or —^ jj Ui kasih pada amha-mu give to thy servant; which
phrases are equivalent to I know, give to me, and being from their fami-
liarity liable io abbreviation, it may have become the practice to drop
the possessive, and to say more brieBy amba tau, kasik pada amba.
Thus, as in many other instances, the diiTerent parts of speech usurp
each other's places, and as pronouns are defined to be substitutes for
nouns, so this and some similar nouns become substitutes for pronouns.
UL^_ beta. What has been said of (_..4A amba applies also to this
word, which equally signifies a domestic servant, as Jjaj ^ ^y iJjj u weh
bunoh beta daulu alas, kill me first !
^\^ saya, signifying a slave, implies, when used as a pronoun, more
humihty than the preceding; but as language, and particularly thelan*
guage of compliment, is not always to be construed hteraUy, we must
not understand that the person who employs the term necessarily regards
himself as the slave, or even as the inferica: of him to vfhom he addresses
himself, but only that it is his intention, by an affectation of humilily,
to shew his politeness ; and accordingly we find it much used by Malays
of
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 45
oF rank, m conversation with the superior class of Europeans; as j^^
jjy ijL-s^ sai/a minta tolong I request assistance,
iL^'^ patek seems to express still more humility than ^^1^ sai/a, and
is little used in ordinary conversation, as jS\S ai^' ^^^ nfj^'^ uJ^^y l) id
iudn-ku dangar-kan apa-lak Uiabar-nia palek O, my lord, give eai- I
pray thee to the story of thy slave !
\^ gtia appears as a pronoun of the first person in some vocabularies
published at Batavia, and may have been borrowed from the Cliinese;
but it is vulgar, and does not occur in any good Malayan writings.
\ji,.< Hta we, us. This personal plural is used for the stugular by
royal personages. When employed by others it frequently includes in
its ttignihcatioD, along with tlie speaker, the person addressed, and cannot
therefore imply any circumstance of superiority or inferiority, as 1^ ,,^
aL-*.,^ ci/ /iJla pergi sama^sama we go together, ^^ v£--S ktt€i-punia
ours. When a greater number than tVro is meant to be expressed, it is
usual to annex the term c ,j1 Zrang person, and to form the compound
word \jy-=^ klt'ormig by tlie elision of one of the vowels ; but it chiefly
belongs to the familiar style.
^-^B kumi we, us, on the contrary, excludes the party addressed, but,
like fci™i kitOy 19 often employed for the singular in the style of sove-
reigns, as jU jU |-J? l^ml tiada TJiau we (or I) do not chuse, ^}-JL
^jJi ka-besdr-an kdml our greatness ; it is not, however, confined to this
tooe of superiority, and the phrases VV iji-oj ^^^ kami pinta totong we
beg assistance, and even ^JIS ^ ^jJ& kdmi liina papa we are mean and
poor, are not uncommon. When, in order to express several persons,
the word \j^ orang is annexed, no elision takes place, both because the
final vmvel is long, and in order to distinguish the compound from \jy-^
N kdm'orang
46 A GRAMMAR OF THE
kam'drang for kamu-brang ye ; as i^\ %j^ ^^j-li- *^j\ |_j*lS kuml-orang
sakali-an drans ackeli we are all of us men of Achin.
Pronouns of the Second Person.
J^\ mrgkojl, or, by contraction, ^ kinr thou, tliee, you, ye, appears to
be indifievenily used both in the singular and the phtral. by superiors and
inferiors, as in the following examples: J'y jif X^l 'M-^ kmnbali~lah
angkau kapada irian-?nu return thou to thy master; ylcl ji^Slj takut-kak
ungkau art thou afraid ? ^i^ t^ 4?^' CS^y ^JV. ^^lal^ luhan-ku.
angkau-lah iang meng-a-tau-i O, my Lord, thou art He who knoweth
(all thmgs) ; Ji cS^ yli! 4jjy ^J^ ^j^-'-^ us* '""* Tnantri sakaU-an
turut-lak migkau kata-ku mi O members of my council, be ye obedient
to these my words! When abbreviated to ji kau it is generally employed
in a tone of overweening authority, approaching to contempt, as .^1
Ij/j^ c/ja kau-korang what dost thou want ? JiS^ oLJ' liuda kaii-kanai
art thou not aware ? ^ tLs^ ninti-lah kau die thou '.
jiLij dikau you, thee, appears to be only a modification ofylil angkau,
in order to accommodate it to the sound of the preceding vowel or nasal
and avoid a hiatus, as yl;j Jus^j deri-mana dtkau fr«n whence (srt)
thou ? jJJj j^ ti^ i-*V*^ "-s--^ "^/ «-^ i'^'tfli kau-buat bagtiu se-
nischaya ku-bunok akan dtkau if thou doest so, I shall certainly put
thee to death: in which instances the words mmia angkau and akwv
mgkau -would be unpleasant to the ear of a native. It is never (or, if
ever, under very peculiar circumstances only) employed as the agent <x
nominative case to the verb, but is the object or subject of the actioo,
smd generally follows a preposition. This would seem to entitle it to
being considered as a case of the pronoun ^\ angkau, were there not a
mor»
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 47
more consistent mode of explaining why it is (bund in the latter situation
alone, which is this; that in the place of a nominative preceding the
verb| as well as the other parts pf . the sentence immediately connected
with it, the occasion would not e;xist for any qualification of the original
pronoun, because no hiatus could be there apprehended.
M^ kdmu, A mil thou, you, thee, are used by the superior addressing
the inferior, as a\^ ^^cj ^o-^Jy jU ^^ oU tidda kdmt mail btr-daml^m
darigan kdmu we do not chuse to make peace with you ; ^^JX-» f^ ^ hei
kdmii sakalt-an ho! all ye! When abbreviated to a mu it is, as well
as the contractions of cSS aku and ^\ arigkau^ prefixed or annexed to
the verb, or to the noun as a possessive, in the manner of an inseparaUe
particle, as Ci^y^ *^j\ j^V buyer ulih-mu utang^ku pay thou my debt,
C/Uu bapd-ku my father; ^U^ uJlj^ sidpa rajd^mu who is your king?
When its plural is formed by the addition of Ij^t, which coalesces with
it, a still greater distinction is marked between the parties, as ^^^^l^
^^ jj jj^ %jy^^ jdfigan kdm'orang gar 4k deri-sini stir not ye from
Jbence.
^jj tuan^ which properly signifies *^ master," is employed as a pro-
noun personal in addresses frqm inferiors, and, politely, amongst equals.
In form it appears to be a substitute for the third persdnal, but is effeo-
tively used for the second» as ci)» jJcJb ^y ^U^ ka^mdna tUan andak
pergi whither do you mean to go ? CS^ ^y ^^y tu^^ punia suka as you
please, ^JU ^U ^^y uJl apa tuan mdii mdkan what do you chuse to eat ?
In all which instances it is evident that the possessive was originally
understood to accompany the word tuaUj and that the phrase was ^y
i^^^^AJt iuan amba or CJi\y tudn-ku my master or my lord. By a single
lar delicacy of language, this word when applied to the Divinity and
sonifying
A GRAMMAR OF THE
signify'iDg The Lord, is invariably written with the aspirate ^y tuhan,
to distinguish it from the more familiar appellation, as ^^J^S~^ jj-. ^y
'tuium serwa sahalt-im the Lord of all hosts, illl ^^U ^y jU tiada tukmt
•iahia allak there is no Lord but God.
jjiCS pakanlra, f^jfh ) b'ti thou, you, ye, are words to be met with as
pronouds in some European vocabularies, but they are provincial and
-ViiIcirT-and not to be found in good Malayan wriungs.
]. , li iM ( . Pronouns of tjic Third Person.
^e\ iya he, she, him, her, it, has no positive character of superiority or
inferiority ; yet it is considered more respectful (as in other languages]
to designate the person spoken of, as well as the person spoken to, by his
or her name, title, or other description, than by the use of a pronoun,
•and instead of i\i ^1 iya iau he knows, a well-bred native would say, ^y
titan or t\j 1^^ Pjjl orang kaya tau hia honour knows. The word is also,
but not commonly, written jT inya.
In order to avoid tlie hiatus produced by successive vowel sounds, and
collisions unpleasant to tlie car (as noticed in speaking of the pronoun
jJoJ dtkau) ^\ iya is frequently changed to ^i diya, as ^3} ^fj u:-J
pinta diya pergi ask him to go ; Jiy jU ^j ^J^ ka-mana diya maU ber-
im/er whither is he going to saiV? \^j ^ ^ ,J\ iya kanal akaji diya
he recollects him. It may be observed, in reference to what has been
said of j!J_j dikau (p. 46) that ^j diya, although generally, is not always
in the situation of an objective or a subjective case, as in the last example
but one. It forms the nominative to the verbjU miiu\ and evidently takes
the place of ^\ iya on account of the vowel sound immediately preceding
in the word yU mana.
As
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 49
As applied to inanimate things its use is not frequent, the more cus^
tomaiy form of expression requiring that the noun should be repeated
with the definite article ; yet it is by no means incorrect to say, when
speaking of moveables, ^^ ^j^ merigaluar^kan diya to take them away.
In the possessive form of the noun, and also in the indefinite form of
the verb (preceded by the particle de^ as will be hereafter explained)
this pronoun, being annexed to either word, undergoes an entire change
of letters, and instead of ^ iya is written and pronounced ^ via. We
may conjecture from analogy that this was at first intended for Jl inya
(the ^ n being frequently interpolated, as ^:uj pontong for ^y potong^
to improve the sound) and afterwards, for the sake of brevity, expressed
by a sii^le character scarcely differing at all in sound from that pronoun,
as in ^IU^ kapald^nia his head, ^^j rambut-nia her hair, ^^ j de
pukul'Tiia he struck, ^U;^ j de minta^nia he asked.
Although ^\ iya and «^j diya are sometimes employed in the plural^ it
is more commonly expressed by annexing cj^l orange as ^U;> CJ^ ijy^^
dVorang suka ber-main they, or those persons, love to play, U^
yy ^j^*> kasih dV orang pulang allow them to return.
Ls^'cJ^ r« martk Itu or niarika itu those persons, they, them, as 4^1L#
JUt \jji ^J^J «-^W**-^ ^^ sopaya jangan martk 'itu her-cham-
pur dmigan orang islam in order that- they may not mix with Mahome-
tans, ViS^'cJij^ JV^ i^^jMi suruh^ah kambali martk *itu order them to
return. In sense it is nearly synonimous with ^^J dVorang^ but
much less common in conversation.
Personals, equally with nouns, of whose nature they so much partake,
assume the possessive form, by annexing the word ^y punia own, be-
longing to ; or otherwise by the position of the. word betokening the
O subject
5b A GRAMMAR OF THE
subject of property (explained at p. 32), as ^^ tlil aku punia or
^^ amba punia mine, ^A)y^,oc^ u^ beta sindin punia my own, ^^ jf^
angkau punia^ ^^ a^ kamu pUnia, ^y ^y tHan punia thine, yours, ^
iya or ^^ ^^j diya pinia his, her's, theirs ; vljxjj pedang-ku my sword,
U;.,MiJh JS tarigan amba my hand, Jc^ mata-mu your eye, jCAi^ anak^kau
thy child, ^,y ^ btni tiian your wife, ^4;7jU mulut-^nia her mouth, ^\CJ
pusaka-nia bis inheritance.
Pronouns Danonstrative or Definitive.
This class may include not only demonstratives proper, but also the
definite articles, together with relatives and interrogatives, which, in this,
as in other languages, are for the most part the same words employed in
a relative or interrogative instead of a demonstrative sense. They are
enumerated as follows, ^ tang that which, those, who, whom, the ; as
fji\i ^ tang baik that which is good, those who are good, ^yy j ^
tang de per-tuan he who govemeth, the sovereign, ^ly ^ tang pertama
the first, ^b ^ ^yc mUsim tang datang the approaching season, 1^
*^1> ^f^ ^^ ampunia rumah the person to whom the house belongs*
The pronoun ^ nen seems to be only a vulgar substitute for w» tang*
. {^ ttu that, those, the, as cs^l *^j\ orang ttu that man, v::^J CS^ o5
pada kattka ttu at that time, \j:J[ ^..«^ sebdb ttu on that account, ^rX a
(ju^t ^1j saktt'lah raja ttu the king was sick.
J\ mi this, these, as J^ Jy bulan mi this month, ^51 y\ J\ ^\ atau
ini atau lain either this or another, ^y ^yj) jjb ^\ ini-lah bdtk ttu-lak
buruk this is good, that is bad.
uJl apa what, which, as ^ (Jl apa ttu what is that ? 4-JI -djl «/lA
tf/>a by what means ? ^\ i^l y^j^ mrat apa ini what writing is this ?
•JL-
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 51
i.JL.1 st-apa (being the preceding interrogative personified by means of
a particle commonly prefixed to proper names) who, whom, which, as
^U uJLd sp-apa mau who chuses ? uJL^ J\ akan suapa to whom (rela«
tively as well as interrogatively], jj^ ^^ 4-SL-1 suapa punia budak or
kJLrf jj^ budak sl^pa whose servant ?
^)te mana^ is properly the adverb ^* where," but is used idiomatically
to signify " who, whom, which, what," as uu^t ^U cjj\ orang mana itu
who is that man ? Ji^yj benOa mana what country ? J^ jif kuda mma
which horse ?
4^y«> dirt self, is commonly joined to personal pronouns, and, as iii
English, partakes much of the nature of a noun, as f}i «^^^j fl^jagd
dirt kamu take care of thyself, ^j jH JJS Mui 4^1 iya sudah ttkunt
akan dirunia he has stabbed himself. When the personal precedes^
this definitive is changed to i^jixx^ sindiri or «^j^jc^ kindtrij as l^^^^am
4^jf jc^ amba sindiri I myself, i^yjci f^y tuan kindiri thou thyself, ^^j
i^jjjo^ i/iya kindiri he himself. Sometimes, however, it is «nployed^
but rather quaintly, for the second personal, as cul^ ^ji^ uJi apa dirt
kata what dost thou say ?
UM \j iya-iiu may be considered as a compound pronoun, but is only
employed to express the phrase of '* that is to say.**
The definite article being thus classed with the pronoun, it may be
proper to observe, that the indefinite article ^ sa or 'L sa a, an, is no
other than a contraction of the numeral of unity (as in most Eurc^an
languages) and has already been noticed as such.
^y£RBS.
52 A GRAMMAR OF THE
Verbs. .
The verb, in the same manner as (he noun, may be distinguished into
primitive and derivative.
The primitive verb is, in its original signification, either transitive, as
J^y pukut to strike j ui^ tarigkap to catch ; intransitive^ as ^U jalan
to walk, jx^ ttdor to sleep ; or ambiguous, as yA (gar to teach or to lean^
jLv tunggu to guard» keep, or to dwelt
The derivative verb is either the primitive determined to a transitive
or intransitive sense by the application of particles, or it is a verb .con-
stituted by .means o£ those particles from other parts of spe^ch^ as' nouns,
w^'ectives, and adverbs* In conversation the primitive verb is> freqtienjtly
omiployed to express both the transitive and intransitive sense, where a
more correct style would require the derivative, in order to avoid thJe
ambiguity of meaning to which verbs of that d^cription ace liable, as
in the instance of \b teggd to stand, or to set up, where the latter s^sse
would be.^ore clearly expressed by the same verb, in its derivative form,
t^ menegga.
The particles used to denote the tranaftive are either prefixed, or an^
nexed, or both.
The^refixed particles, are ^ men, ^ rneng^ a#o meniy and a T/re,
being in fact vaiteties of one and the same particle modified according
to the letter with which the primitive word begins, in order to render
the pronunciation more gniteful. to the ear.
The annexed particles are i kan and ^^ u Examples of their appli-
cation in forming derivative verbs are as follows.
^ men may precede words beginning with the letters ^ 7, ^ ch^
and
MALAYAN LANGUAGE.
53
«nd J d, as j.lsx* men-jarmt or ^Jy*sx^ nien-jamu-kan to treat, feast,
fct_jUi* men-chdbut to draw or pluck out, »juj>i^ nien-dideh to boil,
seethe, ^^L.«j,^ vtcn-damei-kan to pacify. It somedmes also precedes
CD r, as *i;ii. men-iiiah to order, i^ys^ men-tutup to shut; but verbs
beginning with this letter more usually undergo a change that will be
hereafter explained, and i^ajy tiitup would in the derivative form become
i_e>y^ meniitup,
u meng is used before a vowel sound, an aspirate, and also the letter
tli; as ^^jl»_i* meng-ampun to pardon, j>-\k< meng-ajar to teach, uJiyU
meng-urap to anoint, .tj^jU meng-ilpah to hire, ^^^^, meng-lbur-kan
to comfort, ^Jjj.^Ji, Tiieng-tdiip-i to bring to life, ^^j-**JU meng-amptr-
kan to cause to draw nigh, j^^^iU- meng-anlard-kan to put between,
interpose, (jff«a»-^ meng-itadler-kan to make ready, bring forward,
^J^\a~^^ meng-hdsil-kan to collect produce, ^^^Cu-iX. vieng-gamtt-kan
to paw, ,M^ meng-ganap-l to complete. When the primitive begins
with 1 a or A /^ followed by a quiescent letter or what we term a long
vowel, those previous letters are suppressed, and the particle unites with
the long vowel, as from t.5-^1 ikat to bind, uiX*« Tiieng-tkat, from ^U
/ta^ti to finish, (jJCJU meng-dbis ; the elision being commonly denoted
by the orthographical mark httmzak.
-* mem precedes the letters (_» b and uJ /), as jjL** mem-baycr to
pay, <^„,ii;^,' mem-benasd'kan to destroy, Aij««-» ment-bunoh (or 4jj*<
manunoh) to kill, 4-i*-< mem-plUh to chuse, ^^a^ mem-puiik-kaii (or
i^^memutik-kan) to whiten, 4^1,*** mem-punid-i to appropriate.
* me precedes the letters^ r, J /, a m, ^^j n, and j tr, as juj,j^ m^-
rJlici to spoil, ^^3J* me-rupd'kan to represent, pourtray, y^L* me-lutar
to fling, cast, y-yi* me-lantas to pass through, jj,Cs=^ mc'ttuiti-kan to
P put
64
A GRAMMAR OF THE
put to death, ^^i^ me^mabuk't to inebriate, ^J-a^^ me-nantu-kan to
expect, ^jy< Tne'WartO'kan to report, publish. It also sometimes oc-
curs before the soft aspirate 2f,. as^^i^^ mcrhantar to convey, J^j^^ me-hela
to drag, and before a vowel, as j^>; ^,tLw< me-tUmg-kan jejak to deface
the track ; but w« meng is the particle more commonly employed in
this situation, with the omission of the aspirate. .
It appears by the foregoing that the simple application of the particles
is conEned to certain initial letters, and it being necessary that the tran-
sitiive .sense should equally be given to words beginning with the other
letters of the alphabet, but which by collision with the particle would
pcpduce that harshness of sound so carefully avoided by these people,
recourse is had to the expedient of modifying, in a peculiar manner, the
first syllable of the primitive, when commencing with one or other of
the letters c:.; r, ^ ^, t-Jp, j X:, or c/^, and thereby adapting it to the
particle, which is also itself susceptible of the variety of termination
already mention^. It may be supposed that the observance of these
minute rules is not unattended with difficulty, but the learner will find it
more serious as matter. of study than of practice, and that the latter wilt
be much facilitated by the smoothness of pronunciation resulting from
these changes.
When the primitive word to which the transitive particle is to be
prefixed begins with cl^ t, the derivative is formed by omitting that
letter and making the final consonant of the particle ^ men coalesce
with the following vowel sound : thus from ^y iolong is formed y^
menolong to assist ; from d^y turuty e^^ menurut to follow ; from
Ks^^. tantUy \Jjii^ menanlM^kan to ascertain ; from ^^tf. tarTgis^ ^X-xL«
menajigu-kan ta bewail; and when a reciprocity of actipn is meant ta
be
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 55
be expressed, the verb is repeated in the two forms, as ^^ ^y tolong
menolong to give mutual assistance, ^jJJc^ ^jJJu tangkis menangkU to
parry each other's thrusts.
When the primitive begins with ^ ^, that letter is changed to ^ nia;
and the particle a me is prefixed ; or it may be considered that the ^ 8
is dropped, and the ^j n of the particle ^ men changed to ^a^ nia : thus
from L^ sampei is formed ^J^%^ meniampei to cause to arrive; from
y^ya susu^ s^>-r* ^'^'I'Mi^-J to suckle ; from ^j^ senang^ ^j^^ meniifnang
to satisfy ; and from ^^ stram, aj^ menyJram to besprinkle.. - This
modification of the paiticle sometimes takes place in forming transitives
from words beginning with ^ and ^, as from ^a^ junjang ^Jji:sL^
meniunjong'kan to raise to the head, and from ^^^ chuchi pure, ^^^
meniuchi to purify ; but the more correct inflexions would be ^<A^v^u
men-junjong'kan and ^^^^ men-chuchu
When the word begins with 4^ p, that letter is changed to m m, and
the particle m me is prefixed, or the uJ p is dropped, and the second ^
m of the particle ^ mem coalesces with the vowel, as from j)(» palii is
formed ^Uc memalu to strike ; from jj^ pegangj ^Ia^ mem^gang to
hold ; and from ^y putusj ^y^ memuiiu to break off.
When the word begins with cJ k^ that letter, in the formation of the-
transitive, is dropped, and the particle ^ meng being prefixed, its final
letter coalesces with the vowel : thus from iZJ^ kata is formed (.zjlU-
mengdia to acquaint; from^jl^ ka-luar^ j^liU mengaluar to take or put
out; from ^jJ^kiipas, u^y^ mengupas^o peel; from ^jJS ktpas^ ^.Jt A ^
mengJpas to fan or to winnow ; from Jj^ kanal to recollect, JJ& penganalj
as in the following sentence, ^JU^ ^ JJi J^ ^^ ^ j JjjU Jj s^jfJU
vierigatau^ dan meriganal dangan perigatau^m dan periganal tang
senyporna
A GRAMMAR OF THE
semporrm to iuow and to remember with perfect knowledge and recot<
lectioa.
The annexed particles ^ -Ian and ^ -J tnay be employed either la
conjunction with the prefix to enforce the transitive sense, as 'cjj ^J-'yi^
mejfgunus-kan pedang to unsheath a sword, ^^ |jA-i*fc« men-benasa-
kan negTi to ruin a country, ^JyS ^^J^^,*^ mem'bhdru-i kabun to renew
a plantation j or, independently ol the prefix, to form a transitive verb,
as i_j1 ^J^j^aa ambus-kail apt blow the fire, jj? ,J^ lepas-kan kuda let
loose the horse, Js^, ^.^ J de taiilu-T-nia bechdra he ascertained the
matter, tjuj ,^j^ J de lumur-kan-nia dinding he daubed the wall. It
may be observed, that the imperative form does not admit of the prefix
though it does of the annexed particle, and that the infinitive seldom
dispenses with the former.
The particles, or modified particle, jj ber, Jj bel, (_> be, denoting the
intransitive sense, are prefixed to the verb or word verbally employed,
without any annexed particle, as _^ljj ber-djar or ja-Sj bd-ajar to leam,
i^Uy ber-dnyiit to drift or float away, ^j^ ber-diri to stand up, ^jj
ber-dtam to keep silence, *jj^y ber-sinyutn to smile, jjj-jj bersurak
to shout, \J\ji ber-pdrang or c^li be-pdrang to go to war, ^jh be-ldri
to run away, TiJjcJj be-rintik'Vintik to fall in drops. In most instances
the particles y ber and u-> be may be indifierently employed, the former
being more usual in writing, and the latter in conversation ; and it may
be observed that these two intransitive prefixes are much more simple in
their application than the transitive, and coalesce with all the letters of
the alphabet. The other modification, Jj bel, which seldom occurs,
precedes only a vowel sound, although from analogy it might be sup-
posed to coalesce with l-j b also, its in the fonnation of derivative nouas ;
but
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 57
but although they write ci\Jj peUbhagi division, the verb is ci'lf^
ber-bhagi to become divided. Belbre J / it may admit of a doubt
whether the prefix be Jj ^/ or c.^ be^ as the Malays avoid double letters
in writing, and rarely avail themselves of the orthographical mark ( -)
ieshdidj by which the duplication of the J / might be expressed.
Although the foregoing distinction between the effects of the transitive
and intransitive particles, is founded upon the obvious tenor of the Ian-
guage, yet many excepticHis to the general rule occur, which it is proper
to notice.
Some veibs not strictly intransitive, inaBmuch as they admit a subject
or accusative case, nevertheless assume the intransitive prefix, as j^h
btl-ajar to learn (a lesson), ^JtJ^ji ber^simpan to have (money) in keep-
ing; yet as distinguished from the same primitives with the transitive
prefix, j>Mio meng-^jar to teach, ij^ menyimpati to put by, lay up,
they are considered in the light of intransitives. A few anomalies
*
however, appear, which this explanation will not account for, as ^^
ijys ber-kirim sural to send a letter ; and when the particle^ /^er (which
will be particularly noticed hereafter) is introduced between the intran*
vitive prefix and the verb, the latter commonly admits the annexed
transitive particle and expresses a transitive sense, as ^ ^/iH^ be^
per^sambah^kan khaber to communicate intelligence (to a superior) ; and
in like manner there are instances of the transitive pardcle being pre-
fixed, where the verb is notwithstanding employed intransitively, as t-^vO
JJU ainba meng-artt I understand, ^}:»^ *Ij j^j diya tau menari she
knows how to dance, ^^\i^ jj\ anak memrTgis the child cries, jlacu
jJU men-jadi masak to become ripe ; of which last verb the nature and
pecuUariliM will Uppewr under the next head.
Q, Verbs
68 A GRAMMAR OF THE
Verbs Substantive.
The verbs denoting being and the progress of existence, called verbs
substantive, are ol ada to be, is, and jU. jadi to become, wax ; answering
to the Latin sum and fio.
These verbs being in their nature intransidve, do not require the in-
transidve particle ^ her (though they admit of being rendered transitive,
with a facility peculiar to this language, and then assume the usual pre-
fixed and annexed particles) as ^\^ jl ada hoik is good ; ^Ji\ S\ ada
haniak there are many ; i^^j j\ ^U j de-mana ada rumah where is the
house ? (^.^AJb dj <Klb\ ada-lah pada amha I have (there is to me) ; C^
^^ (jji^j j1 j;jU bagi pdtek ada permata sa-biji thy servant hath a
precious stone; Jij*ic^ji t^\ jl ^^jekalau ada iya ber^kandaran if he has
a conveyance, ^\^\ c^^ ^V ^^J^ seperti bdyangjuga add-nia it is like
a mere shadow.
When used without an adverb or modal, j^ ada does not appear to be
confined to the present nor any definite time, as ^icP jij ^\j \jy^ j1 ada
iorang rdja benua ajem there was a certain king of Persia, ^\ %jy^ o\
i^y^J ada s*drang anak-nia perampuan he had one daughter, y^J ^y
JL^ jjb i«L. j1 ijJ^ A-^ ^U nona puMtig jdngaii sUsah dti ada sa-^
Idmat ddtang kambdli your mistress is gone, do not be grieved ; she
will come back in safety, ^^ ^5! jl j«\^ andak ada iya suchi he ought
to be clean, ^y^^L^ ojjj <U ^\ j\ «Oijuh andak-lah ada iya Icbih deri^
pada pemrbdyer Utang-nia he ought to have more than sufficient to pay
his debts.
Employed as an auxiliary it is equivalent to a participle of the present
j£ense, as ^^ j\ cjjt orang ada mdkan the people are eating, jt jj\iX
^Icj k'dnak^dnak ada ber^main the children are playing, or at play.
It
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 59
It is much more frequently understood than expressed, as AyC^ ^jj
bendr-lah bechard-mu your counsel is right.
When used in an active or transitive sense, it signifies to cause, give
existence to, or occasion to be, as jIU meng-^da or ^L^ m^<^ maig*
add'kan kwasd-nia to give existence or occasion to his power.
The other verb substantive oU. jadi^ in its simple intransitive form,
signifies to become, to wax, as ^^ jU. ^^j diya jddi kdya he becomes
rich, ^U jU- \^fi}^ arhpun jddi pdnas the day waxes hot.
In the transitive form its signification is nearly the same as that of
the preceding verb, viz» to cause to become, to constitute, to create, but
is more commonly employed, as Jij ^o^acu men-jadt-kan rdja to con-
stitute a king, JU ^o^acu ^ ^y tuhan tang men-jadi^kan dlam the
Lord who created the world, jj^ ^^j^ ^j^cu men-jadi-kaii din-nid
garuda transformed himself into a griffin. Gontrar)', however, to one
of the most consistent rules of the language, the transitive form of this
verb is often employed intransitively, as jUcu men-jddi (but never, with
both the prefixed and the annexed particles, ^ds:u men-jadi-kan) a!LA
islam to become a Mahometan, ify jUcu (Jil aku rncn-jddi tdah I am
growing old, ^:uj jI^ «Ju» uf^^ d^^ anak^nia perampimi sudah mert'-
jddi bunting his daughter has become pregnant, -V^ v*r^J^*> de jadi^
kan-^nia rdja he became a king. In the last example the irregularity id
the most striking.
Verbal nouns are formed in the usual manner from both of these
verbs, as ^'b*l^ ka-add-an existence, ^J^ ka-jadJ-^n creation or pro-
duction ; and even in its primitive form, jl ada is sometimes made a
noun, as oU ^b o\Jai\ antdra ada dan tidda between existence and non^
existence! between is and is noL
Distinctiom
I
60 A GRAMMAR OF THE
Distinctions and Relations of the Verb,
The distinctions of active and passive voices, of mood and tense, apply
but imperfecdyy and those of person and number not at all, to the
Malayan verb. ]^ order, however, to conform as much as possible to
ideas rendered habitual by the practice of reducing the grammar of other
languages to the standard of the Greek and Latin, it becomes expedient
to consider the verb under the most applicable of the established rules,
and to explain those departures from them which are peculiar to this
language.
The personal pronoun or the noun that stands in the relation of a
nominative case or agent, commonly precedes the verb, and it rarely
happens that any words beside the qualitive or the modal (and that ge«
nerally expressive of time) intervenes between them, as ^^jl^ ^...wiib
amha chdn I seek, ijJSj gj^t orang ber-kata people say, Jij ifx^ ^^
diya sudah ber-layer he has sailed, cJ^j j\ Jj jjl# ^j»!' gadong bharu
balum ada ter-buka the new warehouse is not yet opened. But when
the verb is preceded by the indefinite particle j de or sign of the aorist,
the nominative case is then always made to follow, and the accusative or
subject frequendy to precede the particle, as ^*,^;i*> de per-lambaUnia
iie delayed, ^U^ ^\ W o jU tidda de terima allah puasd-pua God will
not accept liis fasting, ^V^ <U^ j ^^\ ^,/L» sopdt/a iya de biinoh raja that
the king may put him to death, ^A^.J^J J u^^viJb c:jyb J^y j L^^^^Mb amba
de pukul arta amba de rampas-nia me he beat, and my goods he plun-
dered. In the following example the agent in the former part of the
sentence, contrary to the general rule, appears to follow the verb in
order to preserve and maintain uniformity with the construction of the
latter part^ which obeys the rule last-mentipned^ ^j^ *^y^ •yf^Jj^ ^<^-^
^i)\^
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 6i
fc^4> ^ ^*,lji^ jeka gugur iya (for iya gugtar) atau de gugur^kan kuda-nia
nian diya if he fall, or if his horse throw him.
The passive voice (as in English and French) is found only in the
form of a participle, and is rather a branch of the transitive than a
distinct species of verb. It is denoted by the inseparable particle j7 ter
prefixed, as ^j^fj ter-tulis written, ^^y ter^bunoh slain, A^j ter-pilih
chosen: but to avoid harshness of sound in pronunciation, the^ r of the
particle is sometimes dropi>ed, as aju^ te-lampau exceeded, ^\p te-per-
alas founded.
The moods of the verb may be named and ranked as follows, viz. the
imperative, indicative or assertive, conditional, and infinitive or indefinite;
which admit, for the most part, of being expressed in the present, the
past, and the future tenses or times.
The imperative mood, in its second or characteristic person (the third
being more strictly a permissive) is in this language the original and
simplest form of the verb,"^ and the only one in which a perfect sense
R can
* Id the Latin, Greek, German, Persian, and many other languages, the imperative
seems to be the most obvious basis of the inflexions of the verb, yet it has not been so
regarded by grammarians, who assign this property, some to the third person of the pre-
terite tense, and others to the infinitive mood. Sir William Jones says, that the latter
** is properly considered by the oriental grammarians as the spring and fouotaio of all the
moods and tenses." It is with diffidence I venture to state my opinion in opposition to
such authority -, but to my mind it appears more probable, both in point of form and sense,
that the infinitive, which so far from conveying a simple idea, approaches in fact to the
character of an abstract iioim, (a^ in the phrase, '' to give is better than to receive,**)
could neter have been the source of tbat mood in which the earliest sentiments of childhood
and
6a A GRAMMAR OF THE
can be conveyed without the asaistance of any other word or particle, as
4^ ^r/give, cJ/pergi^o^ ^^ tndkan eat, jJjJ duduk sit down. It
does not admit of the prefixed, although in some instances it takes the
annexed ti*ansiiive particles ^ kan and ^^ F, and very commonly the in*
tensitive a) lalh ^s ^f\ ^J^ lepas^kan nnjing let loose the dog, ^ji
1^^ pulang^kan gddei return the pledge, <dj^ man-lah come, aLcI^
banguri'lah waken, arise;
Wlien the pronoun of the second person accompanies the imperative,
it is made, as in other languages to follow the verb, as ^l^ ^^ lari kdmu
run thou, %jy^^ J^ jalan kam'orang march ye !
It may be observed that these personals are such as imply inferiority
of condition (persons in that relative situation only being liable to receive
commands) and that a well-bred native would express himself otherwise
to his efqual or his superior, and instead of a^ j4>^4> duduk kdmu or
/i1 J 4^5 J duduk angkau sit thou, would say jjjj ^y uui^ minta tuan
duduk
and the rudest of savage life are known to be communicated, in terms equivalent to '^ give,
*' take, come, sit, eat, go." But without reasoning d priori, what unbiassed person will
not admit that the Latin inflexions '^ damus, dabam, dabo,** are more likely, with respect
to the letters which compose the words, to have proceeded from '^ da** give, than from
" dare" to give, and " imus, ibam** rather from *' i '* go, than from '* ire" to go,
or from any other mood or tense of the verb. Upon the same principles I should say
that the Persian infinitive ^j Ju«^ puntdan to ask, is formed from /^ puirt ask, fjuV J^F
hurdan to carry, from J bur bear, and {j'^)j randan to drive, from ^j ran drive, by
annexing the syllables ^Jj tdan and ^^ J dan to the simple roots, and not by the contrary
mode of proceeding ; whatever the native grammarians, who speak technically rather than
philosophically, may assert. In some languages, I am aware, the proofi are not ao
but artificial refinemeoti may have Uksa the place of more origiaal espreasioni.
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 63
duduij or^ still more politely, j^j ^y ^L^ sila-kathlah tmn duduk
be prevailed upon, Sir, to sit down.
A species of qualified imperative^ which may be termed a recom*
mendative (expressed in English by the auxiliaries ^^ should'' and ^' ought")
mil be noticed in speakii^ of the conditional mood of the verb.
The indicative or assertive mood partakes of the simple quality of the
imperative, particularly in the first and second persons of the present,
tense, as jU «jil aku mail I chuse, J\^ ^.^.^^jb amba jalan I walk ^^l^
CM^ saya minta I ask, ^^^^ ^l^ kamu minum you drink, c^l^ jCAl arigkau
kdta thou speakest, 4^U^ \jy^ karri orang perchaya ye believe. It
assumes however both the prefixed and annexed transitive and intransitive
particles, as ^y i^j uu:j^ ^J^ saya me-nanti titah tuan I wait your
orders, ^ ^ C^\ ^Jjbj^ C^ aku sarah-kan anak^ku ka-pada tdiigan^
viu I commit my child to your hands ^1 ijy^ mj^j u^-^a^ amba ber^kirim
sural tni I send this letter. If the transitive forms in these two persons
are not so familiar to the ear as in the third, it is because they must be
employed to assert what, from the action itself, is sufficiently known to the
person addressed. The third person, on the contrary, and particularly
in the past tense, is a more habitual form of the verb, and admits of the
easy application of those particles, Jybj J^j ^^J diya bcr-jdUm daillu
he walks first, ^l; sJla^ ^^J diya mem-bdsuh tarCgan-nia he washes his
hands, ^^ jjH^ j^^ anjing mem^uru rusa the dog pursues the deer,
^y^j^r^^ ^«J^ ^"^ tj^ orang ttu sudah mcfn-^dyer ulang-nia that man
has paid his debts.
In the interrogative form of the indicative the personal is usually made to
follow the verb, as Ji ci^ 4^ apa kata kdmu^ or ^y isJi kata tOan what
•ayest thou? ^l^ %j^ «Jt;} ^r^ karmg kamu haw sumy do you want?
64 A GRAMMAR OF THE
\jj^ d} J^ ka^mana pergi kam'orang ivhither arp ye going? But
they also say ji %jy^ uJIjU meng-dpa kam'orang Idri why do you run?
or with the proper interrogative particle 4 kahj ul^ t^bjCc! a^j
de-mand'kah angkau ddpat ttu where did you get that ? Where the
nominative case is other than a pronoun personal it more commonly
precedes the verb, as ^y irju» ^jj 4^ ka-^mana^kah burong sudafi
terbang whither has the bird flown ? JU^ jjca J^ £LJi\ apabtla-kah
raja andak kambdli when does the king mean to return ?
In the assertive form the agent or nominative always precedes, and the
subject or accusative, as well as the object or dative and ablative cases, in
plain construction, always follow the verb, but without being liable to
variety of termination or other change of form that can justify the ex-
pression of the one governing or being governed by the other ; as ^^
JUjj \L.c tiikang meneggd rumah workmen build a house, ^b JiL*^ %j^
orang memlkul baban men carry hwrihtn^^ y^ Jij JJ)^ kdpal ber-ldyer
ka^timor the ship sails to the eastward, c-^^JI JIj^ cl^U. ^yb ujan jdtu
ko'ddlam Idut rain falls into the sea. In poetic language, however, these
rules are dispensed with, and inversions of the order of words are not
uncommon.
The rules which govern the assertive apply equally to the conditional
or potential form ; the word which precedes it in construction and causes
the verb to express a conditional or potential, instead of an assertive or
positive sense, not affecting the application of the transitive or intransi-
tive particles, as ^b ^y CJ^jeka tua?i dulang if you come, 'iJLc J[;)^
kdlau rdja me^ldrang if the king forbid, ^\j J^ «^b ddpat kdmi
ber'Oniong provided we are successful, ^^ ^ L^^^Ajb ^\>- i^lL» sopdya
JdrTgan amba kena rugi that I may not incur a loss, JU 4Xflcu ^\ ,^\L»^
dgar
n
MALAYAN LANGUAGE, 6s
agar sapaya anak-nia men-jddi alim in order that his children may
E)ccome learned.
From the conditional tk explained in the foregoing examples^ and
which may be termed the conditional-assertive, we must distinguish a
recommendative form, which being expressed in English by the auxiliary
^ should,'' seems to belong to the subjunctive mood, but may with more
propriety be regarded as a qualified or conditional imperative. Like the
simple imperadve it rejects the prefixed transitive and intransitive particles
^ men and j ber^ but assumes the indefinite particle j de (whose
extensive use and peculiarities will appear in tho sequel) and is preceded
either by the adverb uiU maka ere, before, now, whereas, or the auxiliary
4JjcJb andak'lah should, ought, or by both, as in the following examples,
y^ ^ ^y J uLCo maka de potong dangan pisau you are (then) to cut
it with a knife, ^a^^SIjijj j CS^ maka de randang^kan-nia you are to fry
it, ^^i3. ^J\ ^ji i^ ^\i> CS^ maka tidda de bunoh akan diya you are not to
kill him, ^a^/J w» uXo niaka de per-ulth-nia in order that he may obtain,
,^^^t^ J rflijcj^ uX« maka andak-lah de buang^kan-nia he should or
ought to throw it away, Jl^ ^j ^\^ aliju» uXo maka andak^lah puasa
dua biilan should or must fast two months, ^Jj^ ^^t ^U- dlSjcjb andak^
lah jdiigan iya ka-tinggal-an he ought not to loiter behind, 45 JcJb uX*
v-^jJg -* J\ Jij 4djl %Ji maka andak^lah de parang ulih raja akafi
marik 'ttu the king ought to make war on those people.
When the verb substantive is introduced, the indefinite particle is
omitted, as .^ ^\ j\ aUjoa andak-lah ada iya swhi it should be clean,
«>/ u^\^ \yy^ c/^l/ ^^ "^ y}^^ an^fa^ ada iya kwdsa duduk de-dtas kdda
he ought to be able to sit upon a horse, ^y^J^ *ijji^ ^ (^\o\ jXAandak
S ada
C6 A GRAMMAR OF THE
add iya lebih deri-pada pem-bayer utang-nia he ought to hwe more
than wherewithal to pay his debts.
The optative, which in other languages is likewise classed with the
subjunctive or conditional mood, in this seems to belong (as the precede
ing) to the imperative, and requiring the indefinite particle j de^ is nearly
allied to the recommendative in point of form, as t^uX^Ju^ ^U ^\ i^j j
de bri allah kamarau sedtkit God grant a little fair weather, ^JLm-- j %Jj
^1 barang de sanipeUkan allah may God cause it to arrive. The optative
or obsecrative expressions, JU\ apd4ah, ^a)J <dUl apa^lah khra-nia^ ^\J
garang'aih are much employed in giving energy to this mood.
The infinitive mood rarely dispei»es with the transitive and intransitive
particles, which seem to belong in an especial manner to this form of
the verb, as ^\ v^UU ffi CJJJ pergi kamu menchari ontong go thou to
leek for gain, ^y^ uuJl latnbat mendhng slow to assist, J\j:f^ }y^
^ iJ^J^ ^^*^ wi^flr mem-bechara-kan dan mengarja^kan diya diflScult
to plan and to execute it, c:uCfi|^ ^s^ sedta ber-angkat ready to set out^ .
^Ujf vlC suka ber-main glad to play, czJij ^^^ pantas ber-kdta fluent
of speech, ready at speaking.
The distinction of lenses or times to which the action of the verb
lefers, being effected by the use of specific words expressive of the
past, the present, or the future, and not by any alteration in the form of
the verb itself, the subject inight with -propriety be treated under the
modal or adterb, but the learner who is accustomed to the method of
European grammar, will naturally expect to find whatever has relation» .
to the verb exem^ified in this place.
Where the assertion of acting or suffering is unqualified by any par-
ticular
*
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 67
ticttlar attribution of time, the present or existing time must of course
~ be understood, sis u:^ v^^^^ij» amba tiat I see, ^\j ^J<ft^ mata^ri naik
the sun rises, Jb^ uJ) api bet^niala the fire blazes, i^^fJU ^ M allah
long meng'^'taU'l God who knoweth, or is all-lcnowing ; but it does not
reject the addition of modals, which serve to mark the time with more
precision, as %Ji^ cl^jj l.^^ ^ tni'lah amba bilat sakarang this I do,
or am doing, now ; d^ ^J\^ ^^J diya makmi jiiga he still eats, or is
eating ; ^51^ ^ J ctU pagi ini prau ber-layer this morning the vessel
sails ; jc2j ^\ ^^^ ^J^ ^b j\ oo^ C^ padiika kakanda ada dalang
ini mengawiTi'kan anakanda baginda my dear brother is now coming to
receive in marriage the daughter of your majesty.
Where the present time is denoted by modals expressing a continuity
or existing duration of action, the verb, although not altered in form,
may be considered as assuming the nature of the participle present and
gqrund. The modals employed for this purpose are i^^ lagi still,
more, J^^a^ sambil^ i^j»>b seraya^ and iji^j^ serla whilst, when, at the same
time, as soon as, whereupon, with, together with, as ^b C^ lagi datang
coming, jXJ cJ^ lagi tidor sleeping, or, still asleep, ^ji J^^i-i JU^
ber-jdlan sambil bcr-sinnyum walked 00, smiling, yj^ J^a^ «*-V>*« J^
isJi^jA dan meng-ticfiap sambil berMiiang oyer mata and said, the tears
at the same time trickling down ; ^1;;« J\ ««JLe ^^l^ <u«m meniambah
$eraya metiiapu aver mata^nia made obeisance, at the same time wiping
away her tears, en essuyant ses larmes ; c^ ^^\^ ^lyy j de tertawa-nia
wraya bcr^kaia he laughed, saying, ^b ^ c^ scrta iya datang as soon
aft he comes, upon his coining ; ^ ijy^ l^ cy serta tiba swat ini
upOD the arrival of this letter.
A prcseDt ccwtinuity of action is in like manner implied by prefixing
the
68
A GRAMMAR OF THE
the verb gubetantive o\ ada, as ^^Si^ j)\ ^^j dtya ada mandt she is bathing,
{J^J j1 \jyi.^ dVorang ada ber-jalan they are walking. It must be
remarked, however, that the verb substantive is not confined to the pre-
sent time, but may be connected with a modal of the past, though not of
the future.
Beside, these, a gerund in form as well as in sense, being in fact a verbal
Boun iafinitively applied in construction, is produced, as other verbal
nouns, by prefixing to the sihiple verb the particle cJ ka*, and annexing
tfce particle ^ -flw, as ^a^jjL idxc^ jJ^ c^^w^ ^^ ^V» «^jW^ mata-arl tidda
kaMaUan sebdb ka-linddng-^n-lah sdyup-nia the sun was not to be seen
by reason of the shadowing of its wings ; d^ (j/^\*^ W (-J1 c\J tidda apa
tang ka'ddngaV'^Tf Idgi nothing was any longer to be heard; j,y ^Ji
y3 ^^ ^jXfi:^ kdrna bumi santidsa ka^datdng^an dyer by reason of the
€arth continually imbibing water.
The past time is most commonly expressed by modals, which in Xht
m
construction of the sentence precede the verb. Those chiefly employed
<iire 4Sj telah and XiX^ sudah, ^jj^ dbis and J^ Idlu^ all signifying «< past
or done,'' as J\ Jj y\ j\ <0j telah ada atau balAm nda has been or is not
yet ; jyjj ^ 4^j dit/a telah ber4dyer he has sailed ; Ij^ ^j^, JS kqml
iudah menang we have won ; ^y a^ ^^ burong sudah terbang the
bird has flown ; ^J,j^ ^\jb mx^ ^j1 orang sudah dbis ber-karja the men
hiive done working; jjy JH ^U Tc^ ttba-tiba mdsuk Idlu ddduk
suddenly entered and then sat down.
The same words are also employed in the formation of participles of
the past, as ^Ja^ ^sIj telah sampei arrived ; ^ telah or ci^U «jui sudah
mdii dead ; ^ i^ telah pdkei worn ; JS ^dJ ^i ^^^^ f^un tang telah Idlu
the past year, or, year that has elapsed : and where the sense is decidedly
passive.
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 69
• passive, with the intervention of the particle y ter^ as 9>!/ **Xu •j u^
derham tang sudah ter-bmng the money that i^as thrown away, <i^
\^J ^Ju. j-j %j^ bangkci orang tang sudah ta^^gantong the body of a
man who has been hanged ; ^^p&J ^U uuol i^^j riimah ttu abis-lah
ter-panggang the house was burned down ; ^^j ^^U dbis ter-makan
eaten up.
The time imperfectly or indefinitely past is usually expressed without
a modal, by prefixing the indefinite particle j de^ as ^jy^ j de suruh-nia
he ordered ; ^\^,} 43 de per-budt-nia he performed ; u^jyfj ^^/^ j de
tangkap-nia pen-churi he seized the thief ; J^^ jL» djj^ ,^^Ji *3 de
parang' kan-nia ulik segala pahluwan he was attacked by all the warriors,
or, all the warriors attacked him ; ^j ^j\ Jl^ j de dangar ulih raja it
was heard by the king, or, the king heard ; in which latter examples it
will be perceived that a passive form is given to the verb, although the
tense is active, by the preposition ^j\ ulih ; as in Latin, factum est a
T£ is used for ru pecisti* The imperfect is also sometimes denoted
simply by annexing the particle 4) lah^ as ^ji ^y ^ ^j A^J clC« 7naka
pergulah raja ka-pada tuan putrt and the king went to the princess ;
4--j^ ^f^\ ttu-pun ber^nianyi-lah thereupon sang.
The means of expressing in this language a simple future tense are
extremely defective, the modals or adverbs, and auxiliary verbs employed
for this purpose (like ^^ will" and " shall" in English, the former of
f?^. which includes the idea of volition and the latter of compulsion) being
words which possess independent significations, not always strictly com*
patible with the use made of them to denote simple futurity of time.
The auxiliaries chiefly used in conversation are jU mdu will, intend, ^y
bulih may, will» ^^;^ nanti wait, as ^y ^U U;^^^ amba man pulang I
T am
70 A GRAMMAR OF THE
am about to return ; jjjf jU ^j diya mail ttdor he will, or, is going t^
fall asleep ; c^y jU jU ^^J diya tiada mail tui^t he will not follow ;
jl^ i^ C;^v*ji> idjj i«//A tf mifl singgah kaldk I shall call presently ; u.^
w»b ^..vijb 7zan/2 amba ddtang I shall coikie ; i^^j^ JL* cux; 7)^m/i segrd
sumboh shall presently be restored to health.
Those used in writing and in correct discourse, are jjcJb andak will^
intend (but which more commonly denotes a conditional or qualified
imperative) ^ akan to, and the indefinite particle o de^ which forms an
^ori&t of the future as well as of the past, as ^W J^c^ j^l «di joi^ andak^
lah angkau meniata^kan nama^mu will you, or do you intend to make
known your name ? uu^|^ jjja ^^j rfi^tf andak ber^ngkat he intends
to set out; Jij} ^ ^y JIG< apa-kala tiian akan ber^ldyer when will you,
or, are you to sail ? ^^j^ ^U» ^b jfl j^J^ garuda akan daiang me'
niarang negrl the griffin will come, or, is coming td ravage the country ;
jCj ^ <xlll Ju^\ a jU ^^rftf rf^ ampun allah akan dikau God will not
ii^ ^ ^j fjSJL 4> ij<^ nischdya desiksa raja ahurt
king will certainly punish that murderer»
Inflexions of the Tranntwe FerK
^W jabat to touch op handle»
Imperative Mood»
ct-o W jabat touch.
Jl\ \^i^}^ jabat angkau or jCcl AJ:^ jabai4ah aiigkau track thou.
^U J 4lijcJ^ andak'lah dejabat-nia let him touclu
■f
Indkative
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 71
Indicative Mood.
Present Tense.
. •
» ••
ilf\ aku jabaty uujUi* men-jabat, or ^^Ucu men-jabat^km I
touch.
Kz^}^ jCfif angkau men^jabat thou touchest,. Sec
{j:^\a^ i^j diya men-jabat he toucheth.
c::^Ucu ^\^ kamJ inen^jabat we touch.
ks^lsi* ^\ angkau men-jabat ye touch.
jj^ T^wri^ 7m men-jabat they touch;
Past Tense..
jW 4j c/t a^2< telahjabat I have touched.
jU «dJ ^ angkau telahjabat ihon hvksi touched»
jU ^ ^j diya telah jabat he huth touched.
;V ^ \j^ kdmt telah jabot- we have touched^; Sec»
•1
Indefinitely Past Tense,
^U- J dejabat-nia he touched.
4^ J ^\ v^^U- 4> de jabat uUh diya it was touched by him, or, he touched.
Future Tense.
jU jU c/1 ^^ m^i^ ja^J/, cr^Wu jjcjb c/1 tf ^2^ dfn^£ mai-jabat,
^U c^ 4l^ 6tt///e aku jabat, c/1 ds^U' J^^e ja6a/ aku T will or shall
touch.
ir^U jjcjb jCf^ angkau andak jabat ^ Sec. thou wilt touch.
^ «/J i/iya akan jabat, Sec. he will, or, is to touch..
• f
yt A GRAMMAR OF THE
jU ^ ^^ kaml akanjabaij Sec. we will, or, are to touch.
Conditional Mood.
^laeU i^d Cj^jeka diya men-jabat if he touches.
u-^lfli« ^^^ ij^ sopaya harm men-jabat that we may touch.
wX»j^ c:;Jb dapat marik'ttu men-jdbat should they, or
provided they should touch.
Infinitive Mood.
umUsU tnen-jSbat or ^^UU men-jabat-kan to touch.
Participles»
Of the Present.
u:^U C^^ /^^2 jabat or ci^U j c^^ lagi de jabat touching, still
touching, or, continuing to touch.
JjMi^ sambil, c^ sertaj or iis^lacu 4^];.«i ^erJya men-jabat touching»
or, whilst touching.
k::^U j1 ada jabat is touching.
Of the Past.
yuoW 4]j telah jabat, uu;U j ^ju.» ^2/(/aA de jabat having touched.
Of the Passive Past
kt^\>'J) ter-jabat touched, uu;W j «rd ^^^S" ^^ ^^^^' ^^o was touched.
^ ^ Jan^ tflah^ or, u;^Ujj i(Jw» 5U(/tfA ter-jabat that hath been
touched.
Gerund*
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 73
■
Gerund.
jilJ jj tang ka-jabat-dn^ or ^J^J ber-ka-jabat-^n that is to be
touched.
Verbal Nouns.
l:u;Uc(S pen-jabat one who touches, handles, or who holds an employ-
ment
{J^J p^^'jf^bat'on and ^U^ ka-jabat-an what is touched or handled;
an employment or office.
^y iolong to assist.
Imperative Mood.
y^ tolong assist.
a\^ ^y /?/(?n^ kamu assist thou.
^y J <idjjcjb andak^ah de tolong-nia let him assist.
4^j ^ ^ji J <d;jcjh andak'lak de tolong akan diya let him be assisted,
or, let assistance be given to him.
Indxcaiive Mood.
Present Tense,
yy ^^vUh amba tolong^ or ^y^ mtnolong I assist.
^l^i^ aI^ A^amu menolong thou assistest.
y^ 4^ (/lyiz menolong or ^y^ menolong^kan he assisteth.
^j:m« ^\^ ^am7 menolong we assist.
jjy^ ^^^\i kam'orang menolong ye assist
^J^fjl^j dVorang menolong they assist
U Pa«t
74 A GRAMMAR OF THE
Past Tense.
^y ^Ow» L^j^^AJb amba sudah tolong I have assisted.
^y «Ju4 a\^ A-^mu sudah tolong thou hast assisted.
gJy «Ju» 4^j ^/lydr ^i/flf/z/t tolong he hath assisted.
^y «ju.1 ^\^ ^amJ 52/</tf/i f^/on^ we have assisted, tec.
Indefinitely Past Tense..
^y (> c/i^ tolong^nia he assisted.
Future Tense.
amba mauj jjjjb ^Tz^f^^, aSy 6i!/i/r, ^y ^ a^an tolong^ or
^Jy^ menolong, I will or shall assist, l^^^iji) ^ o u^ n^n/i £/e tolong
amba I will assist or am going to assist,
^^ jjcj^l%\^ kdmu andak menolong^ Sec. you will assist.
^y^ ^^ ^d diya akan mpnolong he will, or is to assist.
y^ c^ Lf"^ A^m? flf^fl/i menolong we will assist.
t?^ u^ L^.?^^ l^^^^'orang akan menolong ye will assist.
tly^ u/^ L^-H** di'di^ang akan menolong they will assist, or are to
assist.
Conditional Mbod*
l^^ u^^«4jb CSx^jeka amba menolong if I assist.
^y^ (^j tJJi» sopaya diya menolong that he may assist.
y^ v/*^ ^'*^ rf^pfl/ ^awJ menolong should we, or provided we
should assist.
lil/tnitive
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 75
Infinitive Mood.
yyu» menoUmg, J^y^ menolong-kan, or ^J>^ memlong-i to assist.
^^ ^y tolong^menolong to assist mutually.
Participles.
Of the Present
^y C^'i lagi idlong^ or y^ j c/S /agi i/e f^/on^; assisting.
^}.;j^ sambilf c:^ ^er/a, or ^J^ i^l^ seraya mmolong assisting, or,
whilst assisting.
^ j1 ^flfa /^/ra^ is assisting.
or the Past
^jj J 2rjLrf ^£/aA ife /?/(^n^ having assisted.
Of the Passive Past.
jJyy ter-tdlong assisted.
^l^ ix^ ^ tang sudah ter^tolong that hath been assisted.
Oerund.
^jc^ j-j Jang ka-tolong-ani or ^jc^j» ber-ka-tolong^n that is to be
assisted.
Verbal Nouns.
tj^ penolong one who assisteth.
JipJ per^olong-an and ^jb^ ka^tolmg^an assistance.
.f*U
76 A GRAMMAR OF THE
^U saniun to rob.
Imperative, Mood.
^U samun rob.
jCv^L» samun- kau rob thou.
^A^U J ^Jjjb andak'lah de samun-nia let him rob.
Indicative Mood.
< .
Present Tense.
^L u^%4Jb tfm6/z samuni or ^L« meniamun I rob.
^L« a\^ A*^mu meniamun thou robbest.
ttr*V* s^*^ ^'^^ meniamun he robbeth.
iir*V* L5^^ ^<3J77iF meniamun we rob, 8cc.
Past Tense.
^L <dJ ^-%4Jb amba telah samun I have robbed.
^L ^ a1^ X:amu telah samun thou hast robbed
^U ««X»» 4^i> i^f^a ^aA samun he hath robbed, 8cc,
Indefinitely Past Tense.
^i^L de samun^nidht robbed.
Future Tense.
jU Ci^^vUh am^a mai!, j«xjb andak, ^L« ^ a^tfn meniamun I will or
shall rob.
^L« jjcjb aI^ kamu andak meniamun you will rob.
cr*V* tt^ s^*^ ^^y^ ^^^^ meniamun he will rob, Sec.
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 77
Conditional Mood.
^j^ i.^^vijb CSt^jeka amba meniamun if I rob.
cT^V* l5^^ ^^ sopdya kdmt meniamun that we may rob.
^L« \jy^^ ^\j ddpat hdm'orang meniamun should ye, or, provided
you do rob.
Infinitive Mood.
^L« meniamun to rob.
Participles.
Of the Present
^L df) Idgi sdmun or ^U o c^ Idgi de samun robbing or con-
tinuing to rob.
J.fA^ sambil, cl^ serta^ or ^^^^ ^\j^ serdya meniamun robbing, or
whilst robbing.
^L» j\ ada sdmun is robbing.
Of the Past.
^jLk J «Jbrf sudah de sdmun having robbed.
Of the Passive Past.
^ly ter-sdmun robbed.
^Lij «ju» ^ tang sudah ter-sdmun that hath been robbed.
Oerund.
^y^ 2:i tang korsamunran^ or ^^ji ber^ka-tamHnran that is to be
robbed.
78 A GRAMMAR OF THE
Verbal Nouns.
^Lj peniamun a robber.
^U^ per-sdmun one who has been robbed.
^^y^ ka-samiinHm robbery.
Inflexions of the Intransitive Verb.
jSJ ttdor to sleep.
Imperative Mood.
jOu? ttdor sleep.
M^ 4jXj ttdor4ah kamu sleep thou, or go thou to sleep.
^«xJ J ^jcjb andak^ah de ttdor^nia let him sleep.
Indicative Mood.
Present Tense.
jjw 4^j diya ttdor or jxJj ber-ttdor he sleepeth.
Past Tense.
jd>J as^ c/l (iku sudah ttdor I have slept.
jjuJ «Ju^ ylet angkau sudah ttdor thou hast slept
jjuf »«u ^<«\^ A:amJ sudah ttdor we have slept.
Indefinitely Past Tense,
^juf J (/e ttdor^ma he slept.
Future Tense*
jU 4^ aku mail or jju? jjcjb m^i^ail: ;u;2t?r I shall sleep, or, an gcmig
to tdeep. ylfit
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. y^
jaJ j^Xk^ /1\ arigkau andak fidor thou wilt sleep, or, art going to
sleep.
jV J^ 4^v) diya akan tido?- he will sleep, or, is going to sleep.
Conditional Mood.
jSJj) 4^ J il^jeka diya ber-tldar if he sleeps.
j-V ^^*^ L^i^ sopaya kamt ttdor oXjSJj ber-ttdor that we may sleep.
j*V \j^ csJb dapat kdnCorang tidor should ye, or, provided ye
should sleep.
Infinitive Mood.
jXJjTber^tidor to sleep.
Participles.
Of the Present
jJlJ ch lagi ttdor sleeping.
Jf^ sambilj cl^ serta^ otjSJj ^^|^ sa^aya ber-tldor sleeping, or,
whilst sleeping.
jJlJ jt tf ^/tf ttdor is sleeping.
Of the Past.
jJlJ 2r«u 52/(i^A /F^r or jJlJ 4; /e&zA /?6?(?r having slept.
Of the Passive Past.
We cannot look for this participle as belonging to an intransitive verb,
but inasmuch as the generality of these verbs may be rendered transitive,
and from ^xJ 6dor to sleep, may be formed J^jA^u men^ttdar-kan to
put
8o A GRAMMAR OF THE
put to sleep, BO we may have the passive participles jsJJ» teMidor put
to sleep, and jJuy «Ju» ^ tang sudah ter^^tidor that hath been put to
sleep.
Gerund»
UJ3*^ ti ^^S kd'tidoTf'^T^ or ^^^^ JcJ^ ber^ka-tiddr-an that is to go
to sleep.
Verbal Nouns.
jXjiij pai'ttdor a sleeper, sluggard.
UJH"^} P^r-t^ddr-an a sleeping place, bed.
^jAs^ ka-tidor^an sleep, the act of sleeping»
J\>^jalan to walk.
Imperative.
J[>.jalan walk.
JS 4UU jdlan-lah hamu walk thou.
^U o AlJjcjb andak'lah dejalan-nia let him walk,
Indicative Mood.
Present Tense.
^U i^^^'AJb ambajalan or ^U^ ber-jalan I walk.
^U^ L5^^ ^amJ ber-jaUm we walk.
Past Tense.
^U jbU f}i kamu sudah jaUm thou hast walked.
«
t^jHl
t>
MALAYAN LANGUAGfi. tt
JUpj dJ ijy^ di'drang telah ber-jdlan (hey have walked.
Indefinitely Past Time.
^U J dejalan-nia he walked.
Future Tense.
jU Ci^^vUh tfm6tf 7nii2, jjcjb ^ni/a^, ^U^ ^ a^n ber-jalan I shall
wsilk.
c^^vUh JU i3 c/e yi/^n tf mia I shall walk.
^U^ ^ rji^*^ tam^orang akan b^-jalan ye will walk.
Conditional Mood»
Jf^j f^^ «1^ J^^ *5mM ber-jalan if you walk.
^U^ 4^4> ^^ sopdya diya ber-jdlan that he may walk.
JU^ cy^^\^ Ls^b i/ij^^t kdm'drang ber^jalan should ye, or, provided
you should walk.
Infimtioe Mood,
J^j ber^alan to walk. (Transitively) 4^1acu men-jalan-i to cause
to walk.
Participles^
Of the Present
JU ilTl lagtjalan walking..
iU^ J^^i.^ sambil ber-jalan walking, or, whilst walking.
JU of niib jalan is walking.
Of
8a
A GRAMMAR OF THE
Of the Past,
JU ifXa sudahjalan or J\>j> ^ telah ber-JdUm having walked.
Gerund.
jiiJ ^ tang ka-jaldn-an, or ^h^j ber-kajaldn-an that, or, who is
to walk.
t^erhal Nouns»
J\asSi pen-jdlan a walker.
^1>^ per-jalan-an a journey or march.
^lj^ ka-jalan^^n the act of walking.
In the foregoing scheme of inflexions, certain words expressive of
tune, condition, volition, and other circumstances of acticxi and suffering,
have, in imitatirm of the English and French grammars, been employed
in framing the moods and tenses of the verb, though in strictness they
should rather be considered as co-efficient members of the sentence to
^hich they belong, united to the verb in constniction, but neither con-
stituting a part of it, nor influencing its form ; those changes alone which
result from the aj>plicatian of inseparable particles (the origin perhaps
of the moods, tenses, and persons of the Greek and Latin verb») being*
properly the inflexions of the word
Some further account of the manner of employing these verbal par-
ticles (with the exception of the transitives and intransitives, already
sufficiently explained) may be here given with advantage to the learner.
J ter being prefixed to the verb denotes the passive pardciplei as
JSyj ter-'pukul struck, ji\j taSlah conquered, ^^j ter-iuUf written ;
having the force of the Latin adjunct -Tirs, as in *< ama-tus, doc-tus,
lec^tus
MALAYAN LANGUAGE.
83
lec-tus (for leg-tua), fac-tus, audi-tus." Though usually applied to the
simple form of the verb, it is sometimes found united in (he same
derivative word with } per (which will presently be explained) and the
intensitive A lah. When preceding^ j!>fr, the j r of the former of the
two particles is dropped, euphonije gratia, as %JL-Jj tc-per-sayang com-
passionated, ^\ iUiljij ^^L. j^ yrfU JO pada masa tang vidna le-per-anak'
lah iya at the time when he was bom.
When the passive participle is followed by the directive ij,l iilih by
or through, the sense becomes active, as ^j\ u^fJ^J CX. tnalia ter-lial
uii/i'Ttia now there was seen by him, or, he saw.
J per is prefixed to verbs transitive, and when employed in the forma-
tion of verbal nouns, denotes an active sense. In the former situation it
sppears to express a continuity of the action, and sometimes an intensity,
but its specific use is not very obvious, and it seems to be rather con-
ducive to the elegance ihan essential to the meaniug of the words, as in
the following examplf» : ^j^^J J «pi^ s?>^ mantrt sakali-an dc
ptT-jamu-jamu-nia he feasted all the ministers of state; jj,j ^i^ijj^ j
^3 tuf ti>lj- de pcr-ganti-ganll-ma deri-pada sualu Ita-pada lain handed
it back and forward from the one lo the other ; ^)^ ^^^Vy i^'j '-H--
tiapa dapat per-baik-l negi'i who can improve tlic condition of the
country ? ti^"U f^^^J^^j>J per-tHnjuk-kan tang patut to point out what i«
right ; JLi ^ J^j-^ "^ J-^ andak de pe-sata-kan dangan niat (the
■cticm) ought to be accompanied with intention ; ^Ixo |*_^Ly o ^J^ dan
de persangai-nia mudah-nia and he carries to excess his liberality;
*-j- (iiV J^ ^ t*;^;y ** ''^ per-iilik-nia ttu dangan baniak susah he
obtained that with much trouble ; ^ J\ \j^ J^s} pcr-xvakll-kan
s'orang akan ganu-nia to commission a person to act in his stead ; ^^ji
84
A GRAMMAR OF THE
tiAJl ^jiJJb jjafc djii karna kakanda andak be-per-isiri-kan anakda for
it is my wish to provide a wife for my child.
J de. This Indefinite particle answers in some measure to the English
infinitive particle " to," as well as to the auxiliaries " do, doth, did,
may, will, shall," and in its applicadon to both the past and the future
partakes of the nature of the Greek aorist, as will appear in the following
examples adapted to each of those significations, viz.
•i de to. ^J^ji J iOjooa lLC« maka andak-lah de buang-kan he ought
to throw away ; tjuj j tlC* nmka de randang you are to fry it, or, it is
to be fried ; tjjl ^^U j jU j^. tang tiada de Ttidkan oratig which mea
are not to eat, or, which is not to be eaten ; j»,lCo jj ^^ j ^l>- Jj
dan jdrigan de palii-nia pada muka-nia and he is not to strike her on
the face ;
J'V
,\a ^ ia7ig lidrus de iertawd-kan which is of a
i^jiA j-i
nature to be laughed at ; ,^jl a ts-Jb jU jy. lang liada dapat de itbah-
kan which it is impracticable to alter;
•)^}i-
Ji fjij J ^jtXa-Jangan de
banting amat kuin itu you are not to beat that cloth ton much -, j-U^j jU
^\) tidda de ter'bilang bdniak-nia their numbers are not to' be counted.
J de do, doth, did. ^^^ j de per-lambaC-nia he delays, doth, or
did delay ; \jji lyiU; j de iangkap-nia orang he seized or did seize the
man ; ^jj J\ "^^ ^^ J i-^jeka de gdgah orang akan diya if men do
compel him ; ^osi >^J^ \^ *' J*^ i:^..j^ •" W^-*^ tl/lU3 t,j! J— SI flpa-
bila orang laki-luki rnemandang pada htri-nia dan de pandang istri
ka'padd-nia when a man looketh at Ids wife, and his wife doth look at
him ; j*f-j^ J w**to cj^ ^^Ij ^y o t-^^a amba de pUkul-nia dan aria
omba de rampas-nia me he struck, or, did strike, and my goods he
plundered ; ^ j ^ ^ji cJ^/ '^ *^^ J^^*^ ^^ g^gur-kan kudd-nia akan
dijfa if his horse do throw him,
<ide
MALAYAN LANGUAGE.
85
J de may. \j ajjj j ^\ ^\L> sopaya iya de bunuh raja that the king
may put htm to death ; ^^i J CS^ 7naka dc per-ulik-nia that he may
obtain; 41 ^jS^t*- j \j\ bdrang de sampd-kan allah niuy God cause it
to arrive.
J de will,' shall, ^^j ^ 41 ,jXi *^V^ nischaya de siksa allah
akan diya God will certainly punish hhn ; yjj ^\ 1. i,l j jLj /wrfa
(ff ampun raja akan dtkau the king will not pardon thee.
When this particle, being prefixed to the verb, is placed in a state oF
contrast or antithesis to the same verb with the transitive or intran-
sitive prefix, it conveys a passive sense, as jiJ j ij Aj J\ .-.^ i_j tang
menllik dan tang de lilik he who favours and he who is favoured ; V
(ju^jS J »_i Jj '^ji'y to^g ber-biiat dan tang de per-buat he who acts,
and he who is acted upon, agent and patient ; i^ yl ^ -«.• i^, tijU C/~
ijj J jeA^a ma/f tang memri alait tang de bri if either the giver or he to
whom it was given, be dead.
When the verb to which it is prefixed is followed by the directive
(i!jl ulih by or through, it likewise assumes a passive form, although the
sense is active, as —\j *Ijl jcJ J 4— j se-telak de dan'^ar ttlih raja as soon
as it was heard by the king, or, the king had heard ; c^U j *lijifc tlSU
io-. ^ *Ui- .Jjl maka andak-lah de parang illih khalifah akan
viarik'ttu war ought to be waged by the kbalif, or, the khalif ought to
wage war against those people.
The particle however is not essential to this passive form, for they
say, in the impeiative mood, *IS ^jl tijjj biiat uUh kanm be it done by
tb£e, for, do thou.
When it is preceded by ^ dangan with, j^s^j deri-pada from, and
Gome other directives, it causes the verb to assume the character of a
Z participial
86 A GRAMMAR OF THE
participial noun, as ^^j o ^ jU ^ c^U barang tang jadi darigan de
diris any (grain) produced by irrigation ; ^A,Ue» j ^ dangan de sakaja*
nia with deugn» purposely ; JU^ ^i^ j ^ dangan de kesad^kan-nia
kambali with the intention of returning ; ^^j <\ cuJUb ^ %jj\ (ju^ o «4;*^
deri'pada de Hat orang tang kalat akan diya from being seen by men
who are not related to her; Jj^«3^\^ karnadejual for the purpose
of selling or of sale.
A peculiar change in the construction attends the employment of this
particle, viz. that the pronoun personal or other ^ent is made uni-
formly to follow the verb, and the suEiject generally to precede it and
^e particle, as ^j ijj^ j u-.4#«Jb CJ^ jeka amba de suruh r^a if the
king should order me ; ^^ ^Jlo j jsJ ^^ kulU^nia ttdak de makmt
hen his skin the iron would not penetrate.
The ibllowing sentence containing examples of several forms or in-
flexions of the verb, may serve to exercise the learner in the ap[^cation
of some of the foregoing rules : o alJjcJb i^S< ^^ ^ Jl^ys? u^y ^^
b- 4^ ^j^ ^^ J^^ JJJ J^ ^ ^y* (J'^ ^^ h l> ^y> J^^^-
lau terbitfajar tatkala iya makan maka andak-lah de buang-kan^nis
barang tang ada de-dalam mulut-nia sopaya jdngan ier-parhn niakan^
an tlu kame£an deri-pada siang if the dawn should appear while he is
eating, he ought to throw away whatever is in his mouth, that the vio
tuals may not be swallowed after day-light ; (at the commencement of
a fast).
uiDVEBBS
\
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 87
AnvERBs or Mobals.
Adverbs are words employed to modify the action of Terbs and the
qualities of nouns, denoting the circumstances of time, place, cooditioo,
degree, tec. under which they appear in a sentence.
That all adverbs and other indeclinable words, as they are termed,
have gradually been formed from other parts of speech, has been ably
shewn by an acute grammarian of the present day, and his theory, if it
wanted support, would receive it amply from an analysis of the modals
of this language, there being few instances in which their derivation
from verbs, adjectives, or nouns (particularly the two former) is not
more or less apparent. At the same time it may be suggested, that
whatever they were in their original state, having gone through the
stages of corruption and reproduction, their nature is no longer the
same, and having assumed new and useful functions, it would be unfair
to exclude them from ranking next in order to those more impcnrtant
9pcc\t% of words whose origin does not admit of being so distinctly
traced.
It has become a practice, though perhaps an unnecessary one, be»
cause encroaching on the province of a dictionary, to enumerate in gram-
mars all the adverbs (as well as other indeclinables) that are fomid in a
language. In the Malayan this cannot be done with any precision^
their numbers, from the facility of their derivation, being almost unli-
mited ; but those in most current use shall be given under three general
heads, as adverbt of Ume, of place, and miscellaneoos» instead of
branching them into a more detailed variety^
Advcrbi
88
A GRAMMAR OF THE
Adverbs of Time.
cjlC sakarangj ^^ k'tni now, ^^j\^ tddi just now, very lately,
idJ telaK *J^ sudah past, Jjjbj daiilu formerly, jl^ A-flf/^^, LihjiXf^ se-^
bantar lagi presently, C^y»-jugaj f^jm still, Jj ^^/t^m not yet, ^^^
kamedtan afterwards, cju» sedang, ^l^ selang whilst, ^\j^ seraya at
once, then, ^ pemah^ ajj pewtf/r ever, vlS^ maka ere, cjl^ kadang^
J^j\i barang'kali sometimes, cJM pagi to-morrow, JIG\ apa-kala^
J-J\ apa-btla^ J^ pabtla, ^Ub bila-mdna when, at what time, JlCir
tatkala^ CS^:i^ se-kattka then, at the time when, ^^^J^ kala-ktan so
often as.
\-
^jMj sini here, cji-w- «ft/, ^^U sana there, ^^U m^n^z where, nj^jduh
far off, ts-^j «f^^/zf , Ju^ ampir nigh, 2j^l «rfl A about, ^^U man, 4^U^
ka-^mari hither, Ji lalu past, j-asCL. se-panjang along, ^^1 ato^ above,
ifjU boKcah below, jjl /i^^r out, Jb dalam in, ^ sa-bldh on one side,
c^ sabrang over, beyond. The six latter are employed as directives
or prepositions also.
MiscettaneoiiSm
^^ bagtni, ^^^Xm^ demektan thus, in this manner, (juJj bagttu so,
in that manner, ^^UJo bagUmdna how, in what manner, .^.L or ^\^ sdja^
^yr j^g(^% yr J^ ^^^y» et^L ^a7?J^flf very, J5I^ ier-ldlu extremely,
lA^ amat too, ^^ mdkin the more, ^\ an^flfr rather, W zya yes, jjlJ
ttdak. no^ ^Jy bukan it is not, ^J^^jangan do not, 4/f-' rdschaya cer-
tainly, Jfly ter^utama especially, j|i 6fl/ta;a whereas.
A more
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 89
A more useful distinction of adverbs arises from the manner of their
formation, and they may accordingly be considered, with the exception
of those whose origin cannot now be traced, under the following classes,
viz.
Words belonging to other parts of speech adverbially employed with-
out any change in their fortn ; as jjU baik well (properly, good), jji\i
baniak very (properly, many), lU lebih more, J^ bhdru newly, J-J1 irpfl-
btla JlCSl apa-kala when (properly, what time).
Words rendered adverbial by duplication; as fi»^ tiba-tiba acci-
dentally (from v-.^ iiba to arrive), ft^j^ churuchuri by stealth (from
^J^ c/mn to steal), Tu^ ganti-ganti by turns, interchangeably (from
u^ ganti to change), r Jj^ mula-mula at first (from Jj^ mula the
beginning), f^ dua-dua by twos, two and two, T^U masing-masing
separately, individually (from ^t asivg separate), Tcj^ garang^garang
loudly, vociferously (from cj\^ garang loud). In this way the adverb
is more conunonly formed from verbs than from adjectives, because the
duplication of the latter is sometimes employed to denote an excess of
the quality or sort of superlative deg^ree, as r^ besdr^besdr very great
Adverbs produced by the application of particles to words belonging
to other parts of speech, and especially to adjectives. The particles
thus used are ^ se and j ber prefixed and ^^ -an annexed. By the
first of these, which is the most regular adverbial sign, the same effect is
produced as by adding the syllable /y to English adjectives, as j,^ se-^
bcnar truly, from j^ benar true, J:^^ scrbetul righdy, s^X^ se-ganap
completely^ ^L* $e4ain differently, ^\^ se-baniak as many as, ^L* se-
lima as long as, \J^ se^bdrang whatsoever. It is also applied to nouns
and verbs, as CS^^oLb H^kattka whilst, from \^SgS katlia point of time,
A a JiJL
90
A GRAMMAR OF THE
jJjcam» se-peninggal since, subsequently to, from j2ju iirCggal to leave,
f 4)^ se'bulih'bulih by all possible means, from ^j} bulih can, t%j/^
se-korang-korang at the least, from ^^ korang to want, ^1;-» se-rasa as
if, like as, from ^|^ ra^a feeling, tact, ^L» se-ldku thus, so, from ^ Uku
manner, conduct; if the two latter examples should not rather be sa^rasa
and $a*laku^ and the particle be supposed a contraction of aL sama
together, alike, or of «^L satu one, as is more evident in the word c.^
sa*rupa alike, or, having one and the same appearance.
Adverbs made by prefixing this particle ^ se are not uncommonly
put into the possessive form by annexing the personal pronoun ^ nia
(see p. 49), as ^y\i^ se-patut-nia properly, ^a^JIJL^ se-swigguh-nia
truly, and by the pliability of this language become a sort of adverbial
nouns, as ^ylL» ^^ dangan se-patut^nia according to propriety, Aj
^^jLim» dangan se^sungguh^nia with truth, or, in good earnest. Future
instances will occur of this ccmversion of one part of speech into an*
other.
J 6er, which is in common the sign of the intransitive verb, is also
employed adverbially, as J^^ ber-^mula (but more usually J^.«;-m» se-ber^
mula) at first, f^yj ber-turut-turut consecutively, Tts^^ ber-ganti--
ganti interchangeably.
^J ^an^ which is employed in the formation of verbal nouns (see
p* 33) is also sometimes annexed to various words in forming adverbs,
as ^Lc iambah^an mortovtv^ from i^ tambah to add; ^Jfzx^ mudah-
mudah-an possibly, perhaps, from 20« mudah easy, Jt^jMjj ber-pantas-
pantas^an expertly, adroitly, from ^jMj pantas quick, expert; ^^'Ui-^L^
. ber'Sama^sama^an together, in company, from aL sama together, alil;e«
But this last derivative word assumes also (without the duplication) the
character
MALAYAN LANGUAGE 91
chamcter of a noun, as ^\yiijsj\ fjl^j c\ uX>. jeka add ber^amoran
antara ka-dud-nia if there be an equality between thenii Jij ^^l^ ^'U^
cs^^^JL ber^sama^an bliaya dan salamat^ji equality of dai^er and safety.
Many adverbs are subject to degrees of comparison like adjectives, as
if^U. 4J lebih jauh farther off, yj[ j!j^ j^ uf^^ ^J^^J^y^ u^)^ *^ ^^
daulu^kan siiddra bapa perampuan deri-pada sudara ibu the brother of
the wife's father (may see her) preferably to the brother of her mother.
Prepositions or Hirkctivjejs.
Prepositions, so called from their usually preceding the words to
which they are related in the sentence, may in respect of their employ-
ment (which is that of pointing out the direction of movement to or from
an object, or the coincidence of position with it), be termed directives.
Not admitting of discretional formation from other parts of speech, like
the adverb, their number is more definite, and they may without incon*
venience be detailed, though not precisely, as some of them partake so
much of an adverbial signification as to render their class doubtful.
It may be proper in the first place to particularise certain prepositions
of very general use, which are commonly emplcyyed in composition or in
conjunction with other prepositions, with adverbs, or particles. These
are,
J ife at, in, on ; as ^^ ^ d de kaki gunang at the foot of the
mountains ; (^^ j3U <> de balik bukit at the back of the hills ; ^juS J
c^ de pantei lout at or on the sea-beach.
When connected with other prepoutions it modifies their signification
and serves to form new prepositions, which are likewise formed by its
junction with adveiiit and some other wordsi as j^ j de^bawah beneath,
9^
A GRAMMAR OF THE
^^*j deltas above, upoQt ^Ijj^j de*adajHin before, in front of, ^SLa
de^lakang behind, Jb <> de-dHam within, j^ j de4uar without, outside
of, e^ 4> de^abrang on the other side of (a river). But when joined
with adverb», 4he gense of the compound word is often adverbial, as ^^U j
dc'fnanayfhttet ^^i^ de^tni here, ^L»«> de^sana 2nd ^jl.,^ t^ de-situ there.
cS ka to, unto, coalesces with the word to which it is prefixed, as
^U^ ka^a^ar to the bazar, jk^ ka-ttmor to the east, ^\si ka-tdman to
the garden. In the same manner as the foregoing it is connected with
other prepositions and with ndverbs, and follows similar rules, as ^L^
ka^atas up to, to the top 6f, ujU^ ka^bawah U> the bottom of (implying
the motion or direction upwards and downw^ds), ^ljL^ ka-^dap^an to
the fronts into the pi'esence of. So also when cbnnected with adverbs,
the sehse cofnmonly becomes adverbial, as ^U^ ka-fndna whither, ^L^
ka^sana thither, 8cc.
jj deri from, does not coalesce with the words to which it has im»
mediate relation, as c:^ ^ dai Idut from the sea, Jji^ ji> deri ulu from
the interior country, unless when united with adveribs of place, in order
to form now modals and directives, as ^\ jj deri-atas from above or
upon, ir^lijj deri'bawah from beneath, j^jO derirluar from without, jO
^U deriniana from whence, J^j^ derUsana from thence; which in
pronunciation seem to be compound words, though it must be remarked
that the J r being in itself an unconnected letter, we cannot readily ascer-
tain whether a syllable ending therewith does or does not coalesce in
writing with that which follows. The same observation applies to the
preposition de^ which is also an unconnected letter, but as a syllable
it may be inferred to coalesce from the compound word being sometimes
(Chough not correctly) written ^l^ dirata$ aa well as i^t^j de-atas^
The
MALAYAN LANGUAGE/ 93.
The two foregoing prepositions cJ ka to, and jj den from, when
placed before nouns or verbs, are commonly associated with another
peculiar preposition, jj pada^ which appears however to be expletive and
not to alter the signification, as <Ujj ji^ ka-pada riimah to the house,
jA ^ ^ ka-pada tept ayer to the water's edge, ls^ jjjJ deri-pada
langit from the sky, ls^^ v-^^f-» ^j^ deri-pada sebdb Itu from that cause,
^^jSb iL-jUU j5,j deri'pada meng^abis-kan arta-nia from having con-
sumed his property. It is more particularly employed in forming the
comparative degree of adjectives and adverbs, as A j5;j «life iLj\ int-
lah tiriggi deri-pada lain this is higher than the other ; J^j j5^j J^
uu^\ daiilu deri-pada zeman tiu earlier than than period ; jj,j d^U ^jA»
^y^j Vj^j— » *-»-5u^ ^^^k mati deri-pada tdup s'drang din better to die than-
live a solitary life. When used as a separate preposition it signifies to,*
at, for (but never from), as u:^^ ^jXo *xS pada mdsa Jtu at that time;
^L>. j5 jii laik pada jabat-an-nia suitable to his employment ; j5 ^\^
s^j^ ^liU kwasa pada meng-alah-kan negri able to conquer, or, to
the conquest of the country ; ^\>' ^}^ j2l> *xS ^ balanja pada segald
art hajl money for the expence of every day's pilgrimage. It is also
frequently introduced between the verb and the noun in its objective
and even in its subjective sense, where in our language a preposition
would not be thought necessary, as c/ji ^y tolong pada-ku assist me ;
c:^>-Jo^ j^ iLJt^ ampurii'lah pada marik^ttu pardon those people ; ^
4H j5 Jiiemuji pada allah to praise God.
^ 5«, which appears to be a contraction either of ^U sama together,
alike, or of cjL satu one, is employed only in composition and then
conveys a signification of union or unity, as ^L^ sa^ndma namesake,
^IC sa-kdwan in company, conjointly, jjo^' sa-ka-andak of one mind,
B.b J\C
94 A GRAMMAR OF THE
JIC sa^kdli at once, \mJ^j^ sa-rupa having similar appearance. The
words thus compounded become adverbsi and in some instances it is
difficult to distinguish this contnyction from the adverbial particle ^ se^
before noticed.
^j\ ulih by, per (Lat.) is peculiarly used in changing the form of the
verb from active to passive, as A\ cj»^ buat ulih-mu be it done by thee,
for, do thou ; c::^t Jij ^f\ J^Ji J de ambel ulih raja ttu there was taken
by the king, for, the king took.
The other most common prepositions are as follows, viz. ^ akan to,
for, (1^ bagi to, unto, Jb ddlam in, ^\ atas on, 2^1 arah towards, nigh
to, JS Idlu^ ii^ lampoh, ^ lepas past, yj^ koKling around, ^j trusj
^^^ lintas through, ^.Jisb ingga^ ^b ddtang^ ^^yU^ sampei unto, as far
as, jAJb ampir^ u-^j dekat nigh to, ^^ sabrang beyond, ^^ dangan
with, jbt antdra between, ^o demi by, v^;;:^ ganti insteadof, ^^51 Idtvan
in oppojsition to, ^b bdlik on the other side of, behind, jjj kadar about,
circiter, U^ semd or ^^ sema to, unto, at. An ambiguity attends this
last preposition^ which is familiarly used in Sumatra before the objective
case, as j,% e>y U^ jV bdwa senid tiian kdmu carry to your master; but it
does not often occur in writing, and when it does, seems to be identified
with ^L sdma together or along with, as in ^U. ^ ^L ^ j^jekalau
pada sdma tangah jdlan if at or about the middle of the road.
The words *jU bdwah under, jj) liiar out, ^----j w J, beside, by the
side, 4J(Lri sU'-bldh on one side, and some others, do not acquire the force
of prepositions unless when in connection with j ^, cl/ ka, or jj i/m,
as ^j\)d de-bdwah beneath, ^jjj de-luar without, ^i^j deMdkang
behind, ^^ j de-sa-bldh on one side of, ^l^ ka-dtas to the top of, up
to^jjj^ deii4uar from out.
Conjunctives.
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 95
Conjunctives.
Conjunctives are employed to denote the connexion in sense between
words not immediately dependant upon each other in construction, and
between different clauses or members of the same sentence.
Instead of the customary distinctions of copulatives, disjunctives, dis-
cretives, adversatives, causals, exceptives, and other classes almost as
numerous as the individual words arranged under them, but which do
not appear to answer any purpose of grammar, they may be summarily
divided into direct and indirect conjunctives» according to their respective
properties.
The direct conjunctives are ^t j dan .and, and f\ atau or, which serve
to unite two or more words standing in equal relation, or parts of. a
sentence grammatically independant of each other, as J|y ^tj 4/j^
mata-ari dan bulan sun and moon ; ^jA yl ^j^\ amas atau perak gold
or silver ; JU ^\ ^ smig atau malam day or night ; ^^j ^b jib um^
J^ K£^s^ mint a baniak dan tertma sedtkit saja to ask for much and
receive a little only. It may be remarked that the preposition Ij
dangan with, is often used indifferently for ^b dan^ ^ji^^/^jj^t
ariggor dangan ayer wine with water, for, wine and water.
All other conjunctives may be considered as indirect, connecting words
in unequal relation, and parts of sentences between which a contingent
dependance is inferred, ^ Ji}i ^ ^ sedang kalau hoik sufficient if
good ; c^^^^jb %\^ f^yf^p f,\i t^^ jiV V*^ ^^^ nanti amba bayer utang
kamu kalau chukup wang amba I shall pay your debt if (or provided
that) my money be sufficient ; \jy^ ^ji J^ J^ ijLSk\j fii ^\m^
jangan
g6 A GRAMMAR OF THE
jangan kdmu ber-angkat meleinkan dangan kawan s^orang do not set
out on your journey unless with a companion!
' The indirect conjunctives may be enumerated as follows, viz. il^
jekUy ^ jekalaUj ^ kalau and j/i kalau if, J^ sopaya^ ^\ agar that,
in order that, for, ^/i-U meleinkan unless, l\a2 tetaph J^^ wellakin but^
howbeit, yet, ^ hania but, excepting, but only, CJy>-jiigai ^i«^ al^o,
still, only, -U or ^ saja only, Jy pUla also, ^51 lagi yet, still, ^}y^Jf^
se-ber-rnula in the first place, ^ bahwa whereas, Jy ciiJI Idgi-pUla, Jid^
sahadan^ ^} arkiyan^ ^W tamhdhan moreover, farther,' ^jju Jdni that
is to say, ^^ ka-tdu-i to wit, ^^^ kalaktan whenever, so often as, Ju^*^
sambilj j-U selang whilst, ^\j^ serdya then, at the same time, withal, ^U
maU whether, ^U mdsa what though, ^\^ gardngan, Ai}\ antah for-
sooth ? an ? nonne ? J^b tdgal^ ^Ji kdrna^ «^^..-«-» sebdb because.
Whatever may have been the origin of the two direct- conjunctives,
which from their obvious use must have occurred very early in the
progress of language, little doubt can exist that the others (as well as
adverbs and prepositions] were originally nouns or verbs, or phrases
. which for the sake of brevity m utterance have been contracted ; as
already noticed in treating of the adverb. Thus the word ^JjJ^ /we-
leinkan unless, is properly a verb signifying " to change," and that verb
is a derivative from ^J Idtn^ an adjective signifying " other, different."
It is not uncommon to employ together, without any apparent advan-
tage to the sense^ two conjunctives, each of the same meaning. This
happens more particularly where one of the synonimous words is bor-
vowed from the Arabic, as ^J^Ji\ agar sopdya in order that, ^,^^,-^ ^J^
kdrna sebdb because, Jy ^^^j^ sahaddn jmla moreover.
■
y Interjections
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 97
Interjections or Exclamations.
Interjections are sudden expressions of feeling, for the roost put
unconnected with other words in discourse. Not unfrequently, how-
evtVj they are found in the same relation to nouns and personals as in
other languages, where they are considered as signs of the vocative case,
as 4UI b ya illahi O God ! CS^y U ya tmn-ku O my Lord! And in
some instances, as will be seen in the following enumeration, the excla-
mation itself consists of more than one word.
\l ya or ia 0\ (invocation and intreaty) ; y\ ayu oh ! (affection) ; xj)
adoh^ ^y^ adoh't oh I alas ! (pain, grief) ; ^ Iiei oh I alas ! (grief^
as cl/j^ ^ /lei pada-ku woe is me !) ; xj weh alas ! ^ hei or ^^ hait y»1
ahu or ahau ho ! (callii^) ; ^ niahj uu^ inchit away ! out ! 4^ chih
or cheh fye ! ^^\^ tvaiy aJ^ karam or ^ karam woe to thee ! (threaten-
ing) ; 4)^ wallahi by God! (This and most other imprecations are
borrowed from the Arabs), jib Jbaik^ ^L^ sabas well ! good ! ^j^ '
paliasy J:Ji^ jarCgaii'kan far be it! forbid it! ^U say an g^ ^^ kasian
'tis pity ! alas ! a!\il apa-lafh o!/ kira-nia^ ^J 4)Ut apa-lah kira^nia^ ^JHj^
garang-an prithee ! nay ! (solicitation).
Particles.
Although the application of most of the inseparable particles em-
ployed in the formation of derivative words, has been already shewn *
when treating of those words to which they respectively attach, yet as
some of them still remain unexplained, and their importance in the
structure of the language ^ves them a claim to be considered as a part
of speech, they shall be here cdlected in one point of view, with the
G c distil
r»«i'i f
9» A <:^IIAMMAR OF TH&
distinction only of particles prefixed and particles annexed. In order
to avoid unnecessaty tcfj^tltidns^ k will be sufficient, in the instances of
these ahready expt^ned, to refer to the places where the samples ifill
be found.
Particles Prefixed.
: J bet is employed as th^ sign of the mtransitive veih (p. 56), and also
in the forination of aciyectives from nouns (p. 38), and of adverbs (p^
90).
^ 'meKi ^ ^^71^9 A nie (being modiEcations of tlie same partide) are
ettiployed as the signs of the transitive verb (p. 52). . ^
iJp^^^P^9 (^ P^^i ^pt (bfeii^ modificatiom in like manner,
of the 4»une' particle) ate employed in forming derivative nouns, which,
cesnmonly eipre^s the agent or instrument (p. 34).
y petf i)i pel are also used in the formation of derivative nouns, which
"sigliufy for the most part thi actiim or the place, and partake of the
intransitive and pasuve,'a8 the former particles do of the transitive quality
^f Verbs (p, 34),
J ter is the sign of the passive (iarticii^ in verbs (p. 61)« and of th^^
superlative degree in adjectives (p. 38).
J de expresses the indefinite time in verbs (p. 69), and is also a
prcpositibn (p. 9i].
i^ ka is eini^oyed in the formation of verbal and other derivative
nouns, which take at the same time the annexed particle ^ an (p% 33)*
When prefixed to numerals it expresses the ordinal (p. 41) ; and it is
also an inseparable preposition (p. 92).
'4& /^ -asm prefix taenis to faeoniy a contrtatbn of the adverb 4IJ
< . telah
MALAYAN LANGUAGE.
99
tdak past or done, and is applied to express the past time in verbs and
participles, as ^^\^ lah-abis expended, ^^1 ^^ <tl lah giigur anak-nia
she has miscarried. The form is however colloquial, and rarely, if ever,
occurs in correct writing.
^ se is employed to give an adverbial sense to words, whether pri-
mitive or derivative, in any other part of speech, as ^^yi*- se-benar-nia
truly, fromjij benar true ; ,^j\^ se-hariis-nia properly, from ^^Jj, harus
proper; r^^U_ se-mdna-tnana any where, wherever, from ^U mand
where; J^«^ se~ber-mula iu the first place, from Jmj ber-milla to
commence. There is also a particle written ^ sa and U sa, which is a
contraction from c^U satit one, and of aL> sarna alike, as ^ta sa^ldpU
single, from ^S lapis fold ; JUL, sa-kdli at once, from JK kdia time ;
^'U sa-dti with one accord, from cM* ati the heart.
It may be remarked that in these preBxed particles the supplementary
vowel i^fai-hah is pronounced as a short e and not as an a, excepting
in the instances of cJ ka and A lah, and in a few words implying tides
of office, where *j la pronounced pangt as J^ pang-idu a superin-
tendant, and not as in^^^i^Ju pmg-lbur a comforter.
Particles Annexed.
^ kan is a sign of the verb transitive, and is usually annexed where
the particle ^ men or « meng is or might be prefixed (p. 52).
,c t is employed in the same manner, and lias the same transitive
power as the preceding particle {p. 52}.
^ an belongs to the formation of verbal and other derivative nouns, to
which the pardcle c/ifl or jS per is commonly prefixed (p. 33).
A lah, if it be not merely expletive, may be considered as giving deter-
mination
IOC
A GRAMMAR OF THE
muiation to the word to which it is annexed, and be called an inteQsitive\
particle, as ^\ inulah this (which I point to), Aij^ mart-lah come !
^iA{ batk'lah ^tiswell! ^(Ux^ mdah-lah cease! there is enough.
4 hah is an interrogative particle that may be annexed to words in any
part of speech that become the subject of a question, as iS^j raja^kah
is it the king ? ^jS putih-kah is it white ? ^\ itu-kah is it that ? y\
^H atau latnrkah or another? cJ\ iilfjj J jJoib dsj\ antah andak de
bunoh-nia^kah aku I know not whether it be his intention to kill me».
^S tah is likewise an interrogative» and seems not to differ in its appli-
cation from the preceding partide, as tiMSu mengapa-iah wherefore?
^jL^ ka-mana-tah whither ?
^ niaj cJhuj M mUj f kau^ although already described as contracted
personal pronouns, yet being annexed in the manner of other inseparable
particles, and producing in common with them a prosodial effect to be
hereafter described, are included in this enumeration.
^j3 pun is annexed indifferently to words in all the parts of speech,
seeming to be generally expletive and to serve only for giving roundness
to the phrase, as dC» ^yi^^ kamupun suka we are pleased ; ^^ ^^
jjlJ ^jJ JU jjlJ siang pun ttdak malam pun tidak it was not day,
neither was it night ; jU i^^\y^ CJ^ maka suaiu-pun tidda but there
was npt one ; «t ^ ^^ ,Ji iya pun tang iau he it is who knoweth.
Adverbs are formed in a few instances by the addition of this particle, as
^Joj\ ttu-pun thereupon ; ^j^l laghpun moreover. It does not appear
to affect the prosodial quantity, and therefore, although frequently con-
pected in writing with the preceding .word, it may be douked whether it
should in strictness be considered as an annexed particle.
oj nda is ap addition to words expressive of relationship, in the
, courtly
MALAYAN LANGUAGE, toi
courtly style, in order to distinguish them from the ordinary appellationsi
and is, in a grammatical view redundant, as jcl^I dyanda for 4^) ayah
father ; jjl)) anaianda, and sometimes ojlit anakda^ for jj\ anak child ;
jji^ kakanda for d/l^ kdka elder brother ; jj jt adenda for j>j\ flrfiife
younger brother or sister, or, figuratively, lover and mistress, as in the
Canticles, " my sister, my beloved !"
The changes that take place in the consonants of primitive words
upon prefixing particles, and which seem chiefly designed to prevent a
harsh concurrence of sounds, have already been explained in treating of
the verb and verbal noun^ but those which, upon annexing particles,
affect the place and length of the vowels, are more properly the subject
of prosody and will be found tinder that head. Their regular adjustment
serves, more than any other criterion, to distinguish the degree of correct^
ness in writing the language.
Of Syntax.
Having treated of words individually and the classes to which they
are referable, we come now to speak of their construction in sentences,
or that part of grammar called Syntax, and by the Arabians and Malays
^ nahu or ygr 1& Mmu nakui.
The characterisdc of the Malayan construction is simplicity, the
woids assuming in general that order which we may conceive to belong
to the natural course of ideas. The rules of syntax must therefore be
few, and where there are no inflexions, no changes of termination to
denote case, gender, or number, there cannot be concords, in the sense of
the Latin gnunmarians. The connexion of the words with each other
18 ascertained partly from their own nature, wA P^X &om their relative
D d pofftiqUf
loa A GRAMMAR OF' THE
position, which answers the ends of regimen ; and consequently there
can be no arbitrary dislocations to exercise skill in collecting the scattered
members of a sentence.
The necessity also for going into much detail in this place is dimi-
nished in consequence of most of those rules havii^ been already noticed
in treating of the different parts of speech to which they have reference.
For the purpose, however, of bringing them into one point ofview, they
shall be here repeated with as much brevity as possible.
The nominative case, or noun or pronoun denoting the agent, in ge-
neral construction precedes the verb, and the noun or other word which
is the subject of the action or the object to or from which it is directed,
generally follows the verb, as cua^ ^Jio j/ kilda mdkan rumput a horse
eats grass, ^U 2f\; ^^j diya tdu jalan he knows the road, utJlcl;; Jij
^ 4/^ raja ber-angkat ka-negi^t the king proceeds to the city, ^^y ^^
i^s^ji^ ujan turun deri langit rain descends from the sky.
But under certain circumstances, as when the verb is preceded by the
indefinite particle j de^ the word denoting the agent is made ta follow,
and the subject to precede the particle and verb, as ^^ Jhjj o 4«^^4jb ^^
kabun amba de rusak gajah my plantation the elephants have ruined,
jd]1 ^jjj^ J ^Lj dosa-nia de siksa allah God punished his crimes.
In the interrogative form of the indicative the agent may either pre-
cede or follow the verb, as m% ^b ^^U^ deri-mana datang kamu from
whence come you ? c^J ^y J^ ka-viana tuan pergi whither are you
going ? In the subjunctive or conditional, as in the indicative or assertive
mood, the agent Usually precedes, as ^b jU ^y cK»* jeka tua7i maii
datang if you chuse to come ; yet by an allowable inversion it sometimes
follows, as 4(^yc ufj^ji 4,^ sapaya ber^cherrei inusuh that the enemy may
disperse. In
MALAYAN LANGUAGE 103
In the imperative the agent almost ever follows the verb, as j^\ ^b
bangun4ah angkau awake thou, ^ cJ\^ 'ijy^^ danger kam'orang
kata^ku mi hear ye these my words ! It is likewise not uncommon in
grave discourse to separate the personal pronoun from its immediate
connexion with the verb, by introducing the preposition <tSj\ tilih by, per,
as A\ LU^ kata ulih-mu be it said by thee, for, ^' say thou.'' The agent
is found however in some instances to precede the imperative, especially
where the command is circumstantial, as m^ c-)U ^j ^^j ^J\ \^^ ^Ji^
dan kanrpandang akan diya dangan vidta att^mu and do thou look
stedfastly to Him with the eyes of thy heart. The imperative may also
be employed without any pronoun or other agent being expressed, as
^^^^ai--»yy pulang se-bantar mi return this instant; ^ jj^ diidui
makan sit down, eat.
In the passive, which is properly a participial form of the verb (as in
English], the noun of suffering commonly precedes the participle, and
seems in strictness to be a nominative case to the verb substantive under-
stood, as cJ^^ ^^Jt\P <-r^^ amba ter^ajar ulih guru^ku I am taught
by my religious instructor, where ^!y j\ K^^^^Mb amba ada ter^ajar would
be the more regular, though less usual mode of expression* The noun
of action in this form is separated from any immediate connexion with
the verb, by the intervention of the prepositions ^j\ ulih or j^ deri-pada
by or from, as in Latin ^* per magistrum meum,*' or ^< ^ magistro meo."
But the noun of suffering may also be made to follow the participle, and
the noun of action, with its prepositions, to go before, as jJ^j ^3} ^^
4,^^^4jb ulih gurH'ku ter^jar amba.
The noun, in simple construction, precedes and is ixnmediately fol-
lowed fay its qualitive, as J^ ^ji arang babal an ignorant person, tjl»
104 A GRAMMAR OF THE
^^ padang luwas an extensive plain ; but they may also be separated
by the definite article or pronoun ^ tangj as Jjj ^ cj j1 orang tang
babal a person who is ignorant, ^jSSu ^ csJui kilat tang tarigkas sharp
lightning, 6r, lightning that is sharp or quick, j^J ^ ^U- jdlan tang
l^bar 2L wide road ; by which the existence of the quality is more strongly
expressed than if the pronoun were omitted. Under some circumstances
the qualitive may be placed before the noun, particularly when it is the
emphatic word of the sentence or subject of the assertion, as .t^ «^U^
hesar malegei raja great is the king's palace, c^^^ub aU. j^b batk nama
amba good is my reputation; in which expressions the verb substantive
'C^ dda is understood, and would^ without the inversion, have the effect of
detaching the qualitive from its noun. But if the sentence be analysed
we shall find that it easily resolves itself into the general rule, for with-
out an ellipsis it would be ^}A} aU c^ (.i^^vUb aU nama amba ada noma balk
my reputation is a good reputation.
The qualitive of a noun understood may in like manner precede the
noun expressed, as c^U ci.^ sakit ati sick (at) heart ; where the person
to whom the word sakit applies is the noun understood ; ^ isJu c:;^
buta mala sa^bldh blind (of) an eye ; ^Uj^ uu^l lambat ha^atang-an
slow (in) coming; ^^ ^ htna> budimem (of) intellect ; or thus with
an intervening preposition ; ^U J\ «u^ takut akan manuka afraid of
'mankind (the name of the sensitive plant or mimosa) ; ^j^ ^j^ j;jU
mdbuk dangan minum^an drunk with liquor; ^L«^ j5^ uX-* suka
deri'pada ka-mendng-an joyful from victory.
Numerals (which it has been thought right to distinguish from adjec-
tives or qualitives) usually precede the noun, as Jjy J\ anam bulan six
months, c^^ sJ\ uuijii i^ tujuh pangkat api naria the «even stages
or
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 105
or gradations of hell-fire. It is not uncommon to make them follow the
noun, as (juJUt ^jj burong ampat four birds, ^\ja i^lembu sa^ratus
an hundred oxen, jj u^ rumah dua two houses ; but in this situation
the terms ^t tkur^ if^ bualij or others equivalent, are understood to follow
and connect themselves with the numerals, according to a peculiar idiom
already described in treating of that class of words. In imitation of
numerals, with which they are so nearly allied, adjectives of multitude
generally precede the noun, as y\i ^^ JiL, segala puhn kayu every
timber-tree, ^tj^ %jji j;j\i bdniak orang ia-datdng-an many persons are
coming; but they may indifierently be made to follow. The ordinal
numbers should always follow the noun, as «l^^ «^jU art ka^tga^ or,
still better with the article, cJ^ ^^ 4^jU an tang ka-tiga the third day,
yii i^Jjb art ka^ua the second day ; for if otherwise placed, ^J^ CSrS
ka'tiga art would be understood to ugnify '^ the three days,*" and i^J^y^
ka^ua art ^^ both days.'*
When two nouns stand together without an intervening verb, the for-
mer is generally to be understood as the subject of possessioo, and the
latter as the possessor, which in Latin would appear in the genitive or
possessive case, as ^\j jcj bmda raja the treasures of the kii^, or, the
king s treasures, ^.s^ ^^^^ ka^tinggt^^m HfQit the height of the heavens,
Lfj\f>^ H^^ chaya mata^^ri the brightness of the sun. In such com-
binations as ^j^\ ^jW chawan amas a vessel of gold, c^b c:^ kota batu
a fortress of stone, ^ \Sf tukang bm a worker of iron, c^))l ^ tkan
laut sea-fish, ^ ^j rajajin a king of deuKHis, ^^ yj benOa china the
country of China, jU 4OI; tdnah jdwa the land of Java, although posses-
sbn is not strictly implied, the latter words would equally appear as
genitives in languages admitting of the disUoctioa of cases» Certain
£ e nouns
io6 A GRAMMAR OF THE
nouns may, however, stand in connexion with proper names and titles,
without partaking of any possessive sense, as ^^jsS ^y tOan putri the.
princess, a^^ \^ nabi muhammed the prophet Mahomet, jjcX-i^ ^j
raja iskander the king Alexander ; and synonimous words standing for
the same object must of course be excepted ; such as j\:Jj ^^^ j^y^ utan
rimba belantarCj which signify a waste tract of country overrun with
woods ; ^^ f^jj tirei kalambu the curtams (of a sleeping apartment).
A verb in the infinitive mood immediately following a noun, ' partakes
of the nature of a possessive noun, and becomes subject to the same
rules, as ^b jcJ tanda berahi a token of loving, ^U^ ^^j runiah ber*
main a house to play in, or, a play or gaming house.
When a pronoun personal directly follows the noun, whether annexed
or otherwise, simple possession is implied, being the ordinary mode of
expressing it, as y^^^j^ ^U tangan amba my hand, Ji u^j rumah kamu^
or in the contracted form, ^^ rumah-mu your house, ^t^ arta^nia his
effects, ^jH i^ bapa kamt our father*
When any one of the three contracted personal pronouns, cJku, m
mu, ^ nia is annexed to a verb, it changes its verbal quality to that of
a noun, as ^ ^MJL c^ ^y buat^lah seperti sangka-mu mi act con-
formably to this your opinion ; ^^ t^jj ^^ j\j tiada Idyik rupa pakei-^
nia the style of his dress is not becoming ; ^^\ c^ ^b c^ seperti
bayang jUga ada^nia like a mere shadow is his existence ; fjj^ oL?
is-^^ \j^ c^^ J<^ ^} tiada ka^tantH^n pergp-nia dan datang-nia orang
itu there is no certainty respecting the goings and comings of that man.
The natural order of words being so litde deranged in this language,
the occasion for any signs of agreement between the relative and its
antecedent is scarcely perceived, and their concord, like those already
described,
MALAYAN LANGUAGE, 107
described, is known only by position. The pronoun t^ tang^ when
employed as a relative, may be said generally to refer to the last preced-
ing noun, as ^^\^^ JjJ oU ^d u^j^. y^ A^ji y^ s^ \j^^ orang kaya atau
ber-Mmu atau budiman tang tiada layik per^iuat^an-nia men rich, or
learned, or wise, whose actions do not coiTCspond. Here its antecedent
is ojj\ orang men, from which it is separated by the intervening quali«
lives ; but most usually it is itself the next following word ; as f^yi^J {J^
i£j^ jTijui cSi ^yiJi ^ menolong pa-ampuan tang ampunia laki sudah
mati to assist a woman whose husband is dead.
The interrogative pronouns naturally precede the word which con^
stitutes the subject of inquiry, as m\^ c^f apa nama-mu what is thy
name ? the verb substantive jl ada is, being understood ; ^1 c^Ua siapa
ini who is this ? d^ jU (-Jt«i sidpa mdu pergi who chuses to go ? But
the interrogative may be preceded by words connected with it in signifi»
cation ; as u^t cJUi «^j^ negri siapa ttu whose city is that ? ^ c^ J^a
^ej^ gampar apa tang ku-^angar what clamour is it I hear ? Or with
an interrogative particle annexed, as (ju^\ iS\i\ jlp pulau apa^ah ttu what
island is that ? ^\ 4\SLa Jj\ anak siapa^kah ini whose child is this ?
Adverbs or modals as applied to modify the action of verbs, usually
follow them in construction, as t^J c^ kdta per-lahdn per^ldhdn
speak slowly ; j::,^^ ij:^ nanti sabantar wait awhile ; r j;>tj ^U^ nU ^\ iya
tau jnemrbdcha baik^^aik he knows how to read well ; JIC ^U ux^
sudah obis sakali entirely finished. But they may also precede the verb
and its nominative case, as 4/jU^ ^b 4^1 ^jXzi^ santtdsa iya datang ka^
mart continually he comes hither ; ^JU>^ um \JLt ^J^ b/iarH sakarang
beta sampei it is but just now that I arrived.
As applied to adjectives they«almo8t al?rays precede in regular con-
structiony
»o8 A GRAMMAR OF THE
struction, as ^b J)y ter-lalu bagus extremely handsome» c:uib\s cucU
sdffgai pait very bitter, c^UyUi^ ampir mati nearly* dead ; but an em»
phasis is sometimes given to the degree of quality, by letting the adverb
follow the adjective, as ui^L Jijj^, besdr ter^lalu sangat most eminently
iB^^^ i ij^ ^y c;^ ^^^ P^iif^ ^^^ cloth white indeed ; ut^v«l jib ^
Wang baniak amat too much money.
The variety of adverbs being unlimited, with many idiomatic anoma«
lies, there is much latitude in the modes of applying them to these as
well as to other purls of speech, the knowledge of which must be acquired
by practice in the language ; such for instance as c^t; aL soma rata on
a footing of equahty» ^JDU aU sama mdnusia fellow-man, ^\^ ^U ^
iaTig mana garang^n which, I pray thee ? jx3 i^\jif mer^apa tidak
why not? c^ c^ serta pergi to go together. The term l^ maha^
eminent or eminently (borrowed from the Sanskrit) is never used as a
distinct word, but- only in composition, as ^J^ mahd^sdr eminently
great, LUl^ mahd^multd^ or, more commonly, UUf« mahamulid moit
glorious. Thus also it is more usual, though less correct, to write ^\j^
mahardja than JJ^ mahd^rdja^
Prepositions or directives are, in their most regular and ordinary ap-
plicati(»i, placed after the verb and before the noun, serving to denote
the course of the action as it respects the object, either to it, from it, by
it, or in ^ny other imaginable direction ; as 4^j3 ji^ ^J\p^j ber-jdlan ka^
pada negrt to walk to the town ; c^t ^y t J\ ^y^ «> de suruk-nia aian
lUus-^n ttu he gave orders to the ambassadour ; cJ\Si ot ada padd^ku
there is to me, or I have ; ^^ jr^ u^l ^j «xi o\ ada pada rdja itu sa^^
buah negri there is to that king, or, to that king belongs a city; i^j^a^
jdl\ Ci^ A^ mem-bri hormot bagi allah to ^ve honour unto God ; j^
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 109
^jjI' ^jS ^^i} ka-luar dagang-an deri-pada gadong to take out goods
from the warehouse ; ^ ^l; jj,j ^^ meh'rima deri-pada tangan laki--
nia to receive from the hands of her husband; ^\s^\ J\^ ^^y^*^ de
masuk-nia ka-dalam astana he entered into the palace ; ^^jij jJ^^ ^j\^ *>
de per-arak^nia ber^koliling negri he proceeded in triumph round the
city ; ^^ 4ijt ^^>!/ "> ^^ ber^uat ulih waktl-^nia acted by his represen-
tative ; j^LS »j\ j^y terbang arali ka-saldtan to fly towards the south.
Such is the manner of employing prepositions in their plain signifi*
cations, directed to material or sensible objects ; but in the progress of
language they seem to have been transferred from thence and applied by
analogy to verbs and other subjects of the understanding, to which an
ideal locality is thereby attributed; as^ll^ ^ JJcJ»>4^t iya andak akan
b€r4aycr he intends to sail ; «^jc^ ^ ^^y j de turun-nia akan mandi
they went down to bathe ; ^\JJ jH «-S^lf^ ber-cfiakap akan per-katja^
an to shew an alacrity for work ; ^\ cJjc «xi^o uu^ takut deri-pada
marka allah afraid of the wrath of God ; ^IJ^ jjt^ ^^yjb^ ber-hend deru-
pada ber-parang to desist from fighting ; (^^^ j^ tf^J ter^harigang
deri^pada me^ltat astonished at seeing; jU ^b jtjbl antara ada dan
tiada between existmg and not existing ; ^|^ ^LU jUib ampir meng^ilang
Tuawi'^nia near to losing his life.
The two direct conjunctives, ^b dan and, and yt atau or^ must, as
their use requires, stand between the words or parts of the sentence
which they are intended to connect or to separate, as cjmS ^^b ^y burnt
dan langit earth and sky ; J^LS^ji ^^b f^ J^^ ^ makan dan mmum
dan bet'-suka'^uka^n to eat, and to drink, and to make merry; yljJuT^
C^U;) ber-tidor atau ber-jaga to sleep or to watch ; jxJj y\ *^y ^J4^
A\f mmgHilahrhm nrnuh atau ber^tmduk tcr-alah co conquer the
F, f enemy.
no A GRAMMAR OF THE
enemy, or to stoop to him, conquered. It may be proper to notice that
the conjunctive ^b being always pronounced short, although written
with a long vowel, is throughout this Grammar and Dictionary written
dan instead of dan.
Of the indirect conjunctives those which affect the verb in its condi*
tional mood always precede it, as ^|^ ^\^ ^JL^ sopaya kaml me^rasa
that we may feel ; ^Ji j JiJ^ tneleinkan de larunia unless he run
away ; ^L ^^^J>j^ {^^ ^i>^jekalau tuan mau ber^main saja if you mean
only to jest Many are employed chietiy to mark the commencement of
a paragraph, and are often written in inic of a different colour, as Jj^;--»
se-ber-mula in the first place, ^^ci\ ada^pun^ ^ bakwa whereas, ^^^t
lagirpiin^ J^ ^Lc tambdh-an pula, u^*H^ sahadan moreover, ^^ ka»
tau-i be it known, u:^\ jj^ ^^^iiU^ kamadtan derUpada itu furthermore,
subsequendy to that ; and when a different part of the subject is taken
up, ^'Ib^ «Ocu^y CiU maka ter-sebuUlah per^kata-an now it is related in
the story. Others mark the beginning of sentences, of which uX« maka
is by much the most frequent, occurring, indeed, either as an adverb or
a conjunctive, in almost every line, yet scarcely admitting of a transla-
tion. In the body of the sentence it may often be rendered by our
words " ere, before that," as ^b ^jjt ^ CJU yp j\ Jj %;^^ s'arang
baldm ada pulang maka lain orang daiang one person is scarcely gone
ere another arrives ; at the beginning, by ^^ now, but, and," or any other
expletive ; the employment of many of these redundant words serving
merely the purpose of distinguishmg the sentences and parts of sentences
from each other, in a langus^e to which our system of pointing is un*
known. Other conjunctives, as C^juga or jiia only, ^bt C^ j^g^
ada-nia thus, alone it is, affect prindpally the dose of periods, Md like-
the
MALAYAN LANGUAGE, m
the former are for the most part expletive. For the mode of applying
them properly or consistently with the received idioms, a moderate degree
of practice will avail more to the learner than many rules.
Interjections or impassioned exclamations are not, in any language,
considered as the subject of grammatical rules. In composition, how-
ever, which does not always represent the language of nature, they are
thrown in (as the name imports) with such discretion as to prevent them
from injuring, if they do not improve the construction of the sentence.
The most common among them precede nouns or personal pronouns, in
what would be termed the vocative case if these admitted of declensioD^
and they frequently stand unconnected with any verb or other words, u
<^l& ^ hei bapa-ku O my father ! CJjgj] m^ xvch ontong^ku alas, my fate !
^j^ \j^ '^ niah kam^orang sakali-an away, all of you ! Some follow
the interrogative pronouns, as J^ ^Sj lJ\ apa garang-an ka-andak^
mu what, prithee, is thy wish ? Many of them are imprecations of blest*
ing or cursing, and in imitation of the Arabian style, are connected with
the name of the Deity.
The foregoii^ observations apply chiefly to what grammarians c(»iider
as the first part of syntax, or that which relates to the agreement of
words, as the second does to their government This latter term implies
an influence possessed by the one word capaUe of obligii^ another to
confcnrm to it in certain particulars, such as person, gender, and number;
which conformity, in Latin and Gi'eek, is usually expressed by the ter*
minating syllable: but in a language where no influence of this kind
prevails, nor any change takes place in the verb or the adjective in
consequence of their connexion in sense with an antecedent nominatiTe
case or noon substantive^ it cannot be saidi with uitf practicai at useful
meaning.
112 - A GRAMMAR OF THE
meaning, that the one word governs or is governed by the other. The
second part of syntax therefore is not applicable to the nature and con-
struction of the Malayan language.
Of Dialects.
The general uniformity of the Malays written language has been
elsewhere noticed, but the oral tongue, both in respect to pronunciation
and the use of peculiar personal pronouns and other words, differs con-
siderably in different parts of the East-insular region. What relates
- therefore to dialect applies more especially to the latter, although the
former is not entirely exempt from variation in the orthography.
The most striking distinction of dialect is that of the mode in which
the short vowel (usually denoted hy fat-'hah) which terminates a great
proportion of the whole mass of words, is pronounced in different dis-
tricts. At Malacca^ Kedah^ Trarigganu^ and generally on the coasts
of the peninsula, it has the sound of n, as in the words ^.^u^ amba^ cl^^
kotdy (jJ\j rata, JU^ kapala, 4l^ jugdf whilst in the ancient kingdom of
Menatigkabau in Sumatra, as well as in the Malayan establishments
along the coasts of that island, and even in the interior districts of the
peninsula which acknowledge a political dependance on Menar^kabau
as the parent state (according to the interesting notice by Mr. Raffles,
in his paper on the Malaya nation published in his Asiatic Researches)
these words and others of the same description are made to terminate
with (?, and are pronounced ambo, koto^ rata, kapalo, jugo. But how-
ever the question of originality may be decided, the claim of superior
authority, arising from a more enlarged intercourse with the rest of the
world and consequent cultivation and refinement, must be allowed to the
dialect
MALAYAN LANGUAGE itj
dialect of Malacca ; and with regard to European philology, it has been
in a great measure fixed by many valuable publications under the sanc-
tion of the late Dutch East-India Company, whose servants had oppor-
tunities of perfecting their knowledge of the language at those places
where it is held to be spoken in the most correct idiom.
Other distinctions of dialect may be perceived in the following varia*
lions of orthography and pronunciation.
The change of ^ 5 into ^ ch and ^j^ as ^^ chuchi for ^^ siichi
dean, ^ji^ chtpak for j^aw ^pak to kick backwards ; of - j into ^ ch^
as Jj^ chiipul for Jj^ jiipul to befall, u-a^ kechap for «.^ kejap a
twinkling, ^^^^^ karchut for uua^ karjut an aquatic plant ; of c-i 6 intd
J w^ as fj^ chawang for ^U. clmbang a branch, (j:jj\^jawat for u^U»
jo^a/ to handle, r^ Idwa-lawa for Tc^^l Idba-laba a spider ; of ^^ 6
into M m, as ^j^ mi^AJ for ^jb^ ^ijf/a froth ; y^A^ tnambu for j^ bambu
arundo \ oS ul^ t into ^ n and m m, as ^^^ ntpis and ^^^JL« mipi> for
^jJui apis thin ; of (^ p into cj /, as Ji[^ /»)h^/ for J(^ /m^t// to strike ;
of i^ f final into 4^ p, as uJL^ ktlap for c:Jl^ H/^f lightning, u^U.
jaiwap for (j:j>J^jawat to receive in the hands; o£ cJ' g into d/ il (or
vice versa), as ^«i^ kunchang for ^^^ gunchang to agitate, «^ ^e//a
for d^ ketta a couch, ^^j^:! ^tmiJ for ^^oc^ ^tm^ a water-pot, djj 6^ J^i
for <^ Ad^} unto ; the introduction of ^ m or ^ n at the end of the
first syllable, as JLil^ gombala for Jll gobala a herdsman, ^U^ tamr
payan for ^Uj tapayan a large jar, p^ knntum for w/ ^/i^m a bud,
jui luntar forjj lutar to fling, ^^ Azmpii for ^^ lapis fold, ^^a4-i ^(7mj9Z
for ^U sSpi oxen, gr^-*^^ kamlnri for ^^^ *^Afri castrated, ^^aiJ' go-
mintar (ovjji gomitar to tremble, i^x<* muntah for ^ mOtah to vomit^
jatS Ami/iir for jB^ it^'iir a lance, ^s^^j^ mensiyu Sor jm^ mtsiyu gun*
G g powder,
114 A GRAMMAR OF THE
powder, ^-a^ junjong for ^^ JHfo^g to support, jp^ sunduk for
jj^ 5^26^2/^ a spoon. It must be observed, that in many of these latter
instances the word is more generally written with the inserted letter than
without it.
Amongst the words whose pronunciation varies whilst their ortho>*
graphy is fixed, we may enumerate ^^ lantas and lintas through, ^
lambing and limbing a spear, ^ lambong and limbang the flank, ^
lambei and limbei to beckon, ^i^ kambang and kumbang full blown as
a flower, ijay^ kanchap and kunchap an unblown flower, ^,4i>^ chamar
and fhumar foul, c:uJL lambut ^d lumbut soft, J:j;^ kantal and kUntal
mucilage, ^ ^e;i/z and X:e72nei hit, ^^ tt^or/ia and (by a vulggr transpo*
sition) runa colour, JU^ hormat and romat honour, i^Ji arti atid rerti
^neaning, cl^^] arta and retta effects.
As being in some measure connected with the subject of dialect, it
may not be thought irrelevant to notice in this place certain peculiarities
in the language, however difficult it may be to account for them satis-
factorily. The most obvious is that of the frequent, and as it may seem,
unnecessary use, in writing, of the harsh Arabic letter j in the ter-
mmatlon of indigenous words, which are, notwithstanding, coHunonly
pronounced (unless in formal recitation) with ^ soft vowel sound, as tundu
for jocJ tunduk to stoop, tabi for jiVf tabek compliments, buda for jjji
budak a youth, mabu for jjU fnabuk drunk, mSsu for j^U fnasuk to
enter, masa fcnr jj^ masak ripe, ana for ji\ anak child ; conformably
to the general smooth nature of the language ; for, with the exception of
this anomalous letter, it will be found that nineteen wor4s out of twenty
close either with a vowel, an aspirate, a nasal, or a liquid, and even
where a mute occurs in diat situation it is» in fiuniliar discourse, softened
» ^ ■»
inta
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 115
into a vofrel or aspirate, av-^ieh Tor ^.^1 a7nas gold, darek for oj}^
darat the shore, kreh for ^^ kras hard, kidah for t=J/ kulat a measure,
kuUk for uJj£ ^u/i'f skin or bark, sakih for u::.^ sdkit sick. If this
practice be a provincialism, it must be allowed that in the countries
where it prevails the people speak a softer dialect than where either
the mute letter or the hard guttural is retained in pronunciation.
The employment of the jj as a final letter, although it is not found
in any other part of a genuine Malayan word, we may presume from its
universality to be as ancient as the introduction of the Arabic character,
hut we have no direct proof of its existence in the oral language of the
Malays previously to that period. There are not wanting, however, some
glimpses of light to direct our opinion as to its originality, if not in this,
in some at least of its cognate tongues. Although not frequently occur-
ring in the Baita, Rgang, Ntas, or Lampung languages of Sumatra
and its neighbourhood, I find it to prevail in the dialects of the Phu
lippines, particularly the Pampanga (of which, as well as of the
Tagala, Bisaya, and Vloco, I possess copious dictionaries, both printed
and manuscript), and what is not a little remarkable, it is found also in
the dialect of the great East-Insular, or, as it has been termed, Polyne-
sian language, sjwken in the island of Madagascar, where, for in-
stance, the word ^1 aiiak child, is pronounced zanach, according to
Flacourt, and annacli, according to Drurv's verj- genuine vocabu-
lary ; j_U viasak to hoil, and also, ripe, is, in both these senses, massaci
jy tuak the sweet juice of certain palms, is toak ; ^j^ cliichak the
house-lizard, is isalsac ; ja:_ su}iduk a spoon, is sonrouc. These two
authorities (and they are quoted in preference to that of vocabularte»
formed in later times by persons conversant with the Malayan) may be
admitted
ii€ A GRAMMAR OF THE
admitted as suflScient evidence of very high antiquity in the use of this
termination, as it must have existed before the separation of the tribe
which emigrated to an island situated at the western extremity of the
Indian seas. Of its general prevalence in modern writing I am myself
competent to speak, having in my possession a voluminous collection of
the correspondence of two eminent merchants (Gapt. Francis Light and
Capt. James Scott) with the princes and chiefs (who, it is well known,
are themselves all traders) in almost every country where the Malayan
language is spoken.
Another peculiarity worthy of remark is an apparent disposition in
the language to employ words nearly resembling, although actually dif-
fering in sound, but having no grammatical relation as derivatives or
otherwise, to represent ideas closely connected with each other in signi-
fication. It is almost unnecessary to observe, that this is independant of
the sameness in common orthography which frequently appears between
words entirely remote in sense, and which should properly be, and some-
times are distinguished in writing by the application of supplementary
vowels and orthographical marks, such as ^^^ best iron and ^^ bisi
handsome ; ^jjj bintang a star, ^f^ bentang to spread, ^^ binting a
rampart, and ^ij bunting pregnant; ^^ bantun to pluck up, ^^
bantan the name of a city called Bantam, and ^^ bintan the name of
an island called Bintang ; ^Jlo makan to eat, and ^^ makin the more ;
<» ^ ^ . ^ ^
LL^^ buat or buwat to do, and «j:^^ buta blind ; Jy biilih can, may, idji
hulah the whole, and ^y buluh the bambu-cane. These, in fact, prove
nothing more than the inaptitude of the Arabian alphabet to express the
sounds of a foreign language ; for from that alone can arise any doubt
respecting the sense of the woids, their pronunciation being sufficiently
distinct ;
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 117
distinct ; but in the following enumeration we shall observe approxima*
tions so near as to become almost equivocal, both of sound and sense,
without any regard to the characters, whether Arabic or European, in
which they may be written. This must necessarily be (bund embarrass-
ing to the learner, but rather after he has made some progress in the
language, and is able to cope with difiSculties, than in the outset of hi&
study.
Amongst many more instances that present themselves in the Dictionary
it will be sufficient to point out some of the most striking ; as ^S layic to
fade, and^) layur to blast; ^^ golong to roll up, ^^ goling to roll
about ; uuXct angkat to lift, c^jCct angkut to carry on the back ; p^
jamti to feast, y^jumu satiated; «ub basoh to wash, ^^b basah wet; jSiS
iapak the palm of the hand, ju7 tapuk to slap ; jjci karidak a mistress,
harlot, Jmjc/ gtftidik a lawful concubme ; ^ konchi a lock, ^^ kafichirig
a button, clasp ; cs^l^ kabut a fog, ^l^ kabur and ^jj^ kabus dusk ; ^^
luluh mud, cuJ^ liiliU to daub ; ^)^ ular a snake, uJjji £Az/ ai worm ; 'i^j
rindang shady, ^ lindong shelter; ^^^j rfawn a leaf, ^b ifi/i^m a
bough; 4^ to^o/i or tuggoh stout, firm, u^ /tf^tf]9 stout, muscular;
{jlJ^ katt a hook, crook, Jj\^ ^aJ/ angling, Jj\^ cAc /ni/a ^^/ a fish-hook ;
^\} balik to turn, and ^b ^^^^ to make a return.
By persons superficially acquainted with the language, the difficulty
of accounting for these approximations will be resolved in a summary
way by supposing the one word to be a provincial corruption of the
other ; but I know them to exist in their separate meanings not only in
the same spoken dialect, but also in works quite unconnected with that
dialect, and where the indiscriminate employment of the one for the other
vould destroy the seme of the passages where they occur.
H h Of
ii8 A GRAMMAR OF THE
Of Prosody.
Prosody is that part qf grammar which treats of the accent and quan-
tity or measure of syllables, and of their due arrangement in forming
metrical composition^ or verse as distinguished from prose.
Of Quantity.
It will not be necessary here to enter into the question of the difference
or the identity of accent and quantity, which has divided the learned
world. With respect to the Malayan it is sufficient to observe, that long
syllables, or syllables containing a Icmg vowel, are generally, though not
always accented, especially in a final syllable ; that when the first sylla*
ble of a dissyllable or penultimate of a trisyllable is long, it is always
accented, as a}j; bunoh to Icill, c^ takut afiraid, Jlfii kapala the head ;
that when both syllables are long, the former only has a perceptible
accent, as ^ ma/i^ ashamed, 4^jU mar^ come, J|y^2/Jdeaf; that when
both syllables are short, an accent is in general g^ven to the first ; or, jt
may be said, that in all doubtful cases the accent inclines to the former
rather than to the latter syllaUe ; as cs^ Umbat slow, um^ ganti to
change, ^^ kanal to recoUecti but in certain words, as j^^ badr great,
^ kechil little, Jj baldm not yet, .a decided stress is laid upon the
laflL It must at the same time be observed, that the accent or syllabic
cmj^sis in Malayan words is for the most part much less strong than ip
the languages of Europe.
It has already been stated that when particles are annexed to primitive
woids in order to form derivatives, a prosodisd change takes place, the
long vowel beisg usually s uCTg es sfti M nodcf^ sboit m tb^ syllable tp
which
MALAYAN LANGUAGE.
which it belonged in the primitive, and a proportionate length of sound
given to the short vowel of the other syllable. The rules by which these
changes are governed being of importance to the due knowledge of the
most artificial and delicate part of the language, must here be detailed
with a minuteness which their utility alone caa excuse.
By long vowels we are to understand, in our acceptation of the term*,
the quiescent letters 1 a, j ii, and ^ t, and by their being rendered short
is meant that they give place to their corresponding short or supplemen-
tary vowels, /a/ -Afl/i, dammak, and kesrah, as will appear in some of the
examples hereafter given ; but as these people are in the habit (common
also to the Persians and Turks, and even to the Arabians themselves) of
neglecting to mark these supplementary characters in their writings, the
vowel is in fact altogether omitted, and the sound only must be under-
stood to remain in the pronunciation of the next preceding consonant.
From the authority of such books as appear to be written with the most
•kill and precision, these rules are compiled, and they would be mor^
perfect if the native writers were themselves more consistent with each
other.
The most general rule, but admitting of exceptions as will hereafter
appear, is, that upon annexing a particle, the long vowel in the first
syllable of the primitjve, if a dissyllable, or, if a trisyllable, in the pe-
nultimate (the situations where they usually occur), becomes short, and
the ^ort vowel (expressed or understood) in the second or last syllable
becomes long. Thus ^^ kuda a horse, when the contracted pronouns ^
nia, cJ ku-, or . mu are annexed in order to form the possessive, changes
the , for its corresponding short vowel dammah, \h.G fat-ftah for its cor-
req>9Dding long yowei 1, aitd becomes ^^ kudd-nia his horse, c^ji
kuda-ku.
120 A GRAMMAR OF THE
/ f
ktida-ku my horse, or JjiJ kudd-mu your horse ; in like manner ,^\>^jad(
to be, when J, kan or <s! lah are annexed, becomes ^s>-jadukan to
cause to be or happen, or i^j^ jadv-lah be thou ! c^b n/i/a evident,
with J? A-flW, becomes ^^^ niatd^kan to manifest ; ^ bini wife, with ^^
722^, becomes ^a^^ bint-nia his wife ; and thus also in trisyllables, ^j^
meniilsu to suck, upon annexing ^^ J, changes thcj of the original pe-
nultimate for dammahi the dammah of the last syllable for ^, and be-
cdmes ,^y.^ meniusu-J to suckle, and Jl^ kambdli hack again, upon
annexing the particle ^ kan becomes jC±.^ kambaU-kan to restore. In
Ihose complex derivatives which are formed by the successive applicaticm
of annexed particles, these particles themselves* are affected by the same
rule as the primitive and undergo a similar prosodial change. Thus
when to the verb cJy biika to open, with the indeBhite preBx j de^ - are
annexed the transitive particle ^ karij the pronoun ^ nia, and the in-
tensitive particle «d lah, the combination becomes <s!L;^ j de bukd-kan"
iiid'lah he opened it ; where ^ or (as ai medial) ^, being followed by
another particle, changes its short vowel for the \ quiescent, in the same
manner as the primitive word ; and so also, in a less complicated instance,
'^ kanal recollect, becomes ^UL^ j de kanaUnid^lak he recollected.
1/Vhen it happens that the first syllable of the primitive, if a dissyU
lable, or the penultimate, if a trisyllable, does not contain a long vowel,
that syllable remains unchanged ; but if iht last syllable also be shorty
the augment of quantity nevertheless takes plkce in it, as imm Si pada
to, IS formed ^^ ka-padd^nia unto him ; from ;j^yU-i sempoma perfect^
is formed ^'iJ^ii^ ka-semporitd-an perfection; from «^ tantu certain,
^y^i? W«f«-^fln to ascertain.
When the last syUable instead of beii^ pure, or coiasisting of a coQ*-
- • • sonant
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 121
sonant and a vowel (as in the foregoing examples), is impure or mixed,
consisting of a short vowel between two consonants of which the latter is
mute ; (or, as we should express it, more simply, when the word ends
with a consonant), that vowel, whether the preceding syllable be long or
short, does not become long in consequence of the annexing any particle
excepting ^ an and ^t^ as in the instances of J-j babal ignorant, which
forms ^ hahaUnia his ignorance; ^ henar true, ^^ benar-nia its
truth ; cjU sarong a scabbard, Jt^L sarang-mu thy scabbard ; dJu tangak
half, ^4^fcua sa^tangah-nia one half of it ; and c^y turut follow, which
forms ^jy turut'kan to follow ; yet under these circumstances, although
the latter syllable cannot become long, the former, if long, may be short*
ened, as ^L\ ulih by, per, becomes «^f ulih-mu by thee, per te ; ^jb^ tuhan
the Lord, becomes ^ tuhan^mu thy Lord; cJ^j dakap embrace, be-
comes ^ijJ^jj de dakap^unia he embraced. In this, however, the native
writers are not uniform^ and they appear to write indifferently «di^^
suruh'lah and «dftj^ suruh4ah give orders, ^\ 4:;^ sakii-lah iya and
4^1 4:JLi saktt'lah iya he was sick ; although the latter should not be
considered as correct.
By annexing the particles ^ an and 4^ 1, the last syllable of the word,
whether mixed or pure, that is, whether ending with a mute consonant
or with a vowel soud, becomes long ; it being understood, in the former
case, that the final consonant detaches itself from the mixed syllable,
leaving it therefore pure, and connects itself with the particle ; thus «^U
adap before, when ^ an is annexed, becomes ^Ijj^ adap^n the presence,
although if ^ kan were annexed, no change of quantity would take
place, and the word would be ^jU adap-kafi to appear before ; ^li
panas hot, becomes ^\Ji ka-panaS'^n heat ; j^ utor to arrange, becomes
122 A GRAMMAR OF THE
/o^
u>j/!/ per^tor'On arrangement; and wu^f^i^» sanibut receive, with ^ i
annexed, becomes i^j^A^a sambut-i to receive, as .^ hanal to recollect,
becomes ^l^ j de kaml-p-nia be recollected bim, wbicb witb ^ kan
would be ^^^:i\ii J i/e kanal-kan^nia. It must be observed, that when the
s)'Ilable preceding either of these two particles ends with the quiescent
letters t, j, or ^, the character {*)Jiamzahf equivalent to a short a^ should
be placed after such letter^ especially the \ ; or a (") teshdid maybe placed
over the j or 4^, which denotes their being repeated in the pronunciatioa;
c ^
as from aJS ^i/a to speak, ^\si kMa^cn speech.; fr0m («s^ tantu certain,
^'^ tantirl or ^^^^ tantuwi to ascertain ; from ^j* jn^i praise, ^^
pUJl^an worship, and ^^^ /)i(;l^F or _^ pujiyi to worship ; winch last
mode however is very unusual, and serves only to exemplify these elabo-
rate niceties.
When both syllables contain loqg vowels, the Gonnor is shortenec^
and the latter remains unchanged, as from j}U malu ashamed, is formed
^'jU^ ka^maluron shame ; from 4^4) dirt self, ^ dirl-mu thyfiielf .;
from i^jU mari hither, 4^j^ marulah come ! from jfU p^d to wear^
^\iS pakeUan appareL
When the word contains a short vowel in the former syllable, and a
long vowel in the latter, both syllables remain unchanged, being already
in the state adapted to receiving the particle, as j^JJU»* sampei-kan to
cause to arrive, from ^Ju^ sampei to arrive ; ^^^^^Li saktl-an power, from
.^vAtf sakti powerful (by supernatural means) ; ^^^ja i:^ de serbu-kim-nid
he rushed on, from ^^ serbu to rush ; ^Jjj^ mencherrcirkan to separate
^trans.) from ^^j^ cherrei to separate (intrans.].
Simple monosyllables consisting of two consonants with one inter-
mediate short vowel, should follow the rule given with respect to final
syllables
MALAYAN LANGUAGE.
isg
BjJlables so constituted, and become long only when ^^ or ^ we annexed ;
and ivhen the intermediate vowel is already long, it should so continue ;
but words of this description are rare in the language, and derivatives
from them scarcely, if ever, occur. It is necessary however to observe,
that there are many words which in our orthography have the appearance
of monosyllables, and seem to our organs to be bo pronounced, but which
are considered by the natives as being of two syllables. Amongst these
the most obvious are words commencing with a mute and a liquid, as jej
brt give, ^y prJ manner, tUjj brat heavy, ,_^ bras rice, t j£ Anng dry,
^jAf bias the decimal adjunct, Aj blah split, which might without impro*
piiety be written bh-J, herds, hĕring, bĕldh, and they accordingly follow
the rules of other dissyllables. So also the words jL mdil to will (some-
times written ybU mahu], t\i tau to know (written ^\i tahii), »^ pau the
thigh (written jrjtS pawah), are not considered as being of one syllable
only. It should at the same time be remarked that jt and i\a, when
upon annexing the possessive pronoun they undergo the prosodial change,
become ^ (sometimes ,>j^l') his knowledge, and A^ his thigh ; inxply-
ing that the latter syllable of the primitives should be written with
fat'hali and not dammah, as might otherwise be presumed.
When a particle is annexed to a word ending with the aspirate i h, k
is sometimes omitted, as Oj ..«.c mem-bida-kaH to discriminate, formed
from ii^ bidak to differ ; but it is oftener retained, as in ^1j-> suddk-^n
completion, from juw> sudah done ; ^f^S pilth-an choice, from AJ ptUh
to chuse. In the word i^Ib^I anugrdh-i he bestowed, the aspirate ii
made to take its place before, as in the other examples it follows the
assumed lung vowels. Although inaudible in pronunciation, it appears
to be considered as an efleclive letter in the application of these rules.
It
it4 A GRAMMAR OF THE
It remains now to notice those changes in the length of the vowd
which take place upon the duplication of a word (a practice common in
this language), and which may be either accompanied by the accession
of a particle or not. In those instances where a particle is aimexed, the
rules above explained apply to them as to single words, and accordingly
from ^y bunyi sound, is formed -^ ^*,^ bunyi-bunt/t-an musical instru-
ments ; from aL» se-lama as long as, ^uLl» se-ldma-lama-nia since the
earliest time ; from ^51 lain different, Ji^ ^Ij» ber-lain-ldin-an various.
To account for the repetition of the letter ^ in the second part of the
word, it must be observed that the fonner belongs to it in its primitive
state, and the latter is the long vowel which the last syllable requires
upon annexing the particle ^ an^ the \ in the first being at the same time
suppressed or changed for fat-hah ; as likewise in the word ^^^ ^i^-
nawong-i to shelter, from e ^U nawong shade, the latter j is the long
vowel required in consequence of annexing the particle ^^ t.
But an explanation of the change of vowels where a simple duplica*
tion takes place, without any particle being annexed, is by no means so
obvious. In the instances of ^Ljjj) ber-bagei-bagei diffuse, from ^\f
bagei distinction ; oi^ laki4aki male, from c/) laki husband ; jiJlCS;^
kanak'kanak young children, from j;»\ anak child, it will be observed
that the first syllable of the primitive, when long, is shortened in the
former part |of the duplication, whilst in the latter the word remains in
its orig^lal form, whether the last syllable be long or short ; and this
will be found to have some analogy to the first general rule respecting the
change of quantity in single words ; for as in this case the first syllable
is shortened upon annexing a particle, so in the other it is shortened
upon annexing a repetition of the word itself. It may be presumed that
ther«
MALAYAN LANGUAGE 125
there is something gratifying to the ear of a native in this metrical dispo-
sition of the long and short sounds, although our own may not be sensible
to its advantages. In common writing, however, it is more usual to
mark the duplication of the word by the CJ1\ arigka or cipher, as T^b,
XijSii r jJ\^, hut the distinction is notwithstanding observed in pronun*
ciation.
Such are the intricate rules by which the changes of quantity in
words, upon the application of additional syllables, may be said to be
governed; although in fact the rules themselves are no more than in*
ferences from the practice of good writers ; and should they not be at
first intelligible to the student, he should not on that account be dis-
cours^ed, as he may possess a very competent knowledge of the language
without having mastered them ; their accurate employment being obliga*
tory upon the writer rather than upon the reader and translator, I had
myself read many books before I thought of combining them into a
system, and probably might have remained content to take them as I
found them, had I not conceived the idea of rendering the experience I
had acquired, of use in the instruction of others*
It must be acknowledged that many of the words are much disfigured
with respect to their original appearance, by the dislocation of the long
vowels, and for this reason perhaps as much as from ignorance, many
scribes, not particuburly tenacious of correct orthography, adopt a degree
of licence, and do not scruple to introduce the long vowels in places
where the supplementary only should be expressed or understood ; writ-
ing ji^lJ tidor for jju? ttdor sleep, c^ suka for CS^ stika glad, c^yU
patut for ^£^ p^ut ought, ^^ 6m7 for ^ btni wife ; and in many
iostances it is diflBcult to say on which side the anthorides preptonderate,
K k at
M*
A GRAMMAR OF THE
as li bal&m or -jb balum not yet, ^jj dlri or jj^j diri self, c?L sagu or
^L. Jfl^a, sago. But this want of strict consistency Trill appear the less
remarkable when it is considered that the Arabic alphabet was adapted, at
no very remote period, to the language of these people, with which it
had no original connexion, that the art of printing has not lent any effec-
tive aid to fix a standard of orthography, and that so far as my limited
researches enable me to mate the assertion, the Malays have never
attempted to form a grammar of their mother tongue.
Of Versification.
With respect to the second part of Prosody, which treats of metrical
composition, termed jlI Aa \lynu sidr, although the Malays are pas-
sionately fond of poetry, and their language abounds with poetic works,
yet so imperfectly has it been reduced to system, that it admits of little
being said of it as an art. By the natives themselves I am not aware that
any thing didactic on the subject has been written, and were such to be
discovered, it would prove to be nothing more than a transcript from an
Arabian treatise ; the source of all their modern knowledge. Thifl,
indeed, is evident from a passage in the celebrated Malayan work named
in Arabic, ^^lUl _t." tdj asseldiin or \'^j JL, cuiU mdkuta segala
rdja-rdja the Crown of all Sovereigns (quoted by Werndlv), wherein
the author says, jj, j ^^i jylo iJ^ ^^b y«j,^ (jy^i-i j*i J* J^^fj^L^I 4**»
(j:.^! andak-lak iya maig-a-tafi-i segala itmu sidr seperti dml deti kqfit/et
dan lain deri-pada ilu " it behoveth him (ihe scholar) to be acquainted
with the whole art of poetry, such as metre, rhyme, and other matters of
that kind." The terms he here employs belong to the Arabian system
of prosody, which it would be superfluous to detail in this place. Those
who
MALAYAN LANGUAGE.
"7
I
whti wish to render themselves masters of it arc referred to the Tractatus
de Frosodia Arabica of the learned Clarke, to the Grammatica Turcica
of the celebrated Meninski, and to the Dissertations on the Rhetoric,
Prosody and Rhyme of the Persians, by Gladwin, whose most useful
labours have contributed eminently to facilitate the study of oriental !ite>
xature. The following observatioas are intended to be confined as much
3is possible to what is properly Malayan verse ; which, interwoven as it is
with the manners of the people, must have been cultivated by them long
before the introduction of Arabian literature.
The more common terms for verse including rhyme, are ur' seja and
jjU sai/ak. Rhyme, it must be understood, ia an essential part of every
kind of metrical composition, blank verse being unknown to the Malays.
Their poetry may be divided into two species ; the jti. siar or skiav
(often pronounced sayer), which they also name -Xt madak eulogium,
and Jai nadlarn or Mdzcm arrangement, and the ^^ pantun, which is
also named il<^ seloka stanza, from the Sanskrit. The former compo-
sitions have a fair claim to the denomination of poems, being usually
of considerable length, and serious in pcnnt of style. The subjects are
sometimes historical (as, for instance, a poem in my possession on the
war between the king of Mayigkasar and the Dutch, under the famous
COKNELIS Speelman), but are oftener romances, in which supernatural
agency is a distinguished feature. Some of them contain paDegyrics*
and others an unconnected succession of moral reflexions, the burthen of
which is the poet's complaint of the caprice and untonardoess of fortune
the evils attendant on poverty, the unkind neglect of relations and
friends, and above all, the difficulty of finding liberal patrons amongst
the great. They are written in ihyming couplets, the lines of each
couplet
•jfiS A CRAMMAR OF THE
couplet running lengthwise, with a point, small circle, or other mark to
denote the interval, instead of being placed under each other, as in our
poems ; the page by this means exhibiting a double column.
The pantUTij seloka or stanza, consisting of four short lines alternately
rhyming, is sententious and epigrammatic ; but its essential quality and
that from whence it acquires its name, is a quaint allusion^ by which it
affects to express more than meets the ear. The first two lines of the
quatrain are figurative, containing sometimes one, but oftener two uncon-
nected images, whilst the latter two are moral, sentimental, or amorous,
tod we are led to expect that they should exemplify and constitute the
application of the figurative part. They do so in some few instances,
but in general the thought is wrapt in such obscurity, that not the
faintest analogy between them can be traced, and we are even disposed
to doubt whether any is intended or occurs otherwise than by chance.
Yet (as Dr* Letden has observed) ^^ the Malays allege that the appli-
cation of the image, maxim or similitude, is always accurate ;" and this
is in some measure evinced by the eager attention (surely not to be
excited by mere nonsense) paid to the poetical contests which give birth
to these, often extemporaneous, productions, and the applause bestowed
Upon such as, to the taste of the by-standers, contain the most witty and
pointed allusions ; for '^ these pantuns (adds the same writer) the Malays
often recite in alternate contest for several hours ; the preceding pantun
always furnishing the catchword to that which follows, until one of the
parties be silenced or vanquished.'*
With regard to the metre of their poetry, it appears to be regulated
by the ear of the composer, rather than by rules previously established
for his guidance, and is consequently subject to much licence in the
disposition
MALAYAN LANGUAGE.
izg
disposition of the long and short, or, more properly, (he accented and
unaccented syllables. But notwithstanding this, a general similarity of
cadence prevails throughout all poems of the same class, and the princi-
ples therefore on which the verse is constructed should not be considered
as an hopeless subject of investigation.
Whether there may not be a variety in the measure of the jti si^r or
regular poems, I am not prepared to say, but as all those in my own collec-
tion are uniform in this respect, and as they also correspond with the
specimens given by Werndly and Leyden, it may be concluded that
any other measure is by no means common. The lines of which the
couplets are formed consist at the least of eight syllables, the most perfect
lines being those of nine and ten. Lines of eleven, twelve, and even of
more syllables occur, but they are unpleasing to the ear, and seem to be
the produce of necessity rather than of choice. These syllables resolve
themselves into four metrical feet, with a pause after the second. Of
the length and quality of the feet it is not so easy to judge as of their
number, and the result of my analysis, I am aware, may not prove
satisfactory to others. In order to place the subject in a point of view
the most convenient for examination, a few lines shall be taken indiscri-
minately from a poem, and to these shall be subjoined a dissection of
each in the usual metrical notation, here to be understood as representmg
accented and unaccented syllables.
Latu ber-kala raja
Ka-pada islri tang
L 1
(Jj4 criWri -^ (i-^J
LU^ jK^ j^ t^J^
bajigsawan
dermawan
Isuk
130 A GRAMMAR OF THE
Isuk kakanda ber-mmn ka-utan
Pergi men-chart per-buru-an
Putri bongsu menangar kata
Lalu meniahut serta stika
Baik-lah kakanda pergi segra
Anak palandok bawa'kan sai/a
" Then said the illustiious king to his gracious consort, to-morrow we
intend to take our sport in the forest, in pursuit of game. Upon hearing
this, the eldest princess (he had married the seven daughters of his pre-
decessor] joyfully replied, ^^ go without delay, my brother, and bring me
a young fawn."
The syllables of which these lines are composed may be thus noted,
agreeably to the usual pronunciation of the words, and to thbir order as
they are expressed in the European characters.
1, — .oa — o. — oo — u . 2. o — o— .w- — oo — o •
3, —» cj Q — ;^ • o — cj o — u • 4« — ~o o — - u • -— o — -o •
5. — o — u. o — Q.^o • 6. — oo — o. — o— u •
From this analysis it appears that the metre may consist of the following
feet : the dactyl (contauung one long and two short syllables), the trochaeus
(one long and one short), and the amphibrachys (one long between two
short), or, as the foot is not familiar in Latin verse, we may consider It
as a trochseus preceded occasionally by a short syllable. The disposition
of these feet in the line seems to be at the will of the composer, with
this restriction only, that the syllable preceding the pause should not be
accented. Let us now examine the foregdog lines by the test of the
inferences here draw^.
The
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 131
The first contains a dactyl, a trochaeus, the pause, a dactyl, and a
trochaeus ; the second, an amphibrachys (or a trochaeus preceded by a
short syllable], a trochaeus, the pause, a dactyl, and a trochaeus ; the
third, a dactyl, a trochaeus, the pause, an amphibrachys, and a second
amphibrachys ; the fourth, a dactyl, trochaeus, the pause, and two
trochaei; the fifth, two trochaei, the pause, an amphibrachys, and tro-
chaeus ; the sixth, a dactyl, trochaeus, the pause, and two trochaei ; the
seventh, a dactyl, trochaeus, the pause, and two trochaei ; the eighth, a
dactyl, trochaeus, the pause, a dactyl, and a trochaeus. It is proper to
observe, that Werndly summarily resolves the whole metre into feet
consisting of a long and a short, and a short and a long syllable, or, into
trochaei and iambi ; but he does not demonstrate their aptitude by any
scansion of the measure, and I have in vain endeavoured to reconcile
them to the rhythmus or cadence of the lines, which is, however, in itself
quite determinate, and not devoid of harmony. Its chief failure seems to
be owing to the too frequent coincidence of the words with the metrical
feet, both being commonly trochaei ; for, in our poetry, the distinction
between a rhythmical and a prosaic line, depends much upon the dividing
the syllables of our words, which are also for the most part trochaei, by
the contrary measure of the iambic feet of which our heroic verse is
composed.
In the paniunSj although the four lines of which they consist are
thrown into the form of a stanza by the alternate rhyming, the measure
is most commonly the same with that of the sidr (but with a more
frequent recurrence of double rhymes), as in the following examples :
jmU JL. 4^ « e) J^ (^ ^y 4
^ ^ c^ 4Jj; jV « 'i>r^ JjV (^ ^^^
Kiida
iga A GRAMMAR OF THE
Kuda putih etam kuku-nia
Akan kuda sultan iskander
Adenda etam baniak chumbil-nia
Tidak bulih kata tang benar
^^ A white horse T^rhose hoofs are black, is a horse for sultan Iskander.
My love is dark, various are her blandishments, but she is incapable of
speaking the truth.*'
Kalau tuan jalan daulu
Chart'kan soya ddun kambdja
Kalau tuan mati daulu
Nantt'kan saya de pintu surga
<^ If you precede me in walking, seek for me a leaf of the kamboja'
flower (plumeria obtusa, planted about graves) ; if you should die before
me, await my coming at the gate of heaven."
c:^y^ c:^ ^U J C^ $ li;U ^^:u/>^ c^U ^
Burong putih terbang ka-jati
Lagi tutur^nid de makan sumut
Biji mata jantong ati
Surga de-mana ktta mejiurut
^^ A white bird flies to the teak-tree, chattering whilst it feeds on insects.
Pupil of my eye, substance of my heart» to what heaven shall I follow
thee ?'
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 133
Bras makan-an perapati
Bilik kechil ampayan kain
Tuan s^orang palita ati
Tidak ber-paling pada tang lain
Bilik kechil ampayan kain
Be-kayuh ka^pUlau lorang
Tidak'lah ber-paling pada tang laitk
UjHd pada tuan s'orang
^^ Rice is the food of pigeons. A small chamber (serves) for a ward-
robe. You alone are the lamp of my heart, to no other shall I direct
my view. A small chamber (serves) for a wardrobe. Row the boat to
pulo Lorang. To no other shall I direct my view, existence being with
ihee alone."
The fancy and talents of a poet might perhaps embody these rhapso*
dies with connected sense, but in a prosaical garb they can only expect
to be noticed for their singularity. Their measure, which is our present
object, will be found to embrace the same number and description of feet
as /those lines which have been already analysed. Some variety in the
number, length, and arrangement of the lines in a stanza may be occa-
sionally met with, but they should rather be considered as the irregular
productions of poetical license, than as constituting different species of
the pantun. Such, for instance, is one of eight lines, in which the first
M in rhymes
134 A GRAMMAR OF THE
rhymes with the fifth, the second with the sixth, the third with the
seventh, and the fourth with the eighth.
To those who cannot read the Malayan words with sufficient fluency
to judge of the measure, will acquire no inadequate idea of it, as well as
of the cadence, from the following doggerel stanza, altered from the
well-known original, for the purpose of exemplifying the weat syllable at
the end of every line.
Mild Ar I cadians | ever { blooming,
Nightly j slumbering | o'er your I cattle,
See I my ig I noble | days con ] sumiog
Far I distant j from the | fields of | battle.
Of Rhyme.
It remains now to make a few observations on the subject of rhyme,
esteemed a necessaiy part of the constructure of Malayan verse. What-
ever advantages may attend its use in other languages (and though diffi-
cult to account for, its pleasing eflect can scarcely be denied), they are
here much weakened by the circumstance of the lines terminating with
unaccented syllables, and its being held sufficient that in these alone
(especially in serious poems) the resemblance of sound should take place,
without any regard to the preceding accented syllables of the same words.
The rules of this art, as of many others, are theoretically borrowed from
the Arabian poetry, but as the words of that copious and enei^etic
language, as well as of the Persian, frequently end with a strong syllable,
those rules have no practical applicatioa to Malayan verse.
The rhymes most frequently occurring are those of the short or sup-
plementary vowels, with which so large a proportion of the words con-
clude
MALAYAN LANGUAGE.
elude (and to which may in no small degree he attributed the softness
of the tongue), without any regard to the preceding consonant. We
accordingly find the word cyl^ kala (or more properly its final letter)
rhyming with j^j diya, ilX- suka with tijU viata, J«> bila with ^^l;
tanictt or any other words terminating in the vowel fat-hah or even in 1,
which, although long in that position, would not be therefore accented.
So also the word JliLi sakaU rhymes with ijyU ait, *jj bumi with jU
jadi, as well as with ^jjiS putrl, .jjiJ^ isirt, Jlj tati, and any syllable
ending with »_^ kesrah or with ^. And in like manner the word Jys
ulu rhymes with J^aj daulu, JS lalu, ^ temit, jjl adu, and all syllables
ending with dammah or with j.
When the rhyme is between syllables ending with a consonant (ren-
dered mute hy jeznC) there must he an accordance not only of the final
consonants but of the preceding short vowels, as in cjjij darat and
u,Xu pangkat, ^ji tuan and ^^ ulan, *ij ittah and i.,j_ susah, ^1
abang and V^ kanang; nor is the rhyme thought to be vitiated when
by the accordance of the first consonant as well as of the vowel and the
final consonant, an identity instead of a likeness is produced between the
terminating syllables, as in the case of JU- _/«/«« and ^j> bulan, ^"IC5
ka-mkat-an and ^^L. salalan, jj-r/ turus and j_^U hiirus, i^^ kambang
and ^^ tarnbang. This last, according to our own rules, would be
considered as a perfect double rhyme, and such occur very frequently in
the pantuns, giving fluency and vivachy to their lines, but the coinci-
dence of the penultimate syllables ts not deemed requisite even in those,
and in the more extended compositions is rarely to be found.
It must be allowed that when we examine the rhymes of the most
correct Malayan poetry, many irregularities or deviations from what
may be regarded as the general laws, are discoverable ; such as words
being
136 A GRAMMAR, 4yc.
being made to rhyme with the same word both in sense and sound;
others, to rhyme to the eye instead of the ear, as ^^^U ari with ^flj
'pakd^ %j^ orang with "Lj,^ kurong\ short syllables, with long ones both
in quantity and accent, as ^y tolong with cy^ g^dong^ js^ titan with
^Uxj^ seidn; words ending wither or with 'a m, to rhyme with those
ending in J / or with ^ n — but in the earlier days of our own poetry
were not offences as great as these committed and overlooked, and how
many ages of progressive refinement did it not require to bring our
metre and our rhyme to their present state of comparative correctness !
In order to enable the learner to apply the foregoing rules and obser-
vations to the practice of the language more fully than he could have
the means of doing from the occasional short examples given in the
course of the Grammar, and to supply in some degree the want of books
printed in the Malayan character, as well as the scarcity of manuscripts
in any other hands than those of the natives, I have judged it indis*
pensably necessary to subjoin for his use^ a Praxis, consisting of extracts
from several of their works, both in prose and verse, which will serve
to exercise and promote the skill he may have acquired, until oppor-
tunities are afforded him of having access to more ample and more
priginal sources of information.
PRAXIS.
n7
PRAXIS.
Letter from the King of Trangganu to Capt Fxancis Light
of Pulo Pmang.
jysi^ JLU» »^j- ci)U oiji iA^\ 4^ o\y ^ji i£^j y jUi» Sjj ^1 yn
«jji ^Ia^ izij^ ^Jl^)^ ^^^Ju^jjui jt^U Jb aJU ^b uusu ^,b %A^]/^\ m^j
4:^'> u*!*- w'^ J-^- ^ *^^} ^^ s:f^ *>V«> J^ ^:f^ i^k<> >^J) J3lr^ feS
yl> ^» «,1*0 ^y Jj «wU- ij,V>J ^>, JU diS ^U JJy ,^b j>iJ*
4)U u:^ u^W' ^\j^ |»}(L« ^jV '«^j d)'^ '^ '^^ <-^ «Al»^ «^ 4;^ ^
•> J-s»1 w-!^ i^ j^ yS */^ CJ^ jj ^jif Jj JiiiXfC aL« »,j^ tjuj^
^^j s^ «^j- w--^ tfl-*W* cy^ e,};»^ ,j^ 0* tylC^ 4j,b ,j,iX-i ^|^\
** Whereas this friendly epistle, having its source in a pure mind, comes
from his gracious majesty Sultan Mansur Riayat Shhah who is seated on
the royal throne of the kingdom of TYa^ganii, the abode of peace ;
N n and
13« A GRAMMAR OF THE
and may the Almighty Lord cause it to reach the hand of our friend
and favourite, the Governor of Pulo Ptnang^ who, in the enjoyment of
tranquiliityi friendship, and health, resides within the territory of the
English Company, and exercises the functions of a government renowned
throughout the Eastern and the Western countries ; who is valiant,
powerful, discreet, faithful, intelligent, and wise in managing the con-
cerns of his friends and connexions in these parts ; who is endowed with
firmness and constancy, and at the same time manifests a mild and gentle
nature in his transactions of reciprocal kindness and accommodation with
all the (neighbouring) princes and chiefs. May God increase his rank
and honours ; may he bestow upon him fame, consequence, and glory ;
may he bless him in this world with leligth of life, and protect him from
every kind of danger and mischief unto the last period of his existence.
Fuithermore, be it known to our friend^ that we have directed Seiyid
Abdallah and Nakhoda Bawa to juroceed to the country of Kling (coast
of Goromandel) to bring away a ketch-rigged vessel belonging to us.
When, through the favour of God, it shall arrive at Pulo Pinangj we
beg of our friend to furnish assistance to those persons in all their con-
cerns of business, and especially in case of sickness and diflSculties, and
also to give ordei*s for their sailing immediately upon the change of the
monsoon. There is nothing whatever that we can present to our friend
as a token of remembrance^ excepting a piece of fine calico. This letter
18 written on the 1 5th day of the month Safar^ being the first of the
week, in the year (of the hejrah) 1200 (an. Ch. 1785)."
Extract
MALAYAN LANGUAGE 139
Extract of a Letter from the Same to the Samb.
y\j c^ ^ f,\ij ^p\ \j^ 4iy c^ «u^ cwi«» ^\jS ^y^ \ji »j«j
4a^ JJ^ «-J ^\iJ vliU ^^> cJ];-. ol ^1^1 JU c^V- *^> aJ v'> J^''^^
^V<^ ^^^ s^j^ •-^l;fj «'f i^V' f^^ (3^^ »■/* "^y *— ^ LsV' (>'^*^ ct-*^ ^y
Vr* "5-^ u>^' us»' i^?** hi L'j' *-^ ii^-»" (Jb*» «iA^ «ii^ ^ Jyr-ji oV<i
^hj^ yjfoss izjyj ^L ^ ^% ttol ilfl^ ju«J jJ^ jj,C««a u:--!*,^' «^^ jV
"Kr- u»^' ii*^ i/^ •/•* J^ *^ «tr-^' «/-^ J**^ **-s^ «^^ «^ s*^
j^\^ ^1 cjt,— cyji/ jU u-^>liU ^jw^ *.-«- «JX. JlJ* ^j df^j 4i>,^ jL<^
" MoreoTer we desire it to be known to our friend that an English
Captain named G., commanding a small ship with two masts, arrived
here from Bengal, bringing a letter from the r^a (Governor) of Bengal
addressed to Us, which we received with all the ceremony and respect
due to letter» from great princes, as well as with much pleasure and satis-
faction. This letter expressed a desire that we should render assistance
to the Captain, which was accordingly complied with in every particular.
Some
I40 A*" GRAM MAR OF THE
Some days after his arrival he requested permission from us to bring his
vessel into the river of Trangganut in order to repair some damage her
copper had sustained by striking on a rock in the Bay of Bengal. Such
was his statement to us, and we, believing it a just one, allowed him to
enter the river ; but he had not been long there when he began, clan-
destinely, to sell opium to inhabitants of the pUce, other than our autho-
rised trader, The quantity sold was six chests, for which he received
payment in pepper and gold. This transaction coming to our know-
ledge whilst the vessel was still in the river, we caused the people who
Iiad purchased the opium to t>e brought before us, and these pointed to
Captain C. (as the vender). Being herein guilty of a serious oflisnce
within our reahii, it was our design to inflict a punishment upon him \
but irom the consideration of his being under the English colours, to-
gether with his having brought a letter from the raja of Bengal, we
refrained from doing any thing whatever to liim. As it respects the
raja of Bengal we feel much delicacy, and now request that our friend
will dispatch a letter to him on the subject, in order that he may never
allow that Captain to come agun to Trangganu. Such is the business
we have to make known to our friend." (It may be presumed that the
letter in the Governor's name was an imposition.)
Letter from Sudagar Nasr-eddtn to Captain Light.
jj'b jiS jij jU j1Xb- yh ijJ»- ^li^ j«jU« ^^ *Jw«j ^^j *L». j1 Cii^ ^Jt\i-S
u;-
MALAYAN LANGUAGE.
,jj^lf tl^ jjl t^^V tii/** t^ J^^ t^- 'y >^ (i/^ ^-^ >''"' ^-v*A .fibl CX«
Cilt— A/ J—< il^\-^ J
■' '— ^^ ''^j^ ^ I— ^V H. h
r*=- •>1^'- j;;d' j*^" -^ ^jjjll ^3
1 |*jU«> ll u^y^*^ Ji''^ ?jj' ^»5^
^^jcj CJ;-. CSjV j-j c^jS tjjl <ij^ J^ ji.^ ii)^ CJ^ CSi ^^ o Ift— jj'j I.
^^^ tl^ij fcj kiJi ^S\m^ yb L._~»> iiij^i I-
jiCli^ ^_^ iliU- Lii^l JIS JU jJjJ I
(J^ jS-* jAlfi tlX* J;J Ait; il—i CSj jij JJkiA i^_;J JJ-- Jjl J (-j,,4.fc jJUj *l]lllil
^ tr»' i/J 1^!; ^^:-*-! b^ "^-W "-r^J '^^ H ^^^^^ b^ '^-'^ ii^'^'^ J^^
lJj cJjH yjtJ Aij* ilS^ u-'ir' i*^''^ Ji^ y'"* >-r~** '*'> '■=-^' tjr«'*^'J J^ .j^ lIsC*
^j> {-i ^'^J J^ y'^r^ ^^ i^ ^/^ J-*' e^ ^^r»- Jij (J *!j» tlS^" t^"i;
yyaj\ ^J;clJJ JU- jS^j ilCo iji-jI J*Sj «;'-'J* u-~»a 4>? y^** »-r-** -"^ ti tJ^'^J
fcl^\j «J JU^~ i^'j liD CJj* Ajjj j^p»- iJ/^ i^S* •H'*' t"' ^-^ y^"^ t— -*» ^^jJj
^^ _;!_ ^ »,j- t^s ^^ yb c:^ ^^j ji^. ju ^k:^ "j^ jSyjj jii^i J ji^
iiAi- t^ Lli^ ^Aifc J-J. ul-jI ^ji^ Ji-1 lii'^O;* jf^ S-' Ji-^ yb <-r-** (tf^-»
4^ jIj yb w-AB C^ ^J^j^ t^H^*- "^^ cj'-' x^J 'j~^ -^ ttAr* y'j '-r'*»
jj,U l,^ jjj^ fcl/;* J*S J^ji^ji '•*- JlT^' t^^ y\il£>^ jJy J_rf AiU *L-i c/u^j
Jb ^l J^ cIAh y jV J'^j'^ '^r' *V ''^ c)'-^ •'^ ^/^ t-^' ti u;^*^**
^tj yb ilSji» ili^ yb J*f yij jl»- »0- jlXa- _yl.j |.jl*< ^J ^^jol Jlj J «..J, yU
«^ J^J ^ ^J^^ Jk-^ c]^ J-^ ^n ^ J^ J\ by- ^J
" Whereas this letter comes from me Daiu Sudagar Nasr-eddln, of
TTaTigsanu, and may the Lord who created the world cause it to reach
A GRAMMAR OF THE
tlie presence oF his honour the Governour who holds the chief com-
maDd within the territory of Piilo Pi/iang, bestowing upon him dignity
and happiness to the latest period of his Ufe. Moreover, be it known,
I pray, to his honour, that if it be agreeable to him, it is my request
that he should make the purchase nf a ship. She should be a new one,
about two or three years old, of good qualities, and capable of loading
about three thousand five hundred ptkuL It is proposed that his honour
should take one thiid share, Mr. F. one third, and myself one third.
It is further desirable that Mr. F. should provide a good crew for her,
and stores such as are proper for a ship of war. My reason for making
a point of this is, that at the present time the seas to the eastward are
extremely foul (much infested with pirates), which renders good ammu-
nition essential; for the practices of the Malays are well known to his
honour. Now with respect to the ship ifj with the blessing of God,
she arrives in safety at Tran^ganil^ it is my intention to embark on her
myself, and proceed with her to the other side (eastward) of the land of
BORNEO. Mr. F. should lade on her an investment of cloths to the
amount of about four or five thousand rupihs, and about four hundred
chests of Patna opium. On these goods I am willing to pay a premium
of thirty per cent., valuing the opium at three hundred and tliirty-five
dollars the chest. Upon the ship's arrival here I shall take out of her
such articles as will sell in the TraiTgganu market, and such as are not
suited to it, I shall take with me on the voyage. Beside these 1 shall
lade on the vessel the goods I may have on hand. Now as to the profit
that may be obtained on the goods carried to the eastward for sale, it
may be shared amongst the three. This plan, in my opinion will be
more advantageous than that of proceeding to China, as pepper and
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 143
tin fetch a better price at Traifgganii than at Pub Ptnang. (The
force of this argument is not obvious.) If these proposals should meet
with his honour's approbation, I beg he will write to Mr. F. requesting
him to put Captain Carnegie into the command of the ship, he being
a person with whom I can converse, and to whom I have already com-
municated every information respecting the trade at all those pdacea
which we now propose to visit. With regard to the opium I may carry
to the eastward, I think it will fetch four hundred dollitrs the chest.
When the trading voyage to the eastward has been completed, and the
ship returns to Tranj;ganii, those articles of produce, such as l>epper
and tin, that may remain on hand after the sailing of all the vessels (of
the season) for China, can be shipped for Bengal; and thus two or three
profits may be nude in the course of the one year ; as his honour well un-
derstands. He should, if he approves of it, dispatch a letter to Mr.
F. in order that he may immediately take the necessary steps against the
arrival of Captain Carnegie. Finis. Written on the twenty-sixth
day of the month Muharram in the year 1206 {1791)."
Extract of a Letter from the King of Traiig^am to the Same.
^0 ,j;»Uj-£ ^r' '^^ J>^ '^'- wA^ u^ ^^:^ J^l J*j -wS «y,lj J^j>.
i^\s~^\j\ ^jl J ^U u^ ji\ JU jJp cl^ J^ ,^ ji\ Mi J^^ ^j:^
144 A GRAMMAR OF THE
^< We have now to communicate to our son the event of Sudagar
Nasr^eddin^s return to the Divinity, leaving a transitory world for one
that is eternal. Upon the occasion of his death we had already for-»
warded an express by land (across the peninsula] describing, for the
information of our son, the trouble and a£Biction into which we have been
thrown by this visitation of Divine Providence. With respect to the
concerns of our son, let not his loss make an alteration in any one trans^
action, but (on the rnntrary] let us proceed in the same path of reciprocal
accommodation on every needful occasion, with frequent and uninter-
rupted exchanges of communication ; for Trarigganu and Pula Pittang
should be considered as one.'*
Extract of a Letter from Sudagar Pnya a relation of Sudagar
Nasr-eddin.
il^^ cJjJ^ (jjj y^ jly ^j^JIj! *^^\ JW ^yij^ cJU jj^ i^ ^jS ^jUt \Jo
^jy jj j1 iU^ji ^ CJJJ jl/\^ ^o\ ^JU^ C^ ^^^% JJ j1 Jdijj^ dJ^ ^JU^
J\^} v::-^l- 4p JJJ^ ^y 4^J k:>j}jJ.JL. jjj\ c^^ tJU ^\ l^} JU^
il^ yiiJf J3U; ^j^ c^^^hJ^ J") (^ ^)^ ^«^ ^ «^ ^a^^ J^ tt/^Hs^ «^<
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 145
^j» M^ fji'i jjjjKJ ^J^ ^\^ (jJ^j^i |_jjl u:-J^l J y-;U ^^y ^\mj tiJ^ jL.
aij! ^^t*-. uX* jJljJ jl ^U 1^3^ r(_^\ jLj ^JlJ J\j^ J-"^ jV \j3^ J?-*'** u-jW
jUil *^jjl (iJjj J 1^1 oJ j\ JU Ci^ 'tyiS cSj-A* jjfi? (>i\ jV** J'jjj 'fj^ jJU
^^y*j«-e ojj\ ^\ j^ya o3 JUj aJJ! \li\ i—JlaJ ui-^l ^J-i^J ^iil *Jw jU jjij s^^j*
JJ ijj^ i^jljo UT^ ''^ U^'^ '^ *— >jU« [Jy JJCA (;;yy>J t^ iJ'^ "J^ '--^
" Be it known to my respected elder brother that I sailed from Pula
Ptnang and proceeded to Pĕrak, and upon my arrival there travelled
into the interior country, and from thence descended into the country
inland of Pfl/iflH^ {on the eastern side of the peninsula}. My journey
for about two months lay through the woods, but, by the assistance of
God, I at length reached Pdhang. When I arrived there I heard for
the first time the intelligcnoo ibnt my elder brother, SudHgai- NaSf
eddin, had been received back to the mercy of God. From excess of
affliction my soul seemed to take its Bight. But what help was there for
it? Such was to be his fate, and the decree of the Divinity was exe-
cuted upon his servant. I then sailed from Pdhang for TrangganUi
and upon my arrival there my grief was augmented on beholding all the
children of my departed brother left as orphans, his house standing
empty, and all his goods and elTects carried otT and lodged in the pa-
lace. Even the wearing apparel of his children had been in like man-
ner conveyed to the palace, as were all his keys. Upon my appearance
(although the legal representative of the deceased) not one article was
P p restored ;
146 A GRAMMAR OF THE
restored ; but only his Majesty gave orders that I should take the trade,
into my hands and buy and sell (as usual) ; but every piece of goods I
might wish to draw from the warehouse must be made known at the
palace, whea the keys are to be brought, and the doors opened by a-
person sent for that purpose. This conduct towards me is that of half;
confidence and half distrust. Such is my present state; but by the<
blessing of God Almighty I intend in the course of this season to re-
quest his Majesty's leave to retire, and to return to the presence of my
mother and all my brothers. Written on the twenty-ninth day of the
month Muharraniy in the year 1207 (1792)." (The king, whose agent
he was, having undertaken to make good all his mercantile engagements,
judged it necessary to secure the property! * What relates to the family,
if correct, derogates from his character for justice ; but the circumstances
may be exaggerated.)
•-«r.
Extract of a Letter from the King of Perak to Captain Light.
>~^ ,i,^j i^} y. t)/«j» f^^ ^^^ u>) Jjs» t^P ^ u,yo1 ^W cjU ^ ,4yw ^j^ .
Jj» j\ ^^^\ ^ |Jb ^3jyt^ Ji/ «t-d^ ^ «li* ^ Jy <i\ jk^ ^^j» ^
i^\ Jij ^\ ^ o^b- d^ Ji/ u^j ^\ vliU i^J j^yU; J\ ^j Ij^\
jjMj^ «diAiA tl^ <l=i\ yj-ii^i ^^ jjj ^p C^ ts-o1 y/.j» ^\i<i A^ ij^J
MALAYAN LANGUAGE; 147
4)\> Jj ^ /U to Jy JaU ^^ ^jj ^p ^b J tie» J\j:^, cu-^ ^- c^
^l ^> Jly. ^ ^^> A>.y jj ij^ji cS^ JiL ^j^\ ^L jj\ to e^
*^ With respect to the Governour's overtures for a friendly intercourse
i^ith us, we are much gratified by them, and sincerely desire his friend-
ship ; but the circumstances of this country of Perak may be compared to
those of a beautiful woman, who, beautiful as she is, has a husband, and
that husband happens to be extremely jealous. There is a person, how-
ever, who notwithstanding this pays addresses to her. She is enamoured,
but the husband is violently severe. What the situation of the woman is,
such is that of the country of Perak. The Govemour wishes to be on
terms of intimacy, but the person whose severity is to be apprehended
is well known to him. Furthermore, with respect to the gentleman
lately arrived from Bengal, who desires to be furnished with young seed-
lings of the Sago tree, in order to his taking them back with him and
planting them in Bengal ; such not being procurable at Piilo Ptnang ;
our attention has been directed to the Govemour*s wish, but these plants
are very scarce in the country ' of P^^^, and the soil where they' grow'
very dear. Written on the seventh day of the month Sawal^ being
Monday, in the year 1201 (1787)."
Letter from the King of Silarigur (Salangore) to the Governour
General of Bengal.
isL^ ^\j\ J^ ^^ C^^ Jr ij^ ^j'^ ^;»i J^\ ^j^ trJ/ i;J- ttJdU •
148 A GRAMMAR OF THE
^jy. C^l ^U^ ^,^-::- y dW ^^;; jb ^ CL^^ Jl^ s^> j^^jJbj^^
ji\^ ^/- ^U^ ^b\ ^jJb ui;S bt t?'^ ^ cM^ i:)'*^ c;^^ js^ J^ *^
cs^ al^l ,4^ j^\; ii) ^^ ^\i! jV (Tir^ ^ «*r^'*> g^j <-^^ g^*^ ^'^ j-^ C*
^y ^ cj<j-a J^j (^ ijj- c^/- JU ^^^ cs^ uuj^ oi^ ^^y jJL*
4^Jj ji^ {-[L A.rf\l^ «3\ ^^ iju^ (j>i^ ^]/i^j^^ iJi uW^ ^^ <*^ ^l«V
^J u^ cr^^j^ ^ ^^^ji ^\£^\ e;^ v:/ju J^ J^ J^ ^^ J^ ^ ^J^
c}hJ^^x^^ ^Ji ^Js^J ijr" J^yJ «^ ^^ ^i^J ^-^ ^^ f^J—
Jj^j S^j^ c:-^t *^jy!Lt ts^ (^k<^ ^j^ ^;d^ ^/Jy uH^i*^ ^-^^ •— *?* ^^*^^ ^^^
I P ♦ ♦ ^ igjl? v«^ J^jJ aU- fcjuSj ^jl <^jU liMji^
^' Whereas this sincere and friendly epistle comes from the presence
of Mulana Paduka Sri Sultan Ibrahim the khalif of the Faithful,
who holds his court seated on the royal throne of the kingdom and
trading city of Silangur^ the abode of propriety ; and may the Lord of
all worlds cause it to reach in safety the hands of our friend the General
who governs the port and country of Bengal, together with ail its bays
and coasts; who is faithful and wise, liberal to the poor and needy, and
who affords protection to all merch;intg arriving and departing ; who re-
sembles a lofty tree in the midst of a plain, the branches of which are
shady, the scent of its blossoms fragrant, and its fruit pleasant to the
taste ; beneath which the servants of God find shelter, satisfy their hun«
ger, and assuage their thirst. Furthermore we transmit this leaf of
paper
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 149
paper to our friend to make known to him that of our former letter we
have not hitherto received any acknowledgement whatever, and also to
state our desire, that if he has any favourable regard for this country of
Sildngur, he will, as soon as possible, supply us with the Company's -
colours, and the necessary instructions, as a token of our mutual friend-
ship ; and with respect to the export produce of this country, such as
tin, pepper, wax, and canes, all of these we offer to our friend with perfect
good will. For that purpose it is we write the present, as an engage*
ment (on our part), and to give it the more validity affix our seal to the
paper. Written on the hill of Silarigur^ the fourth day of the month
Safar^ being Wednesday, at three o'clock, in the year 1200 (i785).''
Extract of a Letter from the King of Silangur to Captain Light.
4^> tt;i*^ jy^ <^J? cH'i*^ i^^ ti wyy ** fcJ v^*^ b"^ Ar^^^^
^J\:i cu%^ 4Sy 4SL« \j^ cs^ ji^ c^ Jf^ ^ji ^\ &jjt J3L> idf^ jU d^\ ^j
yjr 4^j tjr^ ^y. ^^ ^J^ 6y ^ \J^ ^^ ^y itk*^ iJ^ c^ <^^
J^iT ^ ^ \J^ ^) (J<^ d^j ij^ ^jr^ ^P ^yi*^ c;^ i/>f^ud'
<* That is to say, from his Majesty who reigneth and holds his court
en the hill of Silangur Furthermore, with regard to what is
mentioned ia the letter froni our friend ; should we interfere in the con- ^
Q^ q cems
150 A GRAMMAR OF THE
cerns ok the Kitig of Achht^ we must give umbrage to the people of that
place, and occasion them to harbour resentment s^inst us. With what
propriety can we say to them ^' do so'* or ** do so/' seeing that they
have a r^ht to act as they please in the affairs of thdr own country ?
How can people, situated as we are to the eastward, understand what
relates to that country, its subjects, and its government ? Were we now
to do any open injury to the Achinese or to act with treachery toward^
-them, they would owe us a grudge ; and at this time there is no matter
of discussion between us and Che people of Achin. Written on the
«ixth day of the month Muhorram^ heii^ Monday, at ten o'clock* in the
forenoon, in the year iao2 (lySy).*'
itm
Extract of a Letter from the Same to the Same.
(^ vf'> ^ji ^^ w^-H* fC^V ts-,^«u,^ J^ 4^ e/W* d^ *^ itf**
*< We have directed a person whose name. is Guru Khafib^ with two
persons in his company, to present themselves to our friend, in order
that
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 15.
that if it can be conveuiendy done, our friend may afford bis aEsistance
ia providing ibem with a passage on board of a ship; it being their
intention to proceed on the pilgrimage (to Mecca) ; and if possible, in
expediting the departure of these three Priests, so that they may save the
monsoon. Should there be an English vessel bound to Juddah or to
MokhOf we request our friend to accommodate them witli a passage on
her; or if not bound to those places, on a vessel going even so far as
Cochin. We likewise request that he will cause good care to be taken
of them ; and moreover that he will furnish them with a document under
his hand, to serve them as a token in case of meeting with any English-
men, who may assist them in consequence of seeing our friend's signa-
ture, and prevent them from experiencing a long detention at every port,
for which their supplies would be inadequate. 1206 (1791)." (Appli-
cations of this nature occur very frequently, and may be considered as a
proof how httle of religious bigotry subsists amongst these Mahometans,
who give the preference to an European vessel for the conveyance of
thdr pilgrims. )
Letter from the King of Jo!ior and Paftang to the Same.
J^ ^J^ <j'^ ub^ 1^^^ ^ '^ '^ >3f4>s* ja^ i^j-i cJj/i -iifi uu^'l;
u»£ u:-^ >m!S u:^U jW'.« jlX^ ^Jj ^i^sIjw ij}j JSLi ^^ ^ ^b
Jll jjjJAl yjij fcli- jjil* ^j v;M£^ j*Jb yb f_^j) ^jjl j^U^ JJi* jij jJ^
lie, jAi^ f.\j> JjJ u-SSU Aj\pi>3 4\ y^ yJ> \ji\ tlX. lyU» ^-1 JW
|Jb J yU \jj\ jX- u:-*i Mis fclC uu-jI j;j ^\^jijii\ ^J ^J^\»^ yjJ ^j> ^jjl
159 A GRAMMAR OF THE
>!> y^ u'y ^y^id^ bj^ «^J M (^^-^ ^^ en^j^'» wy^J r^j jL^jji^
CS-< CSL^ jJy 4^jS 4^y JjJj *j^j1 j^U j;-j^ ^iLjU ^y jt»j gfjb 41\ *uy j^^
^j? ti ^y ij^ u^^ '-?V i/j^ v/^ ^\ lH< sfj^ j*3 j^^ y eLp\ ^^ ^»
il^ili c::^yb ^ c:hI^ c;^ s^jjJ j\^. ^^ ^^^ d^ ^^5 ^\LL ^
« That is to say, from Paduka Sri Sultan Mahmud R\ayat Shaky
who possesses the royal thrones of Johor and Pahang and all the dis-
tricts subordinate thereto If it should appear to our friend to be
a proper measure, we request him to communicate to the (Governour)
General of Bengal the subject of this letter, making known to him that
the Dutch Company employed a force against Riyu (Rhio), in order to
subdue the Bugis inhabitants and to set up a Malayan king. It pleased
the Divine Will'that the Bugis people should be conquered in an attack
made by (the troops under) Jacob Peter Van Braam the commandant^
on which occasion they all ran away and abandoned Riyu^ leaving us
Malays in the place. Upon this a treaty (or capitulation) was agreed to
between
MALAYAN LANGUAGE.
tS3
between tbe commaiidant and ourseir, together whh all the chiefs on the
spol, and interchanged in writing between the two parties. When the
business of the treaty was solemnly completed, he returned to BataviK.
Some time after this there came another Datchman, named Peler Rody,
to reside at Riyil, by whom all the articles of the treaty with us and the
chiefs were infringed. During these transactions the lUanoJi (a piratical
people from Mindanao) invaded Riyil, and by God's permission entirely
ruined the country. The Dutch made iheir escape and returned to
Malacca. With these chcumstances we make our friend acquainted,
requesting that he may communicate them to the General of Bengal.
If we are In the wrong with respect to the Dutch Company, let him fix the
guilt upon us, and if, uii ilic contrary, we have acted correctly, we beg
that the General will lend his aid to see us righted ; there being no quar-.
ter towards which we can now look with hope, excepting the English
Company, who, in tbe present days, are renowned from the western to
these eastern regions; and who have the power of reUeving the op-
pressed. Allow me further to mention, that being arrived In the domi>
nions of the chief of my family, the sultan of TrangganH, I have
committed my interests to his care ; both in relation to the English and
to the Dutch Company, whether for good or for evIL 1 have only tQ
add that there Is nothing I can offer to my friend, in token of my re-
gard, but my prayers offered up every night and day. Written on the
sgth day of the month Muharram in the year i20a (»787),
Extracts
»54 A GRAMMAR OF THE
Extracts of Letters from the King of Trariggam to Captain
Light.
^\fi. li^A^ tr> ^ 4^ ^j ^^^ cJ^y^j ^j J<i sib* j^j Jj ^di ^j
ff* ^j ^j^ i^W tH^ 'J^ uy 4^ ^P «-^ dJj^'* d^ *^^ ^ ^ -^j v?^
^ ^j br* cr^V MlJ^ 4i?j^ «^ »1^ «--^ '^ (If -^j br' J^ fj^ wj» '>^
^.gl,u,>.j^s?j^^jt* w A^ *i^ 44^^ i^ ;r!^ c^ cA^ ^J»^ u>J^
^tje^ <i«v vi^'« «»M^ s^^ yj» u>^' (»9- *i^ d^>-> w^'» ^^ yy cA* fc^ '^*
^ ^\ 4//** u:--^ Jj» t/V- wW* ^^ «W< ^ tt^ «-»!'> y 4^ i;j^
• « •
* I*
JU- Oi* iXiel Ci^^ 4//>* («-««A («^ 4)t<V *i^^ Jh" «4^ t^i^
Jb ^b ^ys^^ ^bj u^. ^«v^ cp/U c;^>i oU u^ |i9>< uul^ C^'i ^^b te^t
4Sja* dJU u:^ j^I yL. v\^ ijs ot iJ«» ^>j* '^^\C u^ c^ tt)^^^ r^ Jit
ir.r *w
• •
MALAYAN LANGUAGE.
^V i^ 'J'-V" ^}^^/ >^ ^J^ u--? ^)i uwt ^jX,j Ui, u:^ ^^ ^_^
^Afc tf^ ^V- Jjrr* *^y J"^ u^^ ly. *^} lJj> »■>" ti>jai^ CS^ .i^U- ij^*'
^y^^ uf) cpi-»^ (•-j* >« '■j!'^ ii-^" *^ 4j=v3 liu^ 1h bj' irf^^-* w''^ ^
J^ Jj t-U jJ ^.
Jj tuU *U- u.
l*U (.M^ (.i^ ^_ ^U tis^ Jr*l I
ir.v i^
*' In addition to this we acquaint our son that whilst the king of
Siam remained at SaiCggora he gave orders for summoning the king of
Kedah, tlie king of Palanl, and the king of Tvangganu (to do homage).
The reply from the king of Pafiwt being in terms not conciliatory, his
country was invaded by the Siamese, tiubdued, and laid waste. With
regard to the letter addressed to us, we stated, in answer to it, that it
never had been customary from the earliest times to appear personally
before the king of Siam, but only to convey to him a flower of gold
(filagree), and another of silver. Some time after this there arrived an
envoy from him, who demanded that an hundred pieces of cannon, and
likewise all Siamese subjects who were settled in Trangganu, should
be delivered to him. He further required a variety of rich articles of
furniture. His demands upon us were highly exorbitant and oppressive.
Our alarm on the occasion was very great, and we roused the country
in order to be in a situation to resist the king o^l Siam; but through the
aid of God and of his Prophet, he returned to bis own territory ; car-
ryim
J56 A GRAMMAR OF THE
rying ofF with him a number of the Patanese whom he had seized, (the
Patam country being intermediate between the dominions of Siam and
Trar^gganu). We shall now proceed to make our son acquainted witl\
the genealogy of the kings of Johor down to our own time, for his con-
sideration." (On this descent he grounds his resistance to the king of
5iflm*5 claim of personal homage.) "Written on the fifteenth day of
the month Shdbah^ in the year 1201 (lyS/)*''
*' The king of Siam still persists in requiring that either your royat
and gracious father or tlie heir apparent should appear in his presence ;
but from the beginning of time, through all generations, the kings of
Johor never did personal homage to the kings of Siam^ but only sent
complimentary messages. With regard to this journey to the .presence
of the king, your royal father has not yet made up his mind ; but on
tht other hand the king has declared, that if his will is not obeyed, he
intends to enter our country in the fifth month from this time. Now if
our son feels any concern for our situation, he will give orders for a
couple of giuu'da coslas to proceed to this place in the course of four
tHonths, bringing with them a set of English colours. . • There i&
nothing we can send in token of our affection but two pieces of cbth ;
they are not a suitable gift, and must be considered merely as if we pre*
nented him with a flower. This letter is written on the sixth day of thq
month SafoTi being Friday at nine o'clock, in the yea^ 1202 (1787)."
•,•••••
. ** The reason for making this request is that we still continue at va«
riance with the king of Sianif and are unable to ascertain his good or his
bad intentions. Wc imvc transmitted to him the flower of gold and
the
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 157
the flower of silver, together with the usual present (in money), but no
answer from him has been yet received. In (the beginning of) this year
he came to Patani and smote it, utterly ruining and laying it waste, and
putting to death the principal people. On this account it is we are ap-
prehensive that in the ensuing season he may perhaps come and invade
Tranggdnii* If a ship could by any means be spared, it would assist
in enabling us to resist the power of Siam Furthermore, with
respect to the articles forwarded to us by our son, they are arrived, but
we have taken only such as we fancied, namely a time-piece, two pair of
mirrours, a piece of green and one of purple velvet, two pieces of gold
tissue, and one parcel of lace; the value of which amounts to one
thousand five hundred and ninety-two Spanish dollars. Written on the
third day of the month Safar^ on the night of Thursday, in the year
1207 (^792)-"
Passages extracted from a Romance containing the Adventures
of Indra Laksma, Indra Makadcwa, and Dcwa Indra.
iJ^h uy ^^ •^'^^ *^^ e>^ ^^ iijiJ^^ u^jf^ ^J s^lr* (t^J u^y *^ ^^
^jJS u:^ ^^ ^y ^b ^ ^y ^^AiJ y J!^ ^j^ ^^ ^y^ ^y
^)^ j^U ^\ idacL ^^ ^ysA ^ji ^y CJ^ \^ ^y J^ jjb ^^ \j{
y ^J!r^ b*^ "^^ ^ <^ ^J^ ^y u^^ ^^*^' J^J^^J^ ci^
S 8 « The
158 A GRAMMAR OF THE
<' The prince then smiling (at the defiance sent by the enemy) went
to sooth the affliction of his wife, and addressed her thus : *^ O my love,
thou who art to me the soul of my body, farewell ! If perchance it should
be thy husband's doom to fall (in the approaching battle], wilt thou
cherish the memory of him with some degree of fond concern? Wilt
thou wrap him in the scarf that binds thy waist ? Wilt thou bathe his
corse with thy tears pure as the dew that hangs at the extremity of the
grass ? Wilt thou bestrew it with the flowers which now adorn the folds
of thy hair ? '* The princess upon this wept the more abundandy, and
embraced the neck of Indra Laksana^ her arm enfolding it as the musk-
scented epidendrum entwines the angsuka tree (pavetta indica). Such
was the picture she exhibited) whilst Indra wiped away the tears from
her eyes."
fi^-i fc» jjsi ^jLT* ^J^ o^ /i^ «^^ j^ uM^ «AP uy «^^ ^-^ yM*
uAs^ uy^J iP^ '^ J^- *^^ "^ ^ '■^^y v/V» ^iji ijy u^^ ii)i> y^ "^
fX^J U)J* Jd**** J^^ 1-^ e»^ (J*« jJl«>«> «W^ yJ*^J» ^:>J^ *-^ Jji^ jl^ U
^Aw ^U^ t^\^ ^y Hj^ e;*-9-«> u'»* J^*» JiC^ v:^\ 4^jM jj,y iz^ /i^
*' Upon the arrival of Indra Maliadeiva at the palace, he seated
himself by the side of the princess (his bride) and said to her smiling,
" My
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 159
^* My love, my soul, in what manher is' it your intention to dispose of
yourself, as I am obliged to proceed in the search of my brother? If it
be your design to accompany me, you should lose no time in giving orders
for the necessary preparations, as my departure must be immediate."
When the princess Seganda Ratna heard these words, she held down
her head, and with glances sweet as the blue lotos flower in the sea of
honey, replied, " What plans, my love, am I, a young female, to pursue
but those of my lord alone ? For is not a wife under the guidance of her
husband?" Indra Mahadewa shewed his satisfaction at hearing these
expressions from the princess, embraced and kissed her, saying, '^ Thy
good sense adds grace to thy lovely features, thou shalt be the soother of
my cares, my comforter, my companion."
Jj r^^ *j-i jj/ ^^JlU Jj fj^ j-5 t^v^ jSjtb jM ^^oji ^ ,*;-s^ ij^lj
^kf^. ^ ^-^-^ i/y*> ii)^ cL/-* fcL.^^ aU-X^ ^y j4 4^^ <*?/* m)^ cfeV
*' Having spoken thus, Indra Mahadewa bent his course wherever his
uncertain steps might lead. With an anxious heart and suffering from
hunger and thirst, he penetrated into forests of great extent, ascended
high
t6o
A GRAMMAR OF THE
high mouDtains, and crossed wide plains. The sun was now set, and the
moon rose in all her splendour as if to serve him for a torch. The prince
although fatigued proceeded towards the hills of Indra Klla, and as he
passed, the tender branches of the climbing plants waved with the wind,
and seemed incHned to follow the beautiful youth. As the dawn gra-
dually arose, the clouds in the border of the sky assumed a variety of
shapes, some having the form of trees, and some resembling animals ;
but the trees of the forest were still obscured from sight by the dense
vapour rising from the dew. The light of the sun now began to appear,
glancing from the interstices of the mountains Hke the countenance of a
lovely virgin, whilst its beams shooting upwards exhibited the appearance
of flags and banners waving in front of an army marching to battle."
*i^j3 i^jj mXj lIX* aJo Aa^ LH-ol ^jjj J_jJ ^yii^-t-J^iJ l_^yl^ »j^ fjlf Ji
^yL^ J—-'* ij'j ^jij^ <j_^ fri y #i' y^r*^ iji-jij I— »v* jjV lii'-**^ (Ji*^ *^7?
^5/S y y ^f-ij-i j^ A:^ CX< jJU J.»? yl c^ ti-^l j^_;V- ,^ ^'J» i-l^ w'-***
'■^.' ''^b d^'^ 'H''' *'=-:'.' jV u^ 't?' '^^i' w''' fr^ LJj*^' tu^^ J-*"' Ji"* ^^
^^enn- (l^'j tlXiy jjj »j^ jJ *r^ tj^ ti^ i^V* '*?'*r* l;^.^ j**^' ji-^ •— ^ *— y?"
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. .6i
^-j '^jl; CS^ <ir^r< <J^ r^U ^f^\ jJ ^_ ^<i j— .U O^ ^.^ CS-S^
^^jiU^ JUS ^U ^^^\ ^(/ijHj jl- Jj l:!-^ ^j CC ^j/ *11V y,ji tl^
jji-, ^bi ^j!^ jJCj «*4-» jjjy JS li-jl *c ju |Jlj ^'li -dijlj u>j*^.^ ^1 jiJ u-S^
*^!;!^ uM^ eP^ '■^^-^ 11»''^ u^J^ yV^ "^^^ «-J^ cj''^ ''^W' ''tVj' J'*
" The ting was highly pleased with the manners and disposition of
Dĕwa Indra, as well as with his graceful person and superior under-
standing. He said to him, " Partake of betel, my son." Dĕiua Indra
having accordingly partaken, returned the betel-stand to the king, who
thus addressed him : " I have sent for you, my son, in order to make known
to you a resolution taken by me some time since ; that to the person who
having counted out ten laig;e measures of sesame seed and as many
measures of sand, thoroughly blended together, should be able to separate
the grains of the one from the grains of the other, and to complete the
performance of the task in the course of a day ; to such person alone should
I give the hand of my daughter in marriage." Dcwa Indra smiled on
hearing the king's words, knowing them to proceed from the artful
suggestion of the princes [his rivals), and bowing replied, " whatever may
be your majesty's injunctions, your servant is ready to execute them."
The sand and the sesame seed being then provided and mixed together in
the court before the palace, Dcwa Indra made his obeisance, descended
to the spot, and as he stood beside the heap, silently wished for aid from
the king of the ants ; when instantly the monarch made his appearance,
followed by his whole army, consisting of the popuhttiop of nine hillocks.
T t Upon
l62
A GRAMMAR OF THE
Upon receiving the directions of Dĕwa Jndra for separating the grains,
each individual ant took one seed in his mouth, and in this manner the
separation was presently effected, and the grains laid in distinct heaps, not
one heing wanting. This done, the king of the ants and all his train
disappeared, and returned to the place from whence they came. Dĕwa
Indra reascended the steps of the palace, and having taken his seat and
made oheisance, said, " Vour majesty's commands for the separation of the
sand and the sesame seed have been obeyed by your mean and humble
slave." The king expressed his amazement, and all the ministers of
state, the warriors and the people in general were astonished at witnessing
this proof of the supernatural power of Dcwa Indra ; but with respect
to thepruices, some of them shook their heads, some bent them down, and
others turned them aside, being unable to support liis looks."
(The striking resemblance of this incident to one in the allegory of
Cupid and Psyche by Apuleius, will appear from the following passage,
and, I hope, excuse its introduction). " Venus being incensed against
the beautiful but unfortunate Psyche, after mncli personal ill treatment
imposed on her many severe tasks. In the first place having collected in
a great, promiscuous heap, an immense quantity of seeds, consisting of
wheat, barley, millet, poppy, vetches, lentils, and beans, " separate,
said she, this mass of seeds, let each of the several species of grain be
placed distinct from the rest, and see that the work be accomplished before
night." Psyche overwhelmed by the contemplation of a task so prodigious
and so impracticable within the allotted time, remained stupiFied and
motionless ; when an ant who observed her situation and cummistrated
her difficulties and her affliction, immediately summoned the populous
tribes of six-footed people from the neighbouring field. These, obeying
the
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 163
the call, hastened to her assistance, and having separated, grain by grain,
the confused heap^ and deposited each sort apart, presently disappeared
from her view."
Passages extracted from the Malayan version or paraphrase of the
Ramayana, a celebrated Hindu Poem.
^W« i»^** <^'* ur^' wis* drs^ 'iS-i^ ''c?''^ «^i-^ <-»W \Ji •F^ ^j^ w^^
^A* 'jr"^ *-^ wj!r — ' w'** (T»?^' ii*-» w'** (*=-» '"Tti ■^Jr' i*}j^ J*** ujlf
ujI» ^!;** '^ *i;^ iJi^ wj* ers^ i^ ert:''^ **^ -»!*- d^j*^ »^:-^ wj»
jL. J,i fi^ «-^ ^};f< fcul^ tL^ ^y JU^ ttA;^ u^ ^uy •-'^ «iJ^j^ wj»
,^ 4:^-1* (,^ jjb ^^u cy> ^^ ciiii; ^i^ ^j^ ^j^; c^ir j^^ jj ^u
wvj -|;f« -u*- «!$:• ^^ clJj*^ ^ f>^ ^1 ^\^ *-:-fcl« (i>^ *i{A» C^ ,j^«j
^G' J jLj ^^1 LJj jJb cyljiJ jj^^o fcl tt,y t^j— w'^i tt^d^ V»> (J^ J^ ^1»
-^W* Ls* t/j'ij*'*^* t^j=^ c^y ^""^ *-^ '"'^ ^^.r"^ itf^ y^' '^ y;i^-««*»j 4jC>1>
j^A|}^4^ jjofc li-^ jlX»- ^1 r jil^ ^_j\ ^J^Ji Ji^ (Jle *U cyU ^-b jj,^1;
164
A GRAMMAR OF THE
CU^ ^ CX* ^\i ^^i\J ^\ji* uyl? lJ^ ^j\ ^i^ J^y. i^ ^ y lJ^
ti '^'^^ cf^ urJ' 't^J^ •i)}' i>3-"^ ^^^ ijH y ^r^ uj'j ^A^ -^ cr^iT*^}'^
t^l j(j-- ^^^ ^ LUj^ ^^— ij J3 ti-j) jjjj t^jiiS ^^y J-bIj cJ^ (^U'K
(ijjK u-ol* wj*!".' y fc^-* '^W'^ ji»**^* i^ u;=^ '^J''^
" It was not long before the young Queen Mandu Derrei became
pregnant, and when the usual period had elapsed, she was delivered of a
female child whose features were exquisitely beautiful, and her complexiui
like that of the purest gold. Whoever beheld the infant was filled with
astonishment. Orders were then given by Maharaja Raiuana to summon
his brother Maharaja BHisanam (Vivishana), together with all the
astrologers and diviners, that they might examine the horoscope, and
ascertain whether the future destinies of the child were to be happy or
miserable. *' See you, my lords (said he), that this business be carefully
performed, and that nothing is concealed from me." Upon this, Maharaja
Bibisanam (who was himself deeply skilled in the occult sciences), as
well as the other astrologers, consulted tlieir books, and having so done,
they all shook their heads, " Wherefore, inquired the monarch, do my
lords all shake their heads ? " " O king of the world ! (replied the
wise men), your servants were proceeding to make their report, though
under feelings of strong apprehension lest they should offend your
majesty; and they beg your majesty to be pei-siiaded that what they shall
declare is not the work of their own fancies, but discovered from the
horoscope,
MALAYAN LANGUAGE.
>65
horoscope, and which your servants dared not to hide." Maharaja
Raxvana then said, " Be not afraid, neither conceal any thing, but make
known to me the resuh of your inspection." " Allow us then, O king of
the world I {answered the astrologers) to throw ourselves at the feet of your
majesty, and humbly to solicit pardon when we pronounce that the
fortunes of this royal infant will be eminendy happy, and that the
personage who shall obtain her in marriage will soon become the sovereign
of all the kingdoms of the earth, aud no one in this world whom the gods
have created shall exceed him in valour and might." " If such be the
case (said Maharaja Rawana), to what purpose should a little wretch
like this be suffered to live? It will be best to dash it against the stones,
and thus deprive it of life in the speediest manner." Upon hearing this
the queen exclaimed, " O Maharaja Razcana, can tlie king of the world
have the heart to see the brains of the infant scattered on the Boor ? If
it must be put to death, there are many other (less cruel) modes of effecting
it." " In what manner then (said Rawana to his queen) should you
advise that it be destroyed?" " Let us, my lord [answered the queen],
cause a cofhn to be made for it, and let this coffin be cast into the sea."
The king expressed his consent, and immediately gave orders to skilful
artists, for t!ie construction of an iron coffin. When it was completed and
presented to Maharaja Rawana, the queen directed that it should be
lined with folds of gold muslin. She then took the child to her breast
and suckled it ; and having so done, with many tears, delivered it to the
nurses and female attendants, in order to its being placed in the iron coffin ;
which the king commanded his brother to commit to the deep. This was
accordingly put into execution ; but by the interposition of the deities, the
coffin floated on the sea.
U u i<^
)
t66 A GRAMMAR OF THE
• ••••••••«
A«^ <1«!j -do-i (^jlf^ **«-- ijjjwl dl^ ,*;Srf^ (l^««rf cyjH JIji^ ^^Jy j^! ^c^^W
♦-^j^ J^ i/jV» <^> ^r* «^ ^"^*» ^^ «^ '-»^> «/^ «A»^ J'^J" ^ tirfj^
oJb c,--» u^J s^j>>-«-y v/ '^^ji JS dir-^ J^^;^ .^' Cl^ J^^ tf^
^Ji^ ^j:J Cfi jjy Ji y\j t^y sfj^-s^ ^" »i«-i^ c;*!^ <-**< i^ t* *r*
«1^ cs^l j^b-1 j2li ds f^y vVjJ J'' *^y (•** «Hl^ t) *^ t5^V« «;>- tl/'«
4j,U| ^ ^ Jb\ Jhji JIaj ^IjJ Jji izijL. ^\L, ,^ y^ »jjj: iL.j »0«
C^ J^'j! ^^ «i^ «i--j d^ a; «b>- 4j,jJ J^ ^^jle- *li^ t/*- «=-^-'
lJ\^ IJi cij^j ^\ ^:^) j^ ^\^ ^\ J^ C^ jfL{ ^ ^^ csJUl e;*Jb-o
tt^ c/i/r^ J ^:^^ *^ ^^ i^^'« U-jJ «;>» ^jS «JU\ j:d ^ ^-U. u^b
^< It happened that at this period a certain JRajaj named Maharishi
Kala was in the daily habit of performing penance, which consisted in
going down at an early hour to the sea-side, and immerging himself to the
waist, while he adored the (rising) sun. As soon as it attained its
meridian height, he regained the shore, and returned to his palace.
During the whole of his reign he had been in the uninterrupted practise
of this penance. One morning when he was thus perfonning his devotions
in the water it chanced that the iron coffin came, with the rdling motion
of the waves, towards his feet. As soon as the day's penance was
completed.
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 167
completed, he gave directions to his people to draw it to ihe shore, and
this being done, he perceived it to be an iron coffin of most curious work*
manship. He then had it conveyed to the palace, and calling his wife,
said to her, " My queen, behold this chest of iron which I have found ;
what, I wonder, may be its contents." The queen drew near, and the]^
both sat down beside it. Upon its being opened by the command of the
king, a vivid light issued from it, that shone through all the palace;
They then perceived within the chest a lovely female infant, whose
complexion was like burnished gold, and her conntenance resplendent as
the full moon. Nothing in those days could equal the beautiful symmetry
of her features."
^jio c:^ ^jsJ UH.1 rji\i ^5Ut• Ji JiJ^ jiU ^,jJ J^ ^/> uX. cujl *L-
«!-^ ^1} ii,)ti-*J C^ ^jSjS ^Ji jiV ^ ^j^ ^^y ^^i u:,^- ^" d^ ^L*
J^.ji 'i^ d)^j ip} J^J^^j^ Ji^ tj^ •>< J^ J L)j ^U JL, ^ ^yJiJ
»tf jU Jj>f4 t^jci^ ^ J^^<^j ^•i^ y^ ^'^ \^ «-»W- tji ^ J^j «^
jjjjk "^jji jAi cs^ j^ yjjjo ji^ e)W <«J*'^'> fci^ i/*- <^ tt^^ '^^ y^
^r^ oy s^** jSl4- c--^ JdV r-i ^J iP^ ^^ J^ t/> "^ *^ t'"''»
i68
A GRAMMAR OF THE
" Raja Maharishi upon this immediately descended from the palace,
and taking forty seeds of the lonlar palm tree {borassui JiabeUifera)
planted them in a row. " To that person (said he), who shall be ahle
to shoot an arrow through the forty stems of these palm trees (when they
have attained their full growth), will I bestow the hand of this my
daughter in marriage." This done he returned to the palace and gave to
the infant the name of PuirJ Sila Dcxvl. In proportion as she advanced
in years the charms of her person increased. Her name became cele-
brated in all regions, and fame widely reported ihat the beauty of the
daughter of Raja Maliarishl surpassed that of every other princess of
the age. AH who beheld her were lavish in her praise, and no eyes
could be satiated with the contemplation of her charms. By the time she
had reached her twelfth year she had many suitors amongst the sons of the
most powerful sovereigns of the surrounding countries, who were anxious
to obtain the hand of the princess Sila Dĕwi. To these Maharishi
repeated his declaration that she should become the prize of him who
could shoot an arrow through the forty palm trees which he had planted
in a row. Upon hearing this condition the princes all assembled with the
intention of exercising their respective skill in archery; but Maharishi
thought it necessary in the first place to ascertain from ihem, what princes
were present, and who (that might be expected] were absent. " Those
who are present, answered they, we know, but of others we know
nothing." " 1 am not aware, said the king, of any prince who has
failed to appear, excepting only the son of Dasarata Maharaja, and
being the son of so great a monarch it is incumbent on me to invite him.
Have the patience, my lords, to await my return." MahHrashJ imme-
diately proceeded on his journey to Alandii-puru-rwgara, and after some
time reached the capital of that country. i^J^
470 A GRAMMAR OF THE
yLy?- J J J>iJ jU« <LL^ ^JJ^\ CS^ ^ ^, ^ J^ Jjr4 Ji' ^j
izJi uiU JU^ Ur-»* c;y CJ'O «-^ ^j*« ^j*^i *^ U^ d'^-*!^}'^ JJ tJU
4j^ j^ jii:»^ s-*» JJ^ '^^ "^^«i u^ 'iV" «--*» j¥ «^ cM^ «J^^ wy*^' sT^V-
^^ (JU *b ,^:i ti '^•» >^ J^ •--*» ti (»!; si[;- '^^ S-** u/' ^ «Ar-
J!^JU ^\ 4aJb c^J ^l^ ^r> ^\^i^P c^ cA^ c;^ «^W'jV «^-k* -«Jf^
,.}; 4?^ vl^- tt^' ^W sO- r^ ^jy^ ^^ «i^^ S'**» "^ L>^ ^>*
fcJb yy 1*1; i^^ CJyr "^ CSisL, ^ ^ jSU» ^ ojj^o *,j-J ij,j»
•^' ^5&;W* ^^ t;y «i-^ «1^*1 ^,fc «^ĕjJ u»y •5iV '^^'J u^ x^ a;«\ <JjI»*
jjlc jb ^^j rfsgJ jj;P4> ijC?- f>\, g?;- <u«w uiU j^Ufi ^J,y 4' ttj^/ u'*?:;^
y^i^ y ^j uJjU- *tJb c/^ jL, j^jic-u ^ ^*b- .j;^ iiiiU cJy^ »^^1^
uX« ^];«Xi«» c;^ <-^-6f* ^--6^ J""^^ (^U^ (^y ^Ums! clJU (^yU;S ^^ ^b ^];f«
^ c^ ^} r^^ '''e^*^ rl^^ "^ J^^y ^J^ ^ i^>^ J^ ^^ ^
(^b ^r" d?W ^-^ "M/ ^-^ u^*-^ «-^. ^5=^ ui^ H^J^ (J'*^ -5I? *^
^^ It was announced to Dasarata by his officers, that Mahoj^ishi Kala
was arrived from the country of Derut'perwa in order to obtain an
audience of his majesty, the king of the world. As soon as Dasarata
received this information he instantly went forth to welcome the stranger,
and met him at the gate of the castle* . Having embraced and kissed each
other, Maliarishi was conducted into the palace, where they sat down
together. Dasarata then inquired what object had induced Maharisid
to undertake so long a journey, and when the latter had made him fully
acquainted with every circumstance, he gave directions for callix^ to
his presence two of his sons, who were named Baradan (Bharata), and
C/iatradan
MALAYAN LANGUAGE; 171
Chatradan (Satrughna). Upon their making their appearance he said to
them, " Go, ray sons, in the company of Maharishi^ and perform
whatever he shall require of you/' Ma^idrishij after paying the usual
compliments, descended from the palace and took his departure, aloi^
with the two brothers. When they had got without the gate, MaharislU
addressed them in these words : '^ The journey to my dominions, O my
sons, may be performed by four different routes. One road will require,
only seventeen days travelling, another twenty, the thirds twenty-five»
and the fourth, forty days. On the road requiring seventeen days there
dwells a female rakshasUj named Chakm, of a size so enormous, that for
her pillow she makes use of a hill. During the reign of Brahma nga
he repeatedly sent armies of hundreds of thousands, with orders to put
her to death, but they could not accomplish it. In these days also
Maharaja Rawana has sent his warriors to summon her to his presence,^
and upon her refusal has employed means to destroy her ; but the result
was her seizing and devouring many thousands of his trooops. In the
road requiring twenty days there is a rhinoceros named Agnl Ganda^
whose bulk is like a mountain, and his hide is rough as the coat of the
nangka (artocarpus integrifolia). The road requiring twenty-five days ia
infested by a monstrous snake named Sula Naklriy the length of whidi is
one thousand three hundred cubits, and when he exhales his breath all
the trees and herbs are scorched as if consumed by fire. With regard to
the remaining road, which requires forty days to travel it, the journey is
not attended with any danger whatever. Now, my young men, which
of these routes do you think it best for us to pursue?" To this the brof
there replied, ^* We think it most advisable to pursue the route of forty
days, aa it ]§ free froin every kind of danger." Upon hearing this answer,
Mahdrishi
J 72
A GRAMMAR OF THE
Mahdrishi said to himself, " These youths are evidently not suited to my
purpose, and the best thing I can do is take them back to ihelr father."
He accordingly returaed and presented them to Dasarala, who inquired
the occasion of seeing him (so soon) again. " I have had reason (answered
Mafidrishi) to form an opinion that these two princes would prove unequal
to the performance of what I should require of them. If it be your
majesty's inclination to do me kindness, you will gratify me in allowing '
your son Sri Hama to accompany me. Any other of your sons it will
be in vain for me to take, as they are not calculated to support the high .
reputation of your majesty. Your son Si'i Rama, on the contrary, will
fulfil my expectations, and add celebrity to his father's name." Sri Rama
was accordingly sent for, and upon making bis appearance, Dasarata
said to him, " Proceed my son, along with Mahaiishi, and what he shall
reqliire of thee, do thou execute." " If it he your majesty's command,
answered Rama, I am ready to obey ; but (the object of ray jouiney being
fulfilled) I shall immediately return to the presence of your illustrious
majesty." Having said this, he threw himself at the feet of his royal
father, and took his leave of him and his mother. Laksamana, his
brother, expressed a wish to accompany him ; but Dasarata and the queen
would not consent to part with him. Upon this Laksamana wept, and
still urged for permission to go with his (beloved) brother. " Do not,
said the father, persist in leaving us; but consider that in the absence of
your cider brother, you must supply his place in your mother's sight."
The queen, however, being affected by his tears, consented to his bearing
his brother company ; " For, said she, were he even lo remain, he would
not (on his father's death) succeed to the throne of this kingdom;"
(in preference to one of the sons by another wife, for whom Dasarata
designed
MALAYAN LANGUAGE, 173
designed it). Laksatnana accordiDgly set out along with his brolhtr
Sri Rama.
*iyS ts^ ^^} J\ '^lo ^J^J)\ ,^j^ [Jb /J ^^_jJ (.Ij ^j^ t^. "^ji: ^^U tiJjl-
l^ (•!/ '/-T' U^^'* iJJ*=y^ c-^ ^^^ C/^Ji^l *^jjl CUlS J^ i-Ji ^;AJ ^jMj
yyl^ iSA ^\ iljU JJ jjifl /il LiS* ^.1 ^^_,L.^ jJ'lii/i^ ^^US jAift jy, ^jjl ^
r jiS: jV yy u^ «^ c:^^/ j^' u'j^^ J |JL. Jt- ^ ^jj! c::i^ yl^ ^1
i^'^ *^^ ,»W i-Jt-' -Jr L'j' ^jS* liff^ '^'^ «"^^ "^^-i' I*!» ^Ar* ti-'^j*-= t— --
ty^ ci'i ^ ti ^!; jil jCt c^f J^ ^Ji ^jj jLJ i^b f.\x, ^^ L_-«,
jU t^l (.]_, ^^j- ti.-lS ts^ ^j\ /1\ A^J CS) J.W1. /Al J^ j^jUjj Jy d-jvj
Jl^ J^ ^ ^[, (^ ^y^i .**i tS^lS^ (-Jljj tlS'liJj^ jSlil <i£\juj ^^ i::j^j (j^il
(►^t^T yU di'it- c/as^ ciri'/*^ '-j'' ''i^'V ^/^ '^I'J ti *^> ^j'-^ dr?^ cS^
^ alijjJjj ^^ ^^ |.^ ^^ lJS ȣ^
'/ When -S;i Rama arrived at the habitation of the rakshasa or
giantess named Chaktn, whose size was like that of a mountain, he found
her still asleep. He said to himself, " This monster being a female, if
I should kill her in her sleep, what will the world say of me ?" He
then proceeded to awake her. She started, and upon seeing Rama at
the foot of her couch, she cried out, " Ho ! young man, whither art
thou gping ; and what is the occasion of thy coming hither? If it be thy
Y y intentien
»74 A GRAMMAR OF THE
intention to pass onward, go thy way." Rama replied, ^^ My object
in coming to this place is to put thee to death, I was just now about to
kill thee in thy sleep, had I not reflected on what mankind would think
of such an (ii^lorious) act; considering also that thou art a female.'*
Upon bearing these words ftoai Rama^ the giantess laughed heartily, and
taidt ^^ What is thy name, young man ?'* '' I am Sri Rama^ answered
he, the son of Dasarata Mahar^a^' ^^ I feel great compasftion for thee,
said she, both on accocnt of thy youth and the comeliness of thy person,
aa well as on account of thy being the son of a powerful king^ illustrious
in his descent, and respected for bis Txrtues» Whithersoever it is thy
wish to go, proceed forthwith.*' ^* From the spot where I am,, answered
Rama^ I shall not move, until with this hand I have put thee to death.**
'* O son of Dasarata Maharaja, said she, hast thou not heard the fame
of my prowess, not only in the eariy days of Brahma R^a, hut also in
these o£ Maharaja Raxvana^ who ordered his innumerable armies, to
attack me, and which I put to flight, devouring by hundtedi such of his
people as came withia my grasp. What then canst thou be to rat, and
what are thy pretensions to superior valour ^" To this Sri Rama made
no other reply than desiring her to stand up and defend herself.'* (The
circumstances of the combat, in which the female rakshasa, of course, is
slain, resemble those which we have read in the Arabian Tales.)
Ur^U JJ;? *jW ^jp\ isS^ cuo' ttr?^*> uih} e^W ^'^ ^ uh '^j^ r*^
J&fL.^ J^^ J\ u^o\ C/]^ ^ ^jij ^ji< ^^ v£iU' Jjj J) iZ^jU
4^j! yj^ ^^y ^"^ C^ •^ ^^ ^^ ilSis^ ^^} ^ ^ J^^tr^
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 175
^ V /i< ^} J'> j^ ^ o»*t, y;^t '^^jL ^ ^b t^» ^ JV56U jU
tzX/i^ u^l ^Uj, 43^ ,*;«-jy JfiAba ^Js^ riAJi,Ji ^i*j (>iy>^^\,^^ i^x>
u>^ wjI; ;?!;«* <^ J**«* f*l; •^r' **a; ts:>^ *^S? u>j* «s>^ «^ uji; gj;»*
0^ 4^jij ia--- tt*i^ ii^ ^^ji^ u-«- A^ is-feb vi^ r^f>y 4j,u r«-^- y;^ yi
il^ «^ji«> c::-}- <^ ^>V iaMJ^y* ^^ u;!^* (*i> «Ar-^r* dij? .*^^ t?y
uw dJS>^ e>Jf J*^ ^W w^*-^ ***•»' s;» ^pJ^>«!-^ «y^ *^ y>? w-^ ^
i_J J^ yi/ *J^ J^ J- ^*» i^'** ^Iji** c»^-**?-'* VJ^ ^V< Jy "^^ fi»
«-j»V 'Jjy; tt^i^ ^^. c^»» ^y ju r^i d;^^ ^j^. ji^j c^)i ^^^
^yj^
tj6
A GRAMMAR OF THE
«jtJb liU |»1; jjFr" "^ J<? yU-jJ ii^ uX« ^j\ o-jI Jci^ ^^Ai^ J^ «il^
vl^^Lfj ^M «Ht^ J^ c^ JJ*5 c:^^ Wo (Jb -td ^t'-b jL.yb 't^y ^*UJo
j^-^J tyli ui^ 4; s-^ jU? c^W *^j\L. jc ^U- ^^ 4i^\^^ j^/j C^
Jy. ui^ cr*^ *^"^ WJ»**^ «^'> J/^ C^^ «-*J^ «iV «^"^ •»» 'J^ J!;'" '^y
^ tlWy eA/^> el» «//^ "^ '-*^^ wy*^ "^-^ ^J* cJi* t^^ ^"^ ti '^J'" u^'
Ujj ^p ^j,o JUjjc 4^-b j^jS wjI, ^ il^ jj^jV tl^S ,4«^ ^\^ jU?
>«^ i/ tt>ji> -^A* "^ «^^ */>i«» «i^s- ^X) tr*^** •Aii'^je s^^ J* «^ wW
«iSljj j| olJ tj,j» cy|j- jjjUfc;* ^^ i/^j tf-s- ijJi CJ^ ftb}i\ *i^ 4i^ ^j^ c:^ J'
u>y •/>l'> «i-s- fcl^ v/^ eJs^'J fcs-d^ u,^»? cyK >^ ^^^ ^ J-*l^ j»*^l jjj
A^iU t-*** «Jb aU ^^JiJ ct---. ^^ Jaaj tul^ ^liC* yUj» a» *^y jj/j^ai*
\jl ^V^V J uL^ Ait^ d;*U> jO ^Jif ttjj» «i^Ji*» ^^s-f- *^ ^^ S-<* b;^**"
cA^ s^^:; *^y j^ J u-j> *5uu d^-\j «uJb ou y> ^^/.^jii *LJV^
*' Upon Maftarija RawanaU hearing the cdrnpIaTnt of Ihs sister (dial:
her
MALAYAN LANGUAGE.
herTa'ce had been mutilated) his wrath was kindled like a flame of fire,
and he exclaimed, " O, my sister, is it thus that Laksamana displays hli
manhood and his valour against a woman ? If he really wishes to give
proofs of his courage, let him exert it against men who will oppose him
with equal strength and resolution. Then, indeed, (and not till then) he
may boast of manly qualities. He has no sister, but Srt Rama has a
wife, and upon her will I avenge myself for the injury your person has
sustained from his brother." (He had cut off" her nose by accident.)
" liawana instantly gave orders for calling two of his attendant j'ci-
shasas, who had both the form of dogs, and directed them to bring his
chariot. Having mounted it, he crossed over from Lajigka-purt, and la
a short time reached the main land. One of the rakshusas he instructed
to assume the appearance of a golden, and the other, of a silver roe.
" Proceed both of you, said he, to the ground before the dwelling of
Sri Rama, and there play and skip about." In obedience to the com-
mand of their master, they went towards the house, whilst Raxoana
himself followed the two roes in his chariot When they reached the
space in front of the house, they began to bound and skip until they
attracted the attention oi Sua Dewi, who said to Rama, " I beg of thee,
my lord, to catch me those two (beautiful) roes." " As to catching
them alive, answered Rama, it is out of my power, but if you wish it, I
will shoot them with my bow." " By no means, replied Stta ; it is not
my object to possess them dead, as it is for my amusement I want them."
Rama, taking with him his bow, descended from the house, and calling
to Laksamana said to him, " Remain at home, my brother, for the pro-
tection of your sister Sila DcwT, whilst I go in chace of those two roes."
Laksamana promised he would, and Rama went in pursuit of them.
Z I. As
178
A GRAMMAR OF THE
As he followed, they ran from him, and when lie was drawn to a con-
siderable distance from the dwelhng, Maharaja Rnwana concealed him-
self behind some trees, and counterfeiting the voice of Rama, cried out
for assistance. Sita hearing the noise said to Laksamuna, " Hearken,
my brother, to the sound of your elder brother's voice calling for assist-
ance." *' O 1 my lady, said Laksamana, do not pay attention to noises
of this kind." Upon a repetition of the cry for help, Stta again said,
" It is beyond all doubt the voice of your brother who stands in need of
your aid." " Pray do not listen to these noises, repeated Laksainana.
My brother Sri Rama is of all men whom tlie gods have created in this
world, the least likely to call out in that manner. Even when engaged
in combat with mighty warriors, whose size equalled that of mountains,
he never was known to call to any person living for assistance ; and can
it be supposed that he should now require it on account of a couple of
deer?" " Notwithstanding this, replied Sita, I earnestly recommend
your going immediately to the relief of your elder brother, who U in some
kind of difficulty." " O 1 princess, answered Laksamaiia, my brother
left me here expressly for the purpose of giving protection to your high-
ness, and can your servant possibly stir from hence ? Should any accident
befall your highness during my absence, your servant would appear highly
criminal in the eyes of his beloved brother." The cry for help was once
more heard. " Is it my brother's wish, exclaimed Sita, that his brother
Rama should perish? It is my opinion that you should instantly go and
find him out." " My brother Sri Rama, he replied, is not only exempt
from any injury that inan can do to him, but the verj- beasts of the earth
bow down before him. To what species of danger then can he be ex-
posed, that should require the aid of your servant; who would at the
same
r
MALAYAN LANGUAGE.
»79
same time feel the strangest apprehension and anxiety, were he to leave
your highness unprotected?" " Now, cried the princess, I perceive
what are your views. You wait the death of Srt Rama, that you may
then possess yourself of his wife," L.aksttrnuna upon hearing these words
from Situ Dĕwt, answered with tears ; " Now, indeed, it is impossible
that I should do otherwise than go, Jn order to disprove a charge against
me so entirely unfounded, and by which my feelings are so deeply
wounded. That I weep, however, is not the effect of this reproach, but
of my being obliged to neglect the trust reposed in me by Srt Rama when
he committed your highness to my care " He then described a circle
round the house, marking the ground with his finger, and pronouncing
at the same time these words : " O! earth, receive from me (my sister)
Sita Dĕwi, as a sacred deposit. Whoever shall overstep this hne, do
thou swallow him up." This precaution taken, Lahanidna set out with
four attendants. When he was at such a distance from Slra Dcwi as to
be no longer within hearing, Maharaja Sawana drew near, in the dis-
guise of a Brahman, and standing in the walk before the house, said
aloud, " 1 daughter-in-law of Dasarala Maharjja, bestow upon mc
thy alms." To which she replied, " I have nothing, my good Brahman,
to offer thee, excepting this flower in my hand, which is at thy service."
" O ! princess Sita Dcwl, said he, whatsoever thou deignest to bestow,
I shall accept." Upon hearing these words from the holy man, she
reached out the flower towards him, when he said, " O * Stta Dcwl, it
is not in my power to overstep this (magic) line of Laksamana- If
thou art disposed to treat me with indulgence and favour, thou wilt thy-
self reach it to my hand." Stta thereupon descended the steps of the
Itouse, to the ground before it, and held out the flower to the Brahman^
who
i8o A GRAMMAR OF THE
who again said, " If your highness may so far condescend, oblige thy
servant, O ! princess, by extending it beyond the line of the circle, it
being impossible for thy servant to transgress that boundary, and great
will be the religious .merit of freeing me from the restriction it imposes."
Sita Dĕm then, standing within the circle, but extending her arm beyond
it, presented the flower to the (pretended) Brahman^ who suddenly seized
her by the hand, and carried her with him into the air."
*JtJ ^^^ iju-- JiAo Jj CSiy ^j^\ J\ »t- jU ^U* Jj. Ij^\ CSJy\i ^
fcjV «^ (•W* fc» ^:p»^ "^1» 4j^ dr^y ** (*ry^ d^' JV ii>>**y L^>- jW
*^^^ (ji^ ^J* ^*^ J** «r»'^' U-' •-r-*-^ uuj J^J. ^ \ah/ J^ "^ r^ '^
j^J^J^ il^ j*V ^j> ^\j ^j^ cy\^ iliU ^ yb pJb J ^jiJ ^ cU y^
«i^ >b *j-- jJI^ j^jij^ ^Ufc C^ cLsSy ^Jj jj^ Ji^jby, cJiU cliV'i ^V
^1> s^j*' '"^ uX« ^;)^ «/jV^ (*V^ <^ i^lLi^b ly u:^\ <xa^ Lj^ i^V^jt^
/il jl^ J-j^ fcs^" Uh e^J ^ joc^ eJ^. JjjJ /it ,/-*yK jliU. j^V i/
jAii, ^.^ Jijj ^U ^j* J^ ^^ lj\i .AijI ^sfc fSj 4^y- CJI^ lUU ^^j J^-
*' The kuig (in the course of his travels- for die purpose of giunii^
intelligence
MALAYAN LANGUAGE.
intelligeDce of Siia) met with a stork which was drinking at the side of
a lake, and inquired of the bird whether it had seen any thing of his
wife, Sita Deivl, who had been carried away from him. To this the
stork replied : " As to your honour's wife, my young lord, your humUe
servant knows nothing of her, nor is he acquainted with the name of
Stta Dĕwl ; but when your servant was taking a drink of water from this
lake, happening to cast his eye towards the heavens, he beheld Maha-
raja Rawana conveying a beautiful young woman through the air, in bis
flying chariot. This is what your servant saw, hut who the young person
was, he is quite ignorant. She wore a dress of a crimson colour, worked
with gold, and two or three pieces torn from it, she let fall into the lake
(as she passed over it)." ** O stork, cried Rama, from you it is I first
hear tidings of my wife. Tell me dow what rewsu'd you claim from me,
that I may invoke the deities to grant tlie boon." " Your slave, replied
the stork, makes bold to request of your highness, that when he has
taken his sund in one lake, his neck may be extended to a length suf-
ficient to reach four others, that he may be enabled the more easily to
provide himself with food." " My good stork, said Rama, if 1 inter-
cede to have your wish granted, you may, I fear, have cause before long
to repent of the consequences." " My lord, said Lahamdna, if the
Beck of the ttork be lengthened in that manner, he will certainly be
taken in a noose." '* Brother, answered Rama, his wish, whatever it
be, I must obtain for Iiim. The blame is not mine." Rama thea
uttered a prayer, and instantly the neck of the stork grew to the length
desired. As eoon as the two princes had taken their departure, there
came a boy to the lak« to fish, who perceiving the neck of a bird sq
< A a a enormously
i82 A GRAMMAR OF tHĔ
enormously long as to resemble a huge snake, threw a noose over it, and
thus catching the stork, led it away to jnarket, for sale."
vlXo 4j,!.Afi «t-J^ y^\»;e ^^l *A- 4a«i ^W bjUyjb »_,mj> jbj-. j;Jl ^l* i,^„ai» ^^
;^ 4j1^ vl^- e»l^ yJjS Jl^- Aiy iLi^ ^^} C^ \ijiLAi j^jJ ^j^ »^j- Jis
'wj* (*1> «At» '^ u-^l *^ ^jAi^jA fjj^'jf* f>)j t/j-> u^ ii^ey j-a^ yU-A
j»b sO-» cP**»^** «1^ *^ dr^ «/*-• d=^ UJ»^' ^1; Mi «^^ »>>• «-JV i*)^-
y^i'i Jicyii ^j a 'j}\ ^j LL jii yJi'j Ji>i3i^^r> wM jij^j- cr-"''j
' H When 5r? Aamn heard these (conciliatory) words from Balia-rqjn
he attempted to take back from his hand the arrow (be had shot at him),
which the latter would not give up to him,' but afterwards threw it on
the ground. The (enchsuited and unerring) weapon thereupon took a
.; i , \ Bight
MALAYAN language:
flight into the air, and in its descent pierced the breast of this king (of
the monkey tribes). He grasped the hand of Rama, placed it to his
wounded breast, and then raised it to his eyes. " Rama, said he, I
have two dying requests to make to you. The one is that you do not
give my wife to (my brother) Sugiiva, and the second that you will take
my children under your protection. With regard to Sugrlva you will
not find his qualities of advantage to you, for his word is not to be
trusted; but the person from whom you may expect useful service is the
9on of another of my brothers, named Hanuman." Having spoken
these words he let go the hand of Rama, and immediately died. At
the moment of the departure of hia spirit, a vivid light was seen to issue
from the crown of his head, in the form of a palm tree, and to ascend to
the skies. Rama gave orders to Sugiiva to support the body, and
Laksamana to wash it, whilst he himself poured the water for the pur-
ixwe. This being done, he commanded them to bring wood of aloes, and
sandal wood, and camphor, and saffron, and amber, and spikenard; and
with the assistance of Laksamana he burned the corpse of BaUa-raja (on
the piie). When this ceremony was perfoimed, he proceeded along
with LaksamaTia and Sugrwa to the palace of the deceased. Upon this
occasion every individual of the monkey kind, small and great, harmless
and mischievous, old and young, seated themselves in the presence of Sri
Rama. Among these was one aged monkey, named Palah Jambun-,
the younger brother of Batia-raja's father, whose venerable beard reached
to his waist. Him Sn Rama (now become the regulator of the con-
quered state and sovereign disposer of honours) seated above Sugrivo^
placing SugTtva above the sons of Balia-raja, and these above the other
monkies assembled." . ■
1JB4
A GRAMMAR OF THE
1^1^ A;.^.^ ^bjj ^^y u^-i^ w^J lif'^i;; f-^ liP^' ij'^— ^ J'' tj'-i^^ ni^>* w'*!>;
^j ij\acU JUS |.lj ^_;- J^jiT^ JJ ^s>'^ ;/*--^ Jj-' I* Wt- s/^ "" ^->?^
t/_pi tulS kliU J^.' '^'i i-=--r" j^V*-* uj''' i^y iJ** t?^?^ (jrJ^ 1-^'^ i^'*-
J^, JO jjjl ^^ j-ifcil ji;tj.! A; i.:-^! j^jij ^jji ^j:^^ t^^/ 'JJt'l O^ (JjU |.1;
ti C^ ^/i^l^ li!pJ^ t-/-^- ***^ 4^^ tj^ JV till Uj ^Ji J^ ^jy^ Li^ i)lAj
jL. iJjit jLj j^U ^^b i;>V^ Ln^ t^'l'j Ji i^b tjjl ^^U- u>.j| ^jL J!j
*,L^ Jj tiJjS uJ^jj ^J j:i j^U- ^jb jjIjc- ^/IC ^^Ui« ^\>. Jj fc^^^j
- i^j=*" J-rJ^ tiu'S '^^'j» '
-i/> u^ tK'.V ti j^
•^W-'' \J^ ^^' li''"' ^ilV^ liT*^ LT^J '^'^^ tf^-^J ti jjV lij'j tjjl t^lSj it)^V
l^ ^ jjj) J^ dl,_
S AiJ ^ Jj M^\ ,
■J^j^.
*-. f^j^'j" |^j~-> i^b Li^ij s^j^ iJ^ s^^ ^'L'y '^'^' '^■^■-'^ (jd^ >».-4ia u:JtS uP"^'
i_ijuft ^J^V i^^ t^ j»^ jjej ti-"U ^}Al i,
M'^li
*> t^y r^ t/^^ ii^ ■ "^^
iU- ^eliw Jo
ILI^W
fcir^L^
" Sri Rama conducted his two younger brothers, Bardan (Bharata)
and Chctradan (Salrughna) into the fort, and then to the palace, where
be sat down with them and Laksamana. Having made their salutation
and prostrated themselves at the feet of Riima, they tendered to him the
kingdom {bequeathed to them by their father), and urged him to return
and assume the government ; " in order, said they, that we and the resl|
of your subjects may have the opportunity of doing homage to your
highness.
MALAYAN LANGUAGE.
■85
highness, and tliat we may perform together the ceremony of burning
the corpse of our beloved father," To this Rama replied in the follow-
ing words. " Why, my brothers, do you address me in this manner,
Bince our father has already bestowed upon you the sovereignty of the
kingdom? My sentiments are, tliat his is the inheritance on whomso-
ever the father confers it; and that if we disobey his will, we assuredly
forfeit all pretensions to virtue and its rewards. This world, v/e must
recollect, is not to he eternal, nor to become the property of one indivi-r
dual ; and it should be our object to leave a good name by acting jusdy,
and making a proper distinction between right and wrong. Seat your-
selvesj my brothers, in the government of the kingdom, and whilst upon
the throne do not be supine and indifierent to its duties. Do not fail to
•ihew kindness to the army, and do not suffer any kind of oppression to
the people in general. Neglect not to build forti&catlons and to provide
a store of arms. Do not, my brothers, avoid tlie occasions of consulting
with your ministers and the commanders of your troops upon every kind
of business or operation. Wholesome advice you will follow, and evil
counsel you will lay up in your minds; for when ministers are wicked^
their evil acts are imputed by the public to their sovereign. Whenever
you pronounce judgment let it be done after full investigation of the truth.
Remember (that you are in the presence of) the deities. Take care to
preserve the shrine of our father, and with regard to my mother, I leave
her as a sacred deposit in your bands. Shew her due reverence. That
kingdom which your father designed for you, is now, my brothers, your
own possession. Attend to the admonitions I give you, in order that it
may be durable, that you may enjoy tranquillity, and that the memory of
B b b oOf
i86 A GRAMMAR OF THE
our venerable ancestors may not be disgraced. Better is it. to die with
•* ■ ■
reputation than to live under reproach."
^ (J>> ji^ i^yk (-s^V* k)^^ *-^\f'^ (^"1^ u>jb i>U ^^ u^^ ^^^^^^
^ ^t ^l^\i iiy JL. uJb cyU tl^-i; jL* jdcA yb dJSU *}j-4^ jJl:* jj^:; J
ua^«» uy!^ ^>> J.4b- J^ C/s\i ^ yii JU^jJ ^i^\ Ji oJ ^j, ^^1
^b»ti ui^-^ *^V fcliC* ti^ jU jL- jj^J jj,U^ *iy jJS ^V'> 'eJj' e^^jl^
J*^^ utf*il«il^ «-4< S^ji»» «!-9- «^ ttrf'^ «-** *;jj- w>!; ^!;f u>S** ^j'
^ *14«< ^/V'» «^ tt^j^ «^^ <i?*« *J5^V" w»!; t!;*- «^ *^ cjts- ^5S!>J«>
,b ^Ua t,/r/i>« (i£/^ ^jL> t^ '^ ta.UJl<
cA^ yU^ 4^\^j yrfU yJU ^1}4»i ks-^t
C^\i C^y *li> ^jM ^y CSiik ^^ tl^ sFji.> u:-;-- A« t^J t^ jj,U^
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 187
j-^ y. uW-* Lj* L-'j^ '^'^'' r''' *^-'^ '-^>' 1*^ '^'^ "^^^" '^^'^ t-J^ ijir-*'
J '^W" j^^- f]j u5/- tii''^ *j^ iu;^--; j^ r^u ^UjiA ^_^ yjS^ ju jy^ ^ji
i ilfU C5^
fltjp ,
1, c:j|j LiA*^ j>\ iHL^ii
S^'Hr*
a ^j}j UL,^ JL-ij LX* Jy^J I
1 j.^;*- (jiS Jj Jj*-
L-Ji.>- jjjSr ^'li *i^.ii jUjj i^^y v^ J3 s^jiJ ^ ju iS j^ |^,y ^io^*
J yjjj ^^Ij t.i-^1 iiJl A;..*^ t-^l^
Jj*f 1^1 J5 jJIj d^j Li-jl
•^V iriji'i ^/*j*< ^jil tJC- ui-jI 4i-i ^
iZJj-i tijl jj jftf^ ^^\ Ji ti^l tub ^^'1^ CS^j i^\ CCi ^i-S^" C^ J^-*^
^J.,^ **._, tlX* ^"b jCcI Jl^ u)^r* i^ I»!; k^j-" *^' '-^-* u^-\^ I*!; •^j-',
rl* <^j-' ^ ^ -^y^ ^ wW* '-^" «^^ w"-' u:-=i— y\j) csi^ j^v i^y'i
»_xj-b CjH i/jj J (^:-—-. cy,^ iiiO*^ ii-^sT-" Jiji ^J^ (JX* (•!; 1^^ oiS ..pi^-kjjS J
^'^^ ti-i1 ,;/U-j£ ^\ jj ^^ ,;r-i^ ^yUjiA 1^ (.Ij ^_^ cjlS CJ^ iJ-H^ <^
*-*- CS-* t^jJ *w J j!y t.:-^* .^_^ i^_;lS ^j^ ^pi ^ ^J^ '^lt'];! t^ "^
tr^~ c/' J^f *^ '^■^ ^ ^j^ «^:' «-^ J^ ^^^.M. ^ *^iyk uW=*
^f^yC;K JU^ k;™c^ jU,
" Brother, said Maharaja Rawana wliat means can we devise to put
to death this diminutive monkey (who has played such mischievous
tticks^
leB
A GRAMMAR OF THE
tricks), seeing that of all the various weapons employed not one h^s liad
the effect of wounding him?" Hanumun (overheaiing this question)
replied, *' O my lord, if your imperial majesty wishes to slay your servant,
and that his death should be immediate, cause his whole body to be trap-
ped in clolh; when so wrapped let oil be thrown upon him, and that
being done, let the body of your servant be consumed by applying fire
to the cloth, flora the head of your servant down to his feet." Having
heard this, Maharaja Rnuana gave instant orders for wrapping folds of
cloth round his body, which his people proceeded to put in execution;
but as soon as Hamiman felt the wrapper, he began to increase his own
size, and although some hundred pieces of cloth were used, still were
they insufhcient for wrapping him, for the more Ihey attempted to wrap,
the more his bulk was enlai'ged. The king then gave command for
Opening the warehouses, and ali the cloth stored therein was brought
forth and employed to wrap the body of llanuman, but still it was not
sufficient. All the cloth that could be found in the king's palace was
expended to as little purpose. He then ordered a request to be conveyed
to Sita Dcwi, that she would furnish such cloth as might be in her
possession. As soon as Hanunidn heard that Si(a Dctvi was to be
called upon to contribute, (thinking it lime to desist), he clapped his
tail between his legs, and cried out, " It is enough ; I can no longer endure
tliis torment; begin now to throw the oil upon me." Maharaja Rawana
then gave orders for pouring oil over him, and when his people had
poured out some hundred jars, he directed them to set fire to every part
of his body. The wrapping cloth was all presently in a flame, but the
person of llanuman did not sustain the smallest injury. When only a
small portion of the cloth, at the extremity of his tail, remained uncon-
sumed,
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 189
suoied, he jumped upon the roof of the king's palace and set it in a
blaze ; he then jumped upon the houses of the nobility, the ministers,
and principal officers, and finally upon those of all the inhabitants of the
city of Langka'-puri^ which were burnt in a general conflagration ; the
house iu which Stta Deivt resided alone remaining untouched by the
flames. This being accomplished, he plunged into the sea, and as soon
as the fire of his tail was extinguished, he repaired to the presence of hi^
royal mistress^ to whom he said, " O princess come now along with me,
and suffer thy slave to convey thee to Sri Rdma^ thy beloved lord."
" Thou knowest, O Hanuman^ replied the princess, that I have bound
myself by a solemn vow, never to suffer any male being to put his arms
about my body, excepting my honoured lord alone, (and cannot therefore
be the companion of thy flight]. But is not this Sri Rama a valiaQt
personage, unrivalledSin this world, ^u^ boasting a fame as extensive as
the universe ? Now when the wife of such a man has been ravished froiqi
bim, is he incapable of effecting her recovery himself, that he shoul<|
commission another person to execute for him the office of restoring hi3
wife to his bosom ? Must not his high reputation be tarnished in' the
opinion of mankind ? I will tell thee, Hanumdn, what is tlie desire of
ray heart ; that he may himself put Mafiaraja Rawana to death, and
rescue me with a mighty arm, and a prowess worthy of his exalted name.
Lay these my sentiments, O Hanumdn^ at the feet of my lord, and faijl
not to communicate to him my resolution.*' The princess then added ;
<^ Pursue the route I shall point out for thy return. Ascend the moun-
tain of Sarandiby where thou wilt perceive a black rock, the spot where*
upon ADAM alighted in his descent from heaven. Make thy obeisance
to this rock| embrace and kiss it ; and having 30 4pjie it wj^l serve thee
G c c for-
igo
A GRAMMAR OF THE
for a position from whence to spring when thou jurapest back to the
presence of thy master." Having heard these words he threw himself
at the feet of the princess, and then left her to proceed on his journey.
Having ascended the mountain of Sarandib, and approached the black
rock, that sacred spot where the prophet ADAM first touched the earth,
he prostrated himself before it, grasped it with his arms and kissed it.
He then shook himself, and reduced his size to the height of a span
only; when making a spring from the rock, he jumped towards the city
of Lakar-katakiaiii and in an instant arrived there. Upon presenting
himself to SrJ Rama, he was asked at what time he had returned ? He
replied, " this very moment," and then throwing himself at Rama's
feet, he made a full report to him of all that he had seen, of all that he
had heard, and all that he had done, from the commencement of his
embassy to its ultimate completion. Every circumstance was faithfully
narrated. Sri Rama, after expressing his joy at hearing that Slta
Dexvi was still living, addressed Hanuman in these words. " O Ha-
numan, every proceeding of thine, evei-y act thou hast performed merits
my approbation as good service, with the exception only of what relates
to the burning of the city of LatQka-pfm. This was not an act of
manly valour. I feel sentiments of strong compassion for the (unfortu-
nate inhabitants of the) city. And what useful purpose could its de-
struction answer?" Hamiman hung down his head and remained
silent. After a short pause Rama said to him ; " Now, Sanumdn,
what is your opinion as to the most practicable means of transporting our
army, which consists of many hundred thousand troops, to iMtigka-purl,
which (as you know) is an island surrounded by the sea?" " My opi-
nion is, replied Hanuman, that our only effectual operation will be that
of
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 191
of damming out the sea by a mole, to serve as a bridge for marching the
army into Langka-^purV
chV ^i^A' c;^.^?^ u?^ Lhi^ ^^ J*^ cr?^ y^ ^J^ ^r^ J^*^ ^'^
^♦ ^ jXiu y^ l J {^;^} ^^jy^ {J^*^ Aj Lffj^ ^^^ J^ (l^ J<^j^ 4^^ '«^ ^^ (^;:*^ (^^
" Orders were then given by Maharaja Rawana for admittmg Ha-
nunian to the audience (as ambassadour from Sri Rama). When he
vras introduced to the presence, he perceived the monarch seated upon a
high throne, surrounded by all the feudal princes, the nobles, ministers,
and warriours, and resolving that his master's consequence should not
sufier from any degradation of himself, he extended his tail to the length
of an hundred fathoms, and having coiled it in spiral folds, he sat upon
it ; by which means he and Maharaja Rawana were seated at an equal
degree of elevation. Having thus placed himself, he communicated the
proposals of Sri Rama, and delivered his letter to the Maharaja"
<L- j^ 4^1 J\^ ^3iA jAi\ JU cfjM yy |»lij* ^ ^j5-.l y'l^S Ai^J C
jui ^j^ ^j ^ia 4^* c;^V >W-^ ii9«d^ f^^ «-^^ j^\ vi^ c^J=^ s^^
.>1
■^
192 A GRAMMAR OF THE
JiX- yU jj^ r*^^j *jJ-fc ^yJ t;:^- yU.j i»LiJ ^^- jjl i_^^ ^^J; Ail; ^^J
^ ^ .«Ijkj^ ^^ jj^A^jV t^ ^^ jAjj ^;^! ^ja ^\i ^\ -^^.
JjUj Aiul ,*;*ss:» jj^) ijS^ AAi\ y,^ ^ ^\ ^ j^\) ^J^^jjij i;fi^ Ijs--
tJ^ iJh*^^ vh^ tji^ it}''^y Jii^ '^' vif!;** w^-^j* «A*^ iJjj'V cA>
J^" LJ>» (ij''^ <-^'* ^ ^ J'*** C^^-^ "^ *^Ji;; ^!>» >//* wj'" C^
^^^ <«Sj\ c:^jO Ji! ^*;ijiO j»Cj:^ jjcj» ^^} J-**, ^^jsS (^y tl^ w^ J^-
" It faas already been mentioned that the wife (of Jndra Ajit)^ the
princess Komala Indra Diĕwl, was in a swoon (at the time of his depar-
ture for the field of battle, under the waUs of Lan^Aa-puri)i but upon
hearing the war shout of his army, she suddenly started, .and awoke from
her state of insensibility. Perceiving that he was no longer near her, and
' intelligence' arriving of his being slain, she wept and fainted away, H«r
mother came to her, lamenting and weeping, and sprinkled her with rose
water. Upon recovering she threw her arms aix)ut the neck of her
infant daughter, and then loudly gave vent to hex grief in these words :
" Alas my honoured lord ! O thou who wert the ornament of my life,
thou art lost, and where shajl I search for thee,? thou hast vanished,
and where shall I seek thee ? Where is now my lord, that his sister
(spouse) may find him ? In the plain, I pray thee, where is my lord ?
in the mountains, where is my lord ? in the woods, where is my lord ?
In the field of battle have you chanced to see my brother, where his
sister may fiind him out ? Why did my lord abandon this his unfortunate
and
MALAYAN LANGUAGE.
<93
and wretched mate ? At the very moment of his pressing her to 'hig
bosom, he disappeared from her sight. In what place is he conceded
from the view of his disconsolate, forlorn sister ? My brother was en-
dowed with superior wisdom. None could equal him, none coultf be
placed in comparison with him. Alas, those ferocious beasts have glutted
their appetites (with his Oesh), savage as the rhinoceros who devours its
own ofifspring ! Alas, my lord, tliy child is left, a helpless and destitute
orphan ; she is reduced to the state of one in need of charitable protec-
tion ; to the state of a captive slave, liable to be profaned by the touch
of vulgar hands." The princess then bid farewell to her mother, with
the intention of ascending the funeral pile of her husband; but the
mother, with a flood of tears, embraced and kissed her daughter, endea-
vouring with sweetly-aHectionate words to sooth and divert her from the
resolution of burning herself. " Thint not, my child, said she, of
making thyself a sacrifice whilst the age of thy infant is yet so tender.
When she shall stand less in need of thy care, do as thou mayest judge
right." The princess then seized a kris, and attempted to stab herself,
but her mother snatched the weapon from her hand."
Extracts from the Poem of Radin Mantri and Kani
Tambuhan.
CJ^ ^^ -i^ uylfc ^jjn * C^— cl ^;*U fXJj* liJ^rf
»94
A GRAMMAR OF THE
4/> i4* ^\ ^>-
jj^ fcj^ t_*j»- d^jJ
j-->j; c^l jAj eijfl
<^^^^ tt// «:;'!?'" s^y^
Vjj- cSSi JjITj 1^1^
*A;? '^ JV tt)^^
^J^J l:^ w^" u9* s^'
« us
aAL^ jJ!^ ^1
* >«>;; d«=^ t^> *^
* '^r'J '&'^ ^Ji \J^-'^J
MALAYAN LANGUAGE.
^95
^,
U ,.i Cil
cT^V J^ fc=^ 4^
*^Jf^ tJi-^ tt;*J^" tt^ '^^
t;j^ ^llj- e;-a» ^bo
<^^ yjU ^J ^^JJ
^j^ uy Jh ^^
«yj*^ f^ til» t9-4^
* . ^U»^ . j.j^ ^\j cl^
* *i!^/; s^lr» (»?^ c;i'i;
«
«
«
«■
«
«
yV t^/ J!j^ *;>-«>
ti^ cA^ ««Ss'V cM'i^
4^ ^^\S JIj^ j^U 4iUU
?™^^ «S^^ Smm^^T ^*^fi^ ^jp
•Xr u:^ JJU 4^j2l «dSjcj^
^ 4/j^ cH*^ u^^ 4l^j
* wy r^ '-'*' y^i \
,ft;«l*^
196 A GRAMMAR OF THE
j^^y^j^M'^y
^
0^9^^ ^r"^ ^^
i^J^ Jj^ J^J ^
^
m
t^jjy fJmlA* y-cLo jjjjJ i/
4t
•rfr*- «yt*»; ^J* f9?"»
i^j^JiJih'^
^
«liSry J^/s» •*»
^jy^} d^ ^"^y
Hs
W*- «^i"*; tt,?J*/ H-?-
Upon coming in sight of the ornamented pleasure garden,
The heart of the prince felt new rapture.
The blossoms were the subject of his admiration,
And the birds drew near as if to welcome his steps.
jRadin immediately took his arrow-tube.
To shoot the birds that were within his view.
They alighted upon every rambutan tree,
And flew and hopped around ;
Some on the flower-bearing nagakehsir^
Fluttering about in every direction ;
All seemiiig to invite the approach of Radin Mantrip
Who still advancing nearer to them,
Blew an arrow through his tube
And struck a serendit bird.
It descended near to a tree bearing chumpaka flowers,
Within the enclosed precincts of the garden,
And falling gradually.
Alighted upon the loom at which Kani Tambuhan worked.
One of her companions hastening towards her, said,
^* Will not your highness gendy try to catch it ?
<< As if it had been commissioned hither,
^ Th/B bird comes to deliver itself up/* Kani
MALAYAN LANGUAGE- 197
Kani Tambuhan instantly arose, . .
And endeavoured to seize the bird as it ran from her.
Radin (in the mean time) thus addressed Wtra Dandani;
" Which Wjay, my brother, flew the bird we saw just now?
^^ I wish you to catch and bring it to me.'*
Wtra Danddni made his obeisance, and then went his way. .
^' If, said he, it has fallen within these lofty walls.
By what contrivance shall I be able to g^t at it ? '*
He proceeded onward, alone,
Until he reached the gate of the. enclosure.
There, espying through a crevice.
He perceived the bird fluttering about.
Radin presently followed him to the spot,.
And looking through an interstice of the wall.
Said, " Who may that be, my brother,
^^ Whose appearance bespeaks her th^ daughter of a prince ? "
Continuing to gaze, his heart began to throb,
And he could no longer restrain his impatience.
His astonishment deprived him of utterance, "^
His senses being overpowered by what his eyes beheld. .
WJra Dandani smiled, though with feelings of anxiety,
Knowing the state of his companion's heart ;
And as he perceived him lost in admiration,
Thus spoke, as he stood behind him. .
'^ I think it is advisable that we should return, ...
^- And leave ofi* gazing at the daughters of other men.
E e e *'Yonr
198 A GRAMMAR OF THE
^( Your servant has heard it reported x
*^ That the person you see, is no other than a captive princess.
*< Do not, I pray your highness, remain so near,
<^ As she is guarded by the order of your royal mother*
^< So soon as you are married (suitably to your rank),
'< Can your father have any objection to giving her to you ? ''
• Radin replied, with an animated countenance,
*^ I do not chuse to retufn.
^* Order the keeper of the gate to come hither,
^^ That I may question him myself."
Wira Dandani bowed and left him.
He said to the porter, ^^ Follow me immediately ;
^^ By Radin Mantri is your attiendance required.**
Affrighted at the summons he came running,
And when he drew near, made his obeisance.
Bending his head to the earth.
Radin^ smiling, said to him,
<< Open this gate my old friend."
The porter, still approaching, said respectfully,
<< Your slave is afraid to do what his mistress has forbidden.
^^ Her orders to me are to guard these stone walls,
^^ And not to suffer any one to enter.**
Radin said to him angrily,
His face glowing with passion,
** You must open it instantly ;
'^ And no person beside myself shall enter.
" If
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. ' 199
^^ If you refuse, be assured
<^ I shall immediately cut your head to atoms/'
The gate-keeper became exceedingly terrified ;
His body quaked and his bones ratded.
Without being able to say one word in reply,
He drove back the bolt of the doon
The entrance being thus opened by the old man.
The indignation of the prince was soothed.
He stepped forward and passed into the garden,
Leaving his companions withoutside the gate.
Upon Radin MantrVs enteringi
He was observed by all the young attendantSi
Every one of whom ran away,
Leaving Kani Tambuhan entirely to hersdC
Radin drawing near whilst her back was towards him,
Suddenly snatched her shuttle and seized her hand*
Kani Tambuhan being alarmed looked about.
Saying to herself, " Who can this be?"
She tried to run behind the garden-seat,
When Radin, smiling sweetly, said to her,
«< O ! my lovely celestial nymph,
" Whither do you wish to flee ?
^ Your eyes glisten, your countenance glows ;
" Do not, my soul ! be terrified or angry.
^^ Your brother's motive for coming hither,
^* Is only to make inquiry of yourself,
" What
200 A GH'A'MMAR OT THE
" What country gave you birth,
" And what events have brought you to this place ?
" What, let me ask is your name,
" And how do you name the cloth you are weaving ? **
Kani Tambuhan wept and' hung her head,
Her mind being extremely agitated.
Gently making her obeisance,
She said with a sweet, affecting voice,
*' The name of your servant is Kani Tambuhan^
" And that of my work is karingsang xvayang.
" Our gracious mistress has given directions,
" That we should all be daily employed In weaving,
** For the lady whom your highness is to take to wife,
" The princess whom you are going to woo ^t'Barifar Kulan*''
To this Radin replied* with a laugh, •
" To Banjar Kulanl ^m' rxot^om^y - .
He embraced her neck, and cat-essed her, sayings
" O I my life, how beautiful thy countenance ;
^' Thou art to be compared to the celestial nymphs,
" And if thou vanishest from me,' where can I search for thee?*'
Radin Mantri then proceeded to kiss her,
When she cried out, and wrested herself from him^
AU the damsels now thought of interfering,
And felt indignant at his conduct.
" This proceeding of the prince (said they)
<^ Will presently draw upon us much anger from the queen.*'
•(."
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 201
jj;*l;0 ViJlj JJW ^U * JLJ^ UljjL, jj^ ^.JJ
ufyf^ JP «-s-^ * iO^t^ lA */ry «J^
^>^ uuili tU:Sit ^jw * ^jii^ ji\ Jcj\^ ^
e«?^ u;^^: ,^ 4Ux- * ,j;safc ,Jb J ^?^ J^
tt*!-^ JSy y^ er^" * uy^-^ c^ ^ y)
^^j» JJy »JJ1 ,4^ * j^j- ^^ j^ 45-
v^^
F f f
202
A GRAMMAR OF THE
«;*>?<■" tt^ ."^^ "•^ *1<J
t^jU u^'^ uJli. ^^j ^U * i^jjiji J-^ cyl^ji y;fc^" jj^
JUy C^H jV d)^
uiji/ ^^^-^ ^y<ji
^^^^JL^ i-^U vl^lS (j'tyjJ
¥:
¥:
^j3Jjy vllC3y <d^J
^J^ ^A J^ JPy uj*^
^/^L iK;\S u:^b jUaj
^^J *jU .U4». jj^U- *
u JS^ J^ ^j! C^,
MALAYAN LANGUAGE.
«Q3
» *>
jy t?^^ ^P (J'^^ J^"
^ Uw i W i rt «5 L^»« av (fill
!/^ s^-/*^ jv <-=-^.^
u^jj ^ ^^ J^ ^\^
" The queen then gave command
For calling the bostangi to her presence.
The bostangi attended, and drawing near,
The royal personage said to him ;
«* Take with you St Tambuhan^
" And convey her to the woods/*
To which she added, in a low voice/
*^ Extinguish her so that she shall be no more seen.
" Dare not to vary from my orders."
The bostangi retired, making his obeisance.
The hearts of all who were present throbbed,
Their countenances became pale, and their bodies trembled*
They
£04 A GRAMMAR OF THE
They thought within their, hearts,
This queen's disposition is most wicked ;
Her Imind is diabolically vile ;
And^ over her passion she has no command.
All ihe ^^riiicesses felt emotions of pity,
On perceiving the situation of Kani Tambuhan.
The queen again siiid,
« Let SI TnmbuKaH be immediately takefi away ;
'^ And should you. meet the prince (in the forest),
^^ Desire my son to come to me with speed»**
Kani Tdfkbuhah then arose,
And with ^low siep^ decended (from the palace),
Followed by her'cobsoUng friend Kani Tedahani
Thtlmstiffigi walking in front of them.
To those who beheld her departing,
She appeared like the moon amongst passing clouds ;
Like the moon in the fulness of her orb,
Which seems the brighter the more it is cootemplaled.
Every beholder was filled with compsis6ion,
Kani Tambuhan did not give a look behind her.
Having reached the outer gate,
She sat down awhile to rest her feet ;
Impressed with the idea
That her existence drew near td a close.
She reflected on the tenderness 6f her husbaad, .
And then upon her present condition.
«• There
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 205
** There appears no probability of meeting
" (said she) my lord, Radin Inu:*
The tears gushed from her eyes i
And her two attendants symjpathised with hen
The bostangi said to Kani Tambuhani
" Let us proceed, my lady, with more expedition,
" Towards the forest where game abounds,
" That we may the sooner find the prince."
Having reached the bank of a river,
The strand of which was beautifully smooth,
She felt extreme lassitude.
And grasped the hands of her two female friends.
Her respiration became violent
As the sound of rushing wind*. .
She reposed for a moment beneath a tree.
Doubtful of being able to proceed.
The bostangi again said to Uie wdmien,
^^ I pray you keep moving slowly onward ;
(( We shall presently have passed- the woody
*^ And shall arrive at the hunting-ground.'*
Kani Tambuhan set forward once more,
Making an effort to draw her feet after her.
The notes of the velvet-coated birds,
Added only to her melancholy,
Serving to remind her of Radin* s conversation,
When he amused her in the hours of repose.
G g g They
2o6 A GRAMMAR OP THE
The)r now came to a level rock,
Formed by nature like a seat
Their conductor turning towards them, said,
" Here, my lady, is our resting place."
Kani Tambutian got up and sat upon it,
Her feet hanging down from excess of fatigue.
Kani Tedahan^ her faithful attendant, said ;
" The apprehensions of your servant are strongly excited»
'^ Led as we are into this wilderness,
" Where there is no mark of human footstep."
These words increased the anxiety of her mistress.
And pearly drops ran down her face.
She uttered not a word.
But only wiped the tears from her eyes.
Her two attendants also wept,
And continued in a state of stupefaction.
Kani Tambuhan rising from her seat, said,
" Wherefore, my old man, are we brought hither ?
*^ The day being now far advanced,
" Is the prince Radin Mantri still at a distance ? "
The bostangi replied in a serious tone,
" This, my lady, is the limit of our journey.
<< Your slave received command from the queen^
*^ To conduct your highness into this wood,,
^* And here to put you to deaths
'^ On account of your cohabitation with Radin Mantrif
*« Who
MALAYAN LANGUAGE, 207
" Who was matched with a princess at Banjar Kulan^
" And may now refuse to take he^ to wife."
Hearing these words from Kani Tambuhan
He was affected with strong emotions of pity.
Approaching, he mildly said to her,
" Pardon, O lady ! whatever offence I may be obliged to commit.
^ How can your slave avoid it,.
^^ Under the terror of being put to the test of an oath ?
^ This day, my orders are to extingiush your life,
^< And I cannot possibly evade themJ*
^ If you should meet with my lord the prince,
^^ Convey to him my humble salutation,
<< With my wishes for perfect happiness in his marriage,
^^ And a long and prosperous reign.*'
Kani Tedahan having attentively listened
To all the commands of her mistress.
Was overwhelmed with grief;
And as she bent her head upon, her lap,.
The tears gushing from her eyes,
Moistened the garments of Kani TambuJian.
^ From your childhood, said she, I have taken care of you,
" Whilst we still dwelt at Tarymg-^puru.
" No difference ever arose between us ;
^ And we have ^been companions in misfortune..
« Your
5to8 A GRAMMAR OF THE
^^ Your servant's wish has long been,
*^ That in death also we should be companions.
^^ Reflection only augments my grief,
^^ And my heart melts within me.
^^ Slay me first, O my father !
^< That I may not witness the fate of my mistress.**
The princess then said with dignity,
^' Proceed to execute the commands of your queen !"
Her words thus pronounced
Excited pity in the heart of the bostangi^
Whose own feelings would have restraii^ him from the deed.
He drew his hnSj and again he sheathed it ;
But thrust, at last, the long and well-tempered blade
Into her breast, till the weapon appeared at her back.
Kani Tambuhan on receiving the fatal wound,
Fell without a struggle to the earth.**
Specimens of the Pantun or proverbial Sonnet.
\JLi ^JU^ iW j«* ^ t^ ^^ (^'*^ *^ ^^^
^di*^ if^ jj^ Jib ^ ^\C ^JU^ Ji^j^
ii^Ji
^^ C^1jw« aU oLi ¥r ^Oji^ 2fJw» Jj^ JljV
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. »09
** Butterflies sport on the wing around,
They fly to thfe sea by the reef of rocks.
My heart has felt uneasy in my breast,
From former days to the present hour.
They fly to the sea by the reef of rocks.
The vulture wings its flight to Bandan.
From former days to the present hour,
Many youths have I admired.
The vulture wings its flight to Bandan,
Dropping its feathers at Patanu
Many youths have I admired,
But none to compare with my present choice.
His feathers he let fall at Patanu
A score of young pigeons.
No youth can compare with my present choice,
Skilled as he is to touch the heart.**
«* A maiden draws water from the well ;
The bucket falls off*, leaving only the cord.
H h h Consent
a 10 A G R A MM A R OF T H R
Consent, 017 life, to the departure, of your &iend,
% • -
And do not grieve at the separation."
" The heron flies into the air,
And dashes down the fish it had caught..
Forbear to grasp burning embars,
Or, feeling the heat, you will quickly let them go.'*
^' Large ants in the bambu-cane*.
A flasket filled with rose-water.
When the passion of love seizes my frame^
From you alone I can expect my cure.!*
Extracts from a moral and satirical Posm;
H/PjV ^'^J^J <^2-**^ ' "^ ^Mji J*^ ^^^ jl^'
* If
MALAYAN LANGUAGE.
211
^* IT yoU| my son, are about: to take a wife,
You should look for these four qualifications ;
In order that your family may be prosperous,
And your friends may have pleasure in frequenting your house.
In the first place, chuse a person of good birth ;
In the second, let her be the owner of some thousands ;
Thirdly, elegant in person and sweet in countenance ;
Fourthly, of good understanding and accomplished mannerti.
Should she be deficient in any one of these.
Take not such a woman to wife^.
If you do, your friends will avokl your company^
And you will sit moping like a spectre."
. .
J!^ 1/«!;
**r^ t»!/ wj/ cA*
jIU Jio ^Jj^ »Ji^ juV
Mr
• 1 1 M
^^ It is true that those of the present race are wise ;
They have much science, but plain good sense. is wanting;
Thl^'
tit A GRAMMAR OP THE
^
They are able to count the stars in the sky,
But cannot tell when their own faces are smutted*
Their employment is mutual obloquy and recrimination,
And every place is filled with inquisitive tattlers»
In these days the behaviour of young women is immodestf
Flirtmg and toymg with the young men.
It was not the case with maidens of former times.
Who possessed much delicacy and sense^f shame.
Circumstances are now very different, .
And all sort of conversation is familiar to them.
Where there are a number of youthful gallaxits, ,
There you will find the young women assembledi
Whose manners assume a variety of hues.
The consequence of all this is but too obvious.
Even thq children now o'days (imitate their elders]^
And both boys and girls are equally forward.
They play about promiscuously together,
With all the familiarity of man and wife.
Are not such things evident signs,
That the end of the world is drawing near? "
Extract from the Annals of the Kingdom oi Acldn,
tl^ 1 «AA ^^U J »^\^ Jjj ^^> Ji j^\^j\j>, ^ cyU yj«jj ^£^ ^il^
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. ai)
<aA* ^ Jj^ '■^=-**^' tj*^' uP^ L/Vj^ i-S-**^ f^'** "^^ •'^J ^'jl t:;^ b^^Wj^
t^jU j_^ 4*.y Jjl ^j_,l— 4-. j^li ^y *Jl V>A t^\J i}i, 4\J *^jjl Uui^V (tiJIjlj
til)? s^j^ '^j* j*^ ti-* HrL>'* *" it'^-'*^' JW- f**^ ^-^z-* (J^' ^ ujW-" m'V:^ CS^
WL^l j^lijj i^V/ '^:-^ (J'^J *■=-;' «^ US' *^'j' ly'"* nil |^\j oJjiSl. j^j
iy;^l; ,_/l^ tiJjli y_>lA ^^U; alll jjjj i4oy ylj y^\ oJj (ISU j^jU crJj >> Jy
^'U/ Mj^ J\ ilijjl ^^jji J li^l AiS:^ dJU ^jU ily jO J!^ i^J jj^\; jj ^^'WjJ
«k» e>^ c;ljf i^" 1*7^ ^ w» •»Jlr'V" w'j c^** Jy ^j^ *^y t'j' ^J^ *"
JUll JUa- j^DaL. ^j^ CiolSjl^ j^ |JWI^Jtf wi--Oji fji\ ^J\^J tlC. 1 1 1 6 ,^11
" The king our sisvereign died on Sunday the eighth day of the month
XuTkadah, in the year io88 {1677), and Pdduka Sri sultan Gkayat
Siutk began bis reign on the eame day. He sat on the Ihroneduring
the period of eleven years and eight days, and died on Sunday the
Beventhdayof the month zuT hijjak^ in the year 1099 (1687), uponwhich
day also Paduha Sri sultan Kamalat Shah became king, and his reign
lasted eleven years, four montlis, and two days, when he was deposed.
After this there was a succession of four queens, on the throne oi ^chiit,
the seat of peace, and these fenaale reigns continued during a period of
sixty years, nine months, and seventeen days. Sultan Beder al-alam
Sfieri/ Hasham Jamaled-din ascended the throne on Wednesday the
twentieth day of the month raii'fl/ ai/«r, in the year 1111 (1699), ^^^
«hen he had reigned two years, four months, and twelve days, it pleased
I i i God
SU A GRAMMAR OF THE
God in his mercy to visit him with contractions in his feet and his
hands, so that he was no longer able to perform the offices of prayer ;
upon which he voluntarily abdicated the government, and retired to a
place called Tanjong, where he died in the year 1113 (1701). On
Saturday the seventeenth day of the month ranuidan, Perkasa Alam ibn
Ibrahim obtained the crown and had reigned only two years, three
months and twenty days, when he was deposed from his government on
Wednesday the seventh day of the month muharram. After an inter-
regnum of about three months duration, in the year 1115 (»703), the
son of Beder al-a/am succeeded to the throne, by the title of Paduka
Sri sultan J amal at-alam."
The Memoirs of Kei Damang and his Family, written by Inchi
La'udin, his youngest Son, thus conclude.
r^u ^^''1 ij^j-»-« tj'^ji "^^ ti *^^ «-^ i ^i * ■ ' i^jij ^jxiJL^ v-- jjjj
JUj yJ: i^,^ (^.'J» '^lA' ■'^''^' iJ'H^ (_ftCS&^ ,i^ <lL_ij ji.-U jjK jfjj jl ^^Uj
^b J tij't^jS i^j*j1 ^.1 i>^ ^'-«-« ti \Jj fyy J^ *^" i^^ '^^ J^ J^ (*!!-'
»/iJ-» cH.-^]/. Ji'J^ 'f-^ 1^ tJ^^ (i^J^l/ i/^ J^ '^^ ii;«J «-^ J ^j*- tt^l i)^
^ Ljj J!j j^Ij ^J^ jjjj ^LtJb t^jtoUi* j^ '■^^ (J^j AiU^-. ^1
*< From the period of the loss of their noble father, it is not to be
conceived
MALAYAN LANGUAGE.
•■«
conceived what cares and troubles have been experienced by every indi-
vidual of the family of Kei Damang ; the consequence of having left
their native land of Samangka. The sons were separated and scattered
over various countries, as their fortunes happened to lead them. Some
remained in the island of Sumatra, some proceeded to the island of
Bali, whilst others sought those parts of Java which lie beyond the
jurisdiction of the Dutch Company. Such were their resting places.
Like birds they directed their flight to wherever the trees of the forest
presented them with edible fruit, and there they alighted. They were
in the state of chickens who had lost their careful mother. When they
found persons who were disposed to favour and compassionate them, td
those they devoted their services. Such has been the condition of Kei
Damang's sons since the death of their noble parent. For the informa-
tion of all respectable persons desirous of knowing their story, this nar-
rative has been committed to writing, and so faithfully, that those who
read may consider themselves as eye-witnesses of the adventures it re*
lates. But the Almighty alone knows what is good and what is evil for
(or, of) his servants in this world."
Extracts from Legal and Theological Works.
i_jbj ij^ji ^jl jL; ya~ ^jj jjj J )i)W*- (iu'^ stLj^ w^r ^^'^^ wjf^ •'^ ^^
<ihf i/ J-^ tf^ "H^ «^^ if^ ^^ d-^J^ •" liW- "^^ inj^ *^=-^-' Ji^ w^J'
" Thfe
0t6
A QRAMMAE OF THE
« The subject of this chapter is the prayers to be used on the occasion
of eclipses of both kinds, namely, those of the sun and those of the
IQOOU. In the first place (it should be mentioned thai) the learned have
not ascertained the true nature of the eclipse of the sun, for shining w
be does with his own light, it should not be liable to variation, fiut
fvith respect to the eclipse of the moon, as she has no light in herself,
and only derives it from the brightness of the sun, it follows that when
that light is hid from her by the earth's being in the hne between her and
the sun, she should become obscured or eclipsed^"
^UiJ 4yi is^J Jji ti ^U Jj ^U cuU fi- t^J^ ^\^ t:^j ^\^ ^U ^_j^
>Ar iiA' '■/^ji ^ Jm '^i b''^' ^^ '^ ^y^ i^->^j-^ *<fj^ s^ '^j^^
" Thus it is (speaking of the visibility and invisibility of the Deity)
with the light of the sun which is transmitted to the moon ; for the .light
of the latter is not its own proper light, but only that of the sun com*
inunicated to it, and consequently the moon possesses only a reflected
light from that of the sun. On this account it is that we sometimes see
the moon shinuig with a full, and sometimes with a diminished light, and
that at other times she is entirely deprived of ligliL"
ij^ JjHji H-^ *Er^ ilU\^,^_jy dU C^yj r^jj!)^ (_--- f^^ljf U-V.1 *M iJ'jI
Ah w'j ^^ y^ t^ ^^- w^ t^ j}^ji jv* ^ ^ w'-* ^j y^ i^
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 817
yb ^j'^_Ot^ l\i (^ L^ t=^ Jjiy iZJ\jJ ^ aU Jj JJHj (^ ^^J t^Jai
liT^l-» (i«?» tj^^ t^ eA^ ^r^ tr^ Jj=0^ **' J'J Ji^ sJ;^ u/W^ *^
" The keblat (or directiuu ol' tbe face in prayer) varies according to
the different situation of countries (with respect to the temple of Mecca).
For the keblat of Egypt the North star must be brought to bear in a
direction from the hinder part of the left ear ; for that of Irak, in a
direction from the hinder part of the right ear ; for that of most part of
Yemen, from the fore part of the left side ; for that of Syria, from the
back ; for that of Gujerat, from the right shoulder ; for the keblat of
most Malayan couiuuc» ^nd of Achin, the North star must be in a
direction from the fox's part of the right flank."
jU jIJU- ^ly CJfi u:~^ A^'^ (^-^ '-^ i^j^ '^y '•^-^ J-^^ t^. u-^ 'iJT^
iL^\) cX* tj/J uijlj-j iS i^jj i-s-*!-» J:r*' Jj W^^^ J*^ "^V" w'"' (J'y '■^'H-^
tiiV li)^-* i^y "=-^ u'^jf ij^ .yijV^ «-^^y '^!-^ ***^^ ti s?/^ ■" (j-lP
Jjj >.i"fei-« iJ^ ti '/a^ *" L-"*!)^ I— ^ ■^ ^j aJljw CX< t^J^f^ '-^_/ '-ii-ir iijlj^ jUl
" Upon a person's saying to the Prophet (on whom be the blessing of
God, and peace), I see the (new) moon, he began his Fast, and he gave
command to all men to fast also. When the fasting shall have been
duly observed for thirty complete days, of which a respectable person is
to bear testimony, it is proper to discontinue it, although the moon should
not then have become visible, nor any vapour arisen to obstruct the view
K k k of
21« A GRAMMAR OF THE
of it. When the (new) moon has been observed from any town, it Is
incumbent upon the Jnliabitaots of any other town agreeing with the
former in respect to the time of sun-rise (situated in the same meridian],
to coDimeiice their Fast also, in consequence of such agreement ; but
where a coincidence with respect to the time of sun-rise does not exist,
it is not required that the Fast should take place in that town where the
moon has not yet been seen, because the difference of the time of ha'
becoming visible may be occasioned by the difference of the time of sun-
rise at the two places (that is, by the difference of their longitude)."
v/*^ tJj' lA! ^ ^^'^ '-^' ^^"^ ^'^J 1^'^ ^ ^■J' '-'^ ^^-^ ^J^ L^^ iJ-^
^\j ^[^ ^ <.ji.^} 'j^. jj ^jjc^ ^ifj iijji j1 ij^^^j: y_ u^jp ^i; '^^ji ^i^
" It behovelh us to know, and to bear in mind, and to believe, and to
regulate our actions by the meaning of tlie words ^\ 3! 4\i in the Arabic
language, in Persian, and in the language of the people of Pase (the
Malayan). This symbol of Unity signifies in Arabic, " I have no other
existence than that of Cod." As rendered in Persian it has the same
meaning, and in the language of Pase it has likewise the above-mentioned
signification. Now the result of all these meanings and the intention
of all that has been stated is to prove the Unity of the essence of the
Almighty,
MALAYAN LANGUAGE.
atg
Almighty, with all his perfections, and also make manifest his greatness
and bis glory comprehended in that Unity." (This perversion of the
meaning of the well-known Mahometan symbol or profession of faith,
" there is» iio god but God," appbars to be a pious fraud of some sect,
lo answer the purposes of their mystical doctrine. PasJ here spoken of
was formerly a city of considerable note, on the northern coast of Su-
matra, afterwards subjected to the dommion of Achin, and reduced -to
insignificance. The book from whence these extracts are made, written
in a £ne hand and with uncommon accuracy, was probably composed «t
that place.)
*^ •^yr^y ti "^ '^ "-Wrl-* ti fr /i-' nf^ w'-^ tr!;?" *^J^ ^^^ ut-^1 o'**^
aib\ C^i^jL. ^j\ ^jj\ Jl* M Ji,J^ ilSU i^^ ^•i^\ ^jj Jl* ^\ ^\ji
" When God Almighty had created the Holy Ghost, that is to say
the pure Spirit, he said unto him, thou shalt be as a mirror, and in thee
alone shall be beheld all existing things. Some time after the creation
of the Holy Ghost, God created all spirits or souls, and the Holy Ghost
is to all spirits what the stem is to the branches, and they are to him what
the branches are to the stem; but branches which cannot be separated
from their stem nor iall off from it."
B20 A GRAMMAR OF THE
J»- U1-V.1 jj-l ^-J ^i^ ^J^ ^^y ^\ JjV C^ ^)^ J^ w^"^ J»" i^^-^
" Now there ia no oliici cAiGteiii;c distinct from the existcuce of God,
and all these numerous objects (of sense) serve only to manifest the exist-
ence of the One ; so also^o all visible qualities and visible attributes serve
only to manifest His sole existence."
*' Whocvci uiideibtaiids the wurds ubove-mentioueri will certainly
know (what is meant by) his proceeding from God, and his (ultimate)
return to Him, and will certainly be aware that his own external nature
is not distinct from the essence of the Deity."
jf^J jjjj tlCi ji\ ^ J*«l *U1 Jx* Uic j'C jjy iJc^ a)jl jV J 4ĕ' UJ^J-^ *^
♦' It is with this object that some of the learned commentators have
adduced an example (of identity and diversity) in the instance of " wave"
and " water;" for with respect to appearance and name, the wave is to
be distinguished from the water; but if yon view and consider them with
respect to their real, internal nature, wave is not distinct from water, or
only so far as regards exterior form and name."
Genesis,
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. aai
Genesis, Chap. xlv.
jSj ».\^ t^!l jjye^ j^L-l ^^1 ^jj! j^b ^ *JU» 4,?;-*« *^JJ^ «JX« tl^
«Jklub j\ d^U aC^ (.X>ji AJI ClTI ^]jJyA jL> A8^ alls^ ^2^ (.U^ ui^
|Jb j^Ul^ tt^k^y «il <«iJ iJ^ *--«-. • *^ C^ ill} C^ »jjf* *Jwi Jdlt \j^
iJ^ aJ ^^f J\ Jo t^^ o«S^V e^ 4^/1 u:-^t *J^ ti <^ *"^ «i»^ «A»^
Jo j.^ JL Jo ^\ jL Jj j^j /A< C^\^ «^ o» ^^ Jj ^yf ii\Sj
J^ ^^\ y:i\ JUi^ ^^< ^U s^lL. ^Mo «uw i^^Ul^ ^" ^ O^ ^^1^ «^^
1 L 1 1
222 A GRAMMAR OF THE
L.8'.C»1 Okf H> aIJi'J W ,...\^ a\^ A««i ImJ^ iSmt
• JS* (^ W^ d;s* t^ chI» il^' d;i/'> ur**^ ■** «i»^ «ji'^ J^* ^j^— A* f^-iU
•>« d)^,:/^ ^p J*> sk> u^*» r*^ cr^ '^J^ ttje=^ «Z»*^ /l^ *!/- J** >** *^^
i(Uu ^^ ^^ ^ ^^t 4iiUjj cJ^ j^j, ci;* ^fjU^ ^^ y,b • ju
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. a^
^ ^j-T *A-. i>i-ji 'ti JIaS jL. 4s|J ^y1 J-Jl J J i£^^ J ,*^j ilj y
The Gospel of St. Matthew, Chap. vi.
4L^ ^JL- ^0H- /S1J-J1 «Hit H-r- • cly^ j\ y f,\ii (>l> ^\e i/i f>^
^P ^j r^ J^ yt^/^\ Jt^ *i^ • rcyb r^ ^^ w^w c^^^
il^ «.^Ic ^ cs^.» c>\ y f,\u jJS \fi^j Ji f^yuj jU^ Ja ^ p!U JiLiuU
/
«24 A GRAMMAR OF THE
ttf^ Atj? fs^jV» i/*^ ^)j • (-y. lh^*«> <M^«> iit>- (J^'> 4^ *ii'i*' fS-^
r^ b^ e;^'» c?i^ tji^ ^P c/^ji cj^V u-!jIj r^ J^ wy^^ • (^^
Jsj o\ |»U ^ ^^"i cjU j\ ct-il f^-^ tj * (^ '^^ *"^ w^ f^"^
"^j^ V' y^ ui^ b ^^ J** '^^Is- ^^ i/?^ '/^ «^^" ^^'-^" w;^ wy y '3^
4J ts-^J s^^^ <% ^ ^^ ^^ uJl jJ^ *jj J\J\^J^f^J\f,^ uJI t^b
f»*- oU yb jjU. t/\ oU j«| jjb r*^j^ Ala<,J . ^l^ A»jj a;y yb ^IC d»jj
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 285
t^ {> 4^rvj:^VU i^Mb f^>ij>ji f}^ uJliU ^ICS J\ ^b • C^ tliiU. c^l^
^-^ J-?-' (J^'^ t^y 1^^ J^ ^^ ulJ^ ti t^^^ ^^s-^j ^J^ v/-W«^ ^^ J>^
<^^ ^^ ^j^ J^j^ J^ ^ lH^ uJ^ ^j^Jy^ c^ ^^^-^st/^r^ ^^^
FINIS.
LONDON:
Frinied by Cnz au^i Bay lis, 75« t7f. <2uef7i Su\
Lincolu's iiiii Fields»
M m m
By the Author of this Work.
A DICTIONARY OF THE MALAYAN LANGUAGE,
IN TWO PARTS,
MALAYAN and ENGLISH, and ENGLISH and MALAYAN.
Sold by Longmaoy Hunt, Rees, Ormfi» and Brown, Paternotter-Row ; and Black, Fuiy, ind Co.j
Booksellers to the Honorable Eut-India Company, LeadenhaU-Street.
4to. Prke jgS. 2s.
Of whotn may he had, by the same Author,
THE fflSTORY OF SUMATRA.
THE THIRD EDITION,
With Corrections, considerable Additions, and an Atlas of Plates.
4to. i>rice £3. 13s, 6d.
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11